No. PG16-0222F Cowlitz Project Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility ...

No. PG16-0222F Cowlitz Project Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility Remodel BOOK 2 - Technical Provisions (Div 22 - 46)

Table of Contents Page 1 Specification No. PG16-0222F

SPECIAL and TECHNICAL PROVISIONS (BOOK 1)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 - SPECIAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.2 PROJECT LOCATION

1.3 SITE SHOWING

1.4 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION

1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMAT

1.6 CONTRACT WORK TIMES

1.7 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS

1.8 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

1.9 EVALUATION OF BIDS

1.10 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS’ AND CONTRACTOR’S CATEGORIES OF WORK

1.11 LOCAL EMPLOYMENT AND APPRENTICESHIP TRAINING PROGRAM (LEAP)

1.12 PREVAILING WAGES

1.13 PERFORMANCE (SURETY) AND RETAINAGE BONDS

1.14 WORK BY CITY

SECTION 01025 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.1 ADMINISTRATION

1.2 PROPOSAL ITEMS

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES LIST

1.4 FORCE ACCOUNT WORK

1.5 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR SURPLUS PRODUCTS OR WORK

1.6 AS-BUILTS

SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION

1.1 PROJECT ENGINEER/LEAD

1.2 MEETINGS

1.3 PERMITS

1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHERS

1.6 DIVISION OF WORK

1.7 LIMITATION OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK AREA/OR CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

1.8 ARCHAEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION

1.9 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

1.10 CONTRACT CHANGES

1.11 DIFFERING SITE CONDITION


1.12 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

1.13 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS

1.14 CITY OCCUPANCY

1.15 SUPERINTENDENT

1.16 CLEAN UP

SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

1.1 SUBMITTALS REQUESTED WITH BID

1.2 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED AT PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

1.3 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS DURING CONSTRUCTION

1.4 CERTIFICATE OF UNIT RESPONSIBILITY

1.5 "OR EQUAL" CLAUSE OR SUBSTITUTIONS

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL

1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

1.2 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

1.1 UTILITIES

1.2 JOB SHACK

1.3 ROADWAY AND TRAFFIC CONTROL

1.4 SECURITY AND ACCESS

1.5 SAFETY

1.6 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION

1.7 DUST CONTROL

1.8 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS

1.9 POLLUTION CONTROL

1.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES

1.11 SWEEPING OF ROADWAYS

SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

1.1 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL

1.2 SALVAGEABLE AND NONSALVAGEABLE MATERIAL

SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

1.1 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED UPON COMPLETION OF WORK

SECTION 01900 – GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS



1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2.1 GENERAL

3.1 GENERAL

3.2 PRE-STARTUP CHECKS

3.3 OPERATIONAL TESTING

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS - DIVISIONS 2 - 21

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK

SECTION 02 41 00 - DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

SECTION 03 11 00 – CONCRETE FORMING

SECTION 03 21 00 – REINFORCING STEEL

SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 62 00 – NON-SHRINK GROUTING DIVISION 5 – METALS

SECTION 05 12 00 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 10 10 – CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 10 20 – WOOD TRUSSES DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07 21 10 – BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07 41 10 – METAL ROOFING AND SIDING SYSTEM

SECTION 07 92 00 – SEALANTS AND CAULKING DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

SECTION 08 11 10 – STEEL DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE

SECTION 08 33 10 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

SECTION 08 53 10 – VINYL WINDOWS DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

SECTION 09 21 10 – GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 09 30 26 – VINYL FLOORING

SECTION 09 91 00 – COATINGS DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 13 34 19 – PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING

SECTION 13 34 22 – PRE-ENGINEERED COVER


TECHNICAL PROVISIONS - DIVISIONS 22 - 46 (BOOK 2)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

SECTION 22 05 21 – BUTTERFLY VALVES

SECTION 22 05 22 – BALL VALVES

SECTION 22 05 23 – CHECK VALVES

SECTION 22 05 24 – GATE VALVES

SECTION 22 05 28 – AIR RELEASE VALVES

SECTION 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 10 10 – STEEL PIPING

SECTION 22 10 11 – PVC PIPING

SECTION 22 10 12 – HDPE PIPING

SECTION 22 10 13 – COPPER TUBING

SECTION 22 14 25 – CENTRIFUGAL END SUCTION PUMPS

SECTION 22 14 29 – VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

SECTION 22 14 31 – SUBMERSIBLE NONCLOG PUMPS

SECTION 22 15 10 – COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SECTION 23 05 00 – GENERAL HVAC

SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION

SECTION 23 09 00 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

SECTION 23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

SECTION 23 31 14 – SLEEVES AND SEALS – HVAC

SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

SECTION 23 34 00 - HVAC FANS

SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

SECTION 23 41 00 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

SECTION 23 81 26 – SPLIT SYSTEM – MITSUBISHI CITY MULTI

SECTION 23 83 00 - HEATING UNITS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 05 11 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 26 05 19 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING

SECTION 26 05 83 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION


SECTION 26 29 13 – LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROLLERS

SECTION 26 29 24 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES DIVISION 27 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 27 10 00 - BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 31 00 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 05 19 – GEOSYNTHETICS FOR EARTH WORK

SECTION 31 25 00 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING DIVISION 40 - INSTRUMENTATION

SECTION 40 61 11 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 40 64 00 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

SECTION 40 66 11 - NETWORK SYSTEMS

SECTION 40 66 33 – METALLIC AND FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION CABLE AND CONNECTORS

SECTION 40 67 11 - PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES

SECTION 40 71 00 – FLOW INSTRUMENTS

SECTION 40 72 00 – LEVEL INSTRUMENTS

SECTION 40 73 00 – PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS

SECTION 40 78 00- PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS DIVISION 41 – HANDLING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 41 22 20 – HOISTS DIVISION 46 – FISH SAMPLING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 46 21 53 – CYLINDRICAL INLINE FILTERS

SECTION 46 51 21 – TRAVELING SCREENS

SECTION 46 80 15 – REUSE AERATION TOWERS

Section 22 05 21 Page 1 Specification PG16-0222F

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

SECTION 22 05 21 – BUTTERFLY VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of Butterfly Valve associated with the CFFF Remodel. The Contractor shall provide valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTAL AND SHOP DRAWING PROCEDURES

B. SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE

C. SECTION 01900 – GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

D. SECTION 09 91 00 – COATINGS


A. GENERAL

1. Submittals shall be made as specified in Section 01300 – Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.

2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, description of operation, Operation and Maintenance Manual, for each device.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. GENERAL

1. All valves, actuators, and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All valves, actuators, and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. Any valves, actuators, and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE

1. Storage requirements shall comply with the manufacturer’s written instructions for weather protection, temperature, humidity, and ventilation.

2. Do not open the manufacturers packaging until the time of installation unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Store valves, actuators, and accessories in a protected area at least 6 inches above the ground or floor. Do not stack valves, and actuators.

4. Store valves, actuators, and accessories in such a way that they are readily inspected.

5. Any valves, actuators, and accessories damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. RANGES

1. Differential pressure ratings 4 – 12 inch diameter valves: 150 psi

2. Differential pressure ratings 14 - 24 inch diameter valves: 90 psi

3. Temperature range 0 to 100ºF.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. GENERAL

The following Manufacturers, or approved equal, are accepted for use on the project:

1. Bray

2. Keystone

3. Val-Matic.

2.3 BODY

A. GENERAL

1. Body shall be lug style or AWWA C150 B flanged per AWWA C504 for 150 pound flange bolt pattern.

2. Body of butterfly valve shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.

2.4 DISC

A. GENERAL

1. Disc shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel.

2.5 SHAFT

A. GENERAL

1. Shaft shall be 304 or 316 or 431 or 416 stainless steel.

2.6 BEARING

A. GENERAL

1. Shaft shall be Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).

2.7 SEATS

A. GENERAL

1. The valve seats shall be EPDM or Buna-N rubber.

2.8 2.9 MANUAL ACTUATORS

A. GENERAL

1. Actuators shall be gear-assisted to limit the maximum operating pull to 60 pounds on the rim of the hand wheel or valve key.

2. Submerged actuators shall be hermetically sealed water tight, grease packed, worm gear actuators.

3. Non-submerged actuators shall be traveling nut, worm-gear, spur or bevel gear assemblies with valve position indication.

4. All gearing shall be designed for 100 percent over-torque.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. INSTALLATION

1. Valves, actuators, stem extensions, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

2. Stem extensions shall be installed plumb.

3. Handrail and grating shall be adjusted as need to prevent interference with valves and actuators by providing a minimum of 6-inches of clearance between the handle or hand wheel over the full range of operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 05 22 – BALL VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of small diameter ball valves. The valves include a variety of un-named valves water and air system piping associated with the CFFF Remodel. The Contractor shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, description of operation, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, for each type of valve and actuator.


A. GENERAL

1. All valves, actuators, and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All valves, actuators, and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.


C. STORAGE



3. Store valves, actuators, and accessories in a protected area at least 6 inches above the ground or floor.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Unless otherwise indicated, general purpose metal ball valves in sizes up to 4-inch shall have manual actuators that limit the operating pull on the handle or wheel to a maximum of 60 pounds.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


A. STAINLESS STEEL

1. Conbraco Industries, Inc. (Apollo)

2. .ITT Engineered Valves

3. Neles-Jamesbury, Inc.

4. Watts Regulator

5. Worcester Controls

B. PVC

1. Hayward

2.3 BODY

A. STAINLESS STEEL

1. Ball valves shall have stainless steel bodies with screwed ends for a pressure rating of not less than 600 psi WOG.

2. Valves 2-inch to 4-inch in size shall have bronze or stainless steel 2-or 3-piece bodies with screw ends for a pressure rating of ANSI 125 psi or 150 psi unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC

1. Ball valves shall have PVC bodies with socket ends for a pressure rating of not less than 150 psi at 70 deg F.

2. Valves shall be true union type unless otherwise noted.

2.4 BALLS

A. STAINLESS STEEL

1. The balls shall be stainless steel, with standard port (single reduction) or full port openings.

B. PVC

1. Balls shall be PVC with full port.

2.5 STEMS

A. STAINLESS STEEL

1. The valve stems shall be of the blow-out proof design, of bronze, stainless steel, or other acceptable construction, with reinforced Teflon seal.

B. PVC

1. Stems shall be PVC with double O - rings.


2.6 SEATS

A. STAINLESS STEEL

1. The valve seats shall be of Teflon or Buna-N for bi-directional service and easy replacement.

B. PVC

1. Seats shall be PTFE.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. INSTALLATION

1. Valves, actuators, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 05 23 – CHECK VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of Check Valves. The check valves are required on each Spring Water Pump (SSP-1 and SSP-2). The Contractor shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, description of operation, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, for each type of valve and actuator.


A. GENERAL

1. All valves shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All valves shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.


C. STORAGE


2. Store valves in such a way that they are readily inspected.

3. Any valves damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Check valves shall be a wafer style check assembly to prevent reverse flow of water.


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS, OR APPROVED EQUAL, ARE ACCEPTED FOR USE ON THE PROJECT:

1. Dezurik Apco Silent Check. – Series 300

2. Valmatic Silent Check – Series 1400a

2.3 BODY

A. GENERAL

1. Body shall be cast or ductile iron wafer style .

2. Minimum rated working pressure shall be 200 psi.

2.4 INTERNAL COMPONENTS

A. GENERAL

1. Disc and spring shall be stainless steel.

2. Seat shall be Buna-N resilient seat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Valves, actuators, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 05 24 – GATE VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of gate valves associated with the water system improvements for the CFFF. The Contractor shall provide valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

A. THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED:

1. Gate valves range in size from 6 inches to 10 inches in diameter and include valves boxes for buried service.






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, and Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


A. GENERAL

1. All valves and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING


C. STORAGE

1. Storage requirements shall comply with the manufacturer’s written instructions.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE

A. GENERAL

1. Pressure ratings shall comply with AWWA C509.


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. GENERAL

1. The following Manufacturers, or approved equal, are accepted for use on the project:

a. Clow

b. Crane

c. Kennedy

d. M & H Valve

e. Mueller

2.3 BODY

A. GENERAL

1. Body shall comply with AWWA C509.

2. Body of valve shall be cast or ductile iron.

3. Body shall be fusion bonded epoxy coated per AWWA 550.

4. Valve shall be Non Rising Stem configuration.

5. Joints shall be 150# Flange or Mechanical Joint as shown on drawings.

2.4 WEDGE

A. GENERAL

1. Wedge shall be ductile iron.

2. Wedge shall have rubber coating per ASTM D429.

2.5 ACTUATOR

A. GENERAL

1. Buried valves shall have standard AWWA 2-inch square operator nuts.

2. Exposed valves shall have hand wheels.

2.6 VALVE BOXES

A. GENERAL

1. Buried valves shall include valve boxes.

2. Valve Boxes shall be Cast Iron ASTM A48 CL 30 Olympic Foundry APWA Valve Box Part Number 045 or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. INSTALLATION

1. Valves, actuators, stem extensions, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

2. Handrail and grating shall be adjusted as needed to prevent interference with valves and actuators.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 05 28 – AIR RELEASE VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of Air release Valves for the CFFF Remodel. The Contractor shall provide air release valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, description of operation, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, for each type of valve.


A. GENERAL

1. All valves and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All valves and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.


C. STORAGE



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. GENERAL


1. Crispin

2. Val-Matic


2.2 SIZE

A. GENERAL

1. Valve shall have 1 inch diameter inlet and outlet and 5/64 inch diameter orifice.

2. Valve shall be a “pressure air release” type.

2.3 BODY

A. GENERAL

1. Valve bodies shall be cast iron ASTM A126 Class B

2.4 MECHANISM

A. GENERAL

1. The float, screws, stem bushing, guide shaft, levers, and pins shall be 316 stainless steel.

2.5 SEAT AND SEALS

A. GENERAL

1. Seat shall be buna – N rubber.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. INSTALLATION

1. Valves, actuators, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. The Contractor shall provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Where pipe support systems are not indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall design and provide the supports in accordance with this Section.





D. SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS

E. SECTION 09 91 00 – COATINGS


Submit in accordance with section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings

A. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Shop Drawings shall be provided for all pipe supports, hangers, anchors, and guides.

B. CALCULATIONS

1. Calculations shall be provided for special supports and anchors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. MANUFACTURERS, OR APPROVED EQUAL

1. Basic Engineers Inc., Pittsburgh, PA;

2. Bergen-Paterson Pipe support Corp., Woburn, MA;

3. Grinnell Corp. (Anvil International), Cranston, RI;

4. NPS Products, Inc., Westborough, MA;

5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA.

6. Tolco Incorporated, Corona, CA

7. Unistrut

B. STOCK PARTS

1. Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality, designed and rated for the intended purpose.


C. CODE COMPLIANCE

1. All piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to seismic events and line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. All supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified below. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements.

D. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

1. Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided by the Contractor. All supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction and shall be acceptable to the Engineer.

E. PIPE HANGERS

1. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive stress on equipment. All hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. All hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only.

F. HANGERS SUBJECT TO HORIZONTAL MOVEMENTS

1. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position.

G. SPRING-TYPE HANGERS

1. Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. All spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer’s printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion.

H. THERMAL EXPANSION

1. Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or expansion joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. All components shall be structurally suitable to withstand all loads imposed.

I. RISER SUPPORTS

1. Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping.


J. FREESTANDING PIPING

1. Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I-beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes.

K. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

1. General: All pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Submerged Supports: All submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24-inches of the water level, shall be supported with support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

L. POINT LOADS

1. Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer’s recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, all supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields.

M. CONCRETE ANCHORS

1. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete anchors for pipe supports shall be according to the following table. Consult the Engineer for any anchor applications not on the table. Anchor embedment shall comply with Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.

Pipe Support Application Type of Concrete Anchor

New Concrete Use embedded concrete insert anchors on a grid pattern. Use Grinnell (Anvil International), Tolco, or equal.

Existing Concrete Use non-shrink grouted anchors, metallic type expansion anchors, or epoxy anchors. Exceptions: Metallic type expansion anchors and epoxy anchors are not permitted for pipe supports subject to vibrating loads. Epoxy anchors are not permitted where the concrete temperature is in excess of 100 degrees F or higher than the limiting temperature recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxy anchors are not accepted where anchors are subject to vibration or fire.

Vibratory Loads and High Temperature Conditions

Use non-shrink grouted anchors

2.2 SUPPORT SPACING

A. GENERAL

1. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables below.


For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacing shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects.

2. Where support spacing is not indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall use the spacing below.

B. SUPPORT SPACING FOR SCHEDULE 40 AND SCHEDULE 80 STEEL PIPE:

Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches)

Maximum Span (feet)

1/2 6 3/4 and 1 8 1-1/4 to 2 10

3 12 4 14 6 17

8 and 10 19 12 and 14 23 16 and 18 25

20 and greater 30 C. SUPPORT SPACING FOR WELDED FABRICATED STEEL PIPE:

Maximum Spans for Pipe Supported in Minimum

120 degree Contact Saddles (feet)

Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Wall Thickness (inches)


Wall Thickness (inches)

3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2

24 33 37 41 43 45 47

26 34 38 41 44 46 48

28 34 38 41 44 47 49

30 34 38 42 45 48 49

32 34 39 42 45 48 50

34 35 39 43 46 48 50

36 35 39 43 46 49 51

1. For steel pipe sizes not presented in this table, the support spacing shall be designed so that the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi. Maximum deflection of pipe shall be limited to 1/360th of the span and shall be calculated by using the formula:

L = (7500tD/(32t+D))1/2

where: t = Thickness (inches)

D = Diameter (inches)

L = Maximum span (feet)


D. SUPPORT SPACING FOR DUCTILE-IRON PIPE:


Maximum Span (feet)

All Diameters Two (2) supports per pipe length or 10 feet (one of the two (2) supports located at joint)

E. SUPPORT SPACING FOR SCHEDULE 40 & 80 PVC PIPE:


Maximum Span (at 100 degrees F) (feet)

1/2 4 3/4 4.5 1 5

1-1/4 5.5 1-1/2 5.75

2 6.25 3 7.5 4 8.25 6 10 8 11

10 12.25 12 13.25

F. SUPPORT SPACING FOR SCHEDULE 80 POLYPROPYLENE PIPE:



1/2 3 3/4 3.5 1 3.75

1-1/4 4 1-1/2 4.25

2 4.5 3 5.5 4 6 6 7.25 8 8

10 8.75 12 9.5

G. SUPPORT SPACING FOR FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE:



2 8.8 3 10 4 11 6 12.7 8 13.4


10 14 12 15.4 14 16.2 16 17.3

18 and greater 18

2.3 COATING

A. GALVANIZING

1. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 – Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

B. OTHER COATINGS

1. Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 91 00 – Coatings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. All pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork.

B. APPEARANCE

1. Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other Work.

3.2 FABRICATION

A. QUALITY CONTROL

1. Pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 10 10 – STEEL PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. The Contractor shall provide the steel piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. The Drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. Where pipe supports and spacings are indicated on the Drawings and referenced to a Standard Detail, the Contractor shall use that Detail. Where pipe supports are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide all spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.






E. SECTION 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. GENERAL

Submittals shall be made as specified in Section 01300 – Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS

Drawings: Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists. Fabrication drawings shall indicate spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings, and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system.

C. PRODUCT LITERATURE

Product literature shall include dimension of the piping components, material descriptions, and coatings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. MATERIAL

1. Steel pipe 24 inches in diameter or less shall meet the requirements of ASTM A53, Grade B. Steel pipe shall not be fabricated with spiral welds.

2. Steel pipe wall shall be Schedule 40 up to a maximum thickness of 0.375 inches.


B. PIPE SUPPORTS

1. Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored. Supports shall resist stresses created by seismic loads. See Section 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

C. LINING

1. Application, thickness, and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the applicable Section 09 91 00 - Coatings, unless otherwise indicated. Hot dip galvanizing shall be used where noted in accordance with ASTM A123.

D. COATING

1. Application, thickness, and curing of pipe coating shall be in accordance with the applicable Section 09 91 00 - Coatings, unless otherwise indicated. Hot dip galvanizing shall be used where noted in accordance with ASTM A123.

E. INSPECTION

1. Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements.

F. TESTS

1. Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing material tests.

G. WELDING REQUIREMENTS

1. Qualification of welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding procedures shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review.

H. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS

1. Welding shall be done by skilled welders and welding operators who have adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9, by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the Work shall be used in qualification tests. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during testing is part of the Work.

2.2 PIPE FLANGES

A. GENERAL

1. Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C207.

a. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe. Flanges for miscellaneous small diameter pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes.

B. PRESSURE RATINGS

1. 150 psi or less: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150 lb class.


C. BLIND FLANGES

1. Blind flanges shall be in accordance with AWWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes. Blind flanges for pipe sizes 12-inches and greater shall be provided with lifting eyes in the form of welded or screwed eye bolts.

D. FLANGE COATING

1. Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed.

E. FLANGE BOLTS

1. Bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts.

F. INSULATING FLANGES

1. Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4-inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter.

G. INSULATING FLANGE SETS

1. Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers, and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1-1/2 inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1-1/2 inch, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face.

H. INSULATING FLANGE MANUFACTURERS, OR APPROVED EQUAL

1. JM Red Devil, Type E 2. Maloney Pipeline Products Co., Houston 3. PSI Products, Inc., (Frost Engineering Service Co., Costa Mesa, California.)

4. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water service shall be full-faced type, with material and thickness in accordance with AWWA C207, suitable for temperatures to 700 degrees F, a pH of one to 11, and pressures to 1000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted, unless otherwise indicated. Flange gaskets shall be as manufactured by John Crane, Style 2160, Garlock, Style 3000, or approved equal.

5. Gaskets for flanged joints used in air shall be made of materials compatible with the service, pressure, and temperature.

2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS

A. GENERAL

1. Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved.

B. MATERIALS

1. Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions.


2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. GENERAL

1. Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The couplings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. Gaskets for mechanical-type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. The wall thickness of grooved piping shall conform to the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. Connections with mechanical-type couplings shall have rigid-grooved couplings. The Contractor shall have the coupling manufacturer’s service representative verify the correct choice and application of couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, grooved fittings, couplings, and valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the coupling. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

2. Manufacturer of couplings for steel pipe shall be “victaulic style 07” (grooved, rigid) or approved equal.

2.5 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS

A. GENERAL

1. Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to substitute a sleeve-split coupling for the sleeve coupling unless approved by the Engineer.

B. CONSTRUCTION

1. Sleeve couplings shall be in accordance with AWWA C219 - Standard for Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. Couplings shall be steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop. Couplings shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The middle ring shall be not less than 1/4-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the strength of the middle ring material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The coupling shall be either 5- or 7-inches long for sizes up to and including 30-inches and 10-inches long for sizes greater than 30-inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16-inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured mill sections welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling.

a. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated.

C. PIPE PREPARATION

1. Where indicated, the ends of the pipe shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12-inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64 inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe.

a. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity.


D. GASKETS

1. Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna “N,” Grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications:

a. Color - Jet Black

b. Surface - Non-blooming

c. Durometer Hardness - 74 plus and minus 5

d. Tensile Strength - 1000 psi Minimum

e. Elongation - 175 percent Minimum

2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater. All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. Where sleeve couplings are used in water containing chloramine or other fluids which attack rubber materials, gasket material shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized.

E. INSULATING SLEEVE COUPLINGS

1. Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a sleeve of an insulating compound material compatible with the fluid service in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe.

F. RESTRAINED SLEEVE COUPLINGS

1. Restrained couplings shall be stainless steel Romac Armour Lock or approved equal.

G. MANUFACTURERS, OR APPROVED EQUAL

1. Dresser, Style 38

2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Style FC1 or FC3

3. Smith-Blair, Style 411

4. Romac, Style 501

5. Romac, Armour Lock

2.6. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. LOW TEMPERATURE

1. Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where indicated. Flexible connectors for service temperatures up to 180 degrees F shall be flanged reinforced Neoprene or Butyl spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, or reinforced flanged duck and rubber, as best suited for the application.

a. Flexible connectors for service temperatures above 180 degrees F shall be flanged, braided stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated stainless steel hose, rated for minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. The connectors shall be a minimum of 9-inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise indicated. The final material selection shall be approved by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s Shop Drawings and calculations.


2.7 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. GENERAL

1. Piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to compensate for such movement without exertion of undue forces to equipment or structures. This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow-type expansion joints, or sliding-type expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be flanged end, stainless steel, Monel, rubber, or other materials best suited for each individual service. The Contractor shall submit detailed manufacturer’s Shop Drawings of all proposed expansion joints, piping layouts, and anchors and guides, including information on materials, temperature, and pressure ratings.

2.8 PIPE THREADS

A. GENERAL

1. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch), and be made up with Teflon tape unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. GENERAL

1. Piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials.

3.2 GENERAL

A. GENERAL

1. Piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of applicable Sections of Division 15. Proprietary manufactured couplings shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendation.

2. Care shall be taken to ensure that piping flanges, mechanical-type couplings, sleeve-type couplings, flexible connectors, and expansion joints are properly installed as follows:

a. Gasket surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and inspected prior to making up the connection. Each gasket shall be centered properly on the contact surfaces.

b. Connections shall be installed to prevent inducing stress to the piping system or the equipment to which the piping is connected. Contact surfaces for flanges, couplings, and piping ends shall be aligned parallel, concentric, and square to each axis at the piping connections.

c. Bolts shall be initially hand-tightened with the piping connections properly aligned. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in a staggered sequence to the AISC recommended torque for the bolt material.

d. Groove ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from the pipe end to the groove.

e. After installation, joints shall meet the indicated leakage rate. Flanges shall not be deformed nor cracked.


B. LINED PIPING SYSTEMS

1. The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection.

C. CLEANUP

1. After completion of the Work, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition.

D. TESTING

1. Each pipe segment or segments shall be tested by plugging the lower end of the piping and pressurizing the piping to a head of at least 10 feet of water above the highest point. No visible leakage shall be observed at the piping joints over the duration of 15 minutes.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 10 11 – PVC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. The Contractor shall provide PVC solid wall non-pressure pipe and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.




C. SECTION 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. GENERAL


B. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Shop drawings shall include laying diagrams of pipe, joints, bends, special fittings, and piping appurtenances.


1. Literature shall be provided describing pipe dimensions and composition.

2. The manufacturer’s certificate shall be provided verifying that the pipe conforms to these specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. MARKING

1. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name, pipe size, and minimum pipe stiffness in psi.

2. The Contractor shall also require the manufacturer to mark the date of extrusion on the pipe. This dating shall be done in conjunction with records to be held by the manufacturer for 2 years, covering quality control tests, raw material batch number, and other information deemed necessary by the manufacturer.

2.2 PIPE

A. GENERAL

1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034 – Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings, SDR 35. Material for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1784 – Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds, for cell classification 12454-B or 12454-C as defined therein.


The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch according to ASTM D2444 – Test Method for Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight).

2. Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212 – Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. Elastomeric seals for compression type joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477 – Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe or ASTM F913 – Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

3. Perforated Pipe for under-drains shall be 6 inches in diameter and perforated with two rows of 0.5 inch diameter holes spaced 5 inches on center with the rows of holes spaced 120 degrees apart around the center of the pipe.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. GENERAL

1. All fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034. The ring groove and gasket ring shall be compatible with PVC pipe ends. The flanged fittings shall be compatible with cast-iron or ductile iron pipe fittings.

2. The stiffness of the fittings shall be not less than the stiffness of adjoining pipe.

2.4 BEDDING MATERIAL

A. GENERAL

1. Unless otherwise indicated, material used for pipe bedding shall be as detailed on the drawings.

2.5 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS

A. GENERAL

1. Flexible couplings shall be neoprene, full-circle, clamp-on type conforming to ASTM C425 and provided with two stainless steel band screw-clamps to secure the coupling tightly to entering and exiting pipes. All screw-clamp hardware shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Neoprene material shall be suitable for water service. Couplings shall be Fernco or approved equal.

2.6 FISH CONVEYANCE PIPING

A. GENERAL

1. Piping for the fish flumes within the Sampling Building shall have long radius bends with a minimum radius as followings:

Nominal Pipe Diamater Minimum Bend Radius, Inches

3 13

4 16

6 30

2. The bend shall be fabricated with bell and spigot joints.

3. Bends shall be fabricated by Raceways Technology and Manufacturing Inc. or approved equal.

4. All pipe and fitting ends shall have interior edges smooth and rounded to prevent injury to fish.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

A. GENERAL

1. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200 – Earthwork and the Drawings.

3.2 LAYING PIPE

Pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2321 – Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications and as indicated. Pipe sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for jointings, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of slope.

A. HANDLING

1. Handling of the PVC pipe shall be done with implements, tools, and facilities as recommended by the pipe manufacturer to ensure that the pipe is not damaged in any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading, and installation.

2. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the ditch and all defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area.

3. Fittings shall be lowered into trench by means of rope, cable, chain, or other means without damage. Cable, rope, or other devices used for lowering fitting into trench, shall be attached around exterior of fitting for handling. Under no circumstances shall the cable, rope, or other device be attached through the fitting interior for handling or shall pipe or fittings be dropped or dumped into the trench.

4. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s standard procedures. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, nor any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged, uneven edges.

5. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipe line shall be closed with water tight expandable type sewer plugs or PVC test plugs at the end of each day’s operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted.

6. Adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the Work shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

7. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, branch connections to main sewers, or main drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor in cooperation with owners of such utility structures. Unless otherwise indicated, protection of existing utility structures shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

3.3 FIELD JOINTING

A. GENERAL

1. Each pipe compression type joint shall be joined with a lock-in rubber ring and a ring groove that is designed to resist displacement during pipe insertion.


2. The ring and the ring seat inside the bell shall be wiped clean before the gasket is inserted. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the exposed surface of the ring and to the outside of the clean pipe end. Lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall not be used. The end of the pipe shall be then forced into the ring to complete the joint.

3. The pipe shall not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of the printed recommendations of the manufacturer of the coupling.

4. Fittings shall be carefully connected to pipe, and joint shall be checked to ensure a sound and proper joint.

5. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent trench water from entering pipe. Adequate backfill shall be deposited on pipe to prevent floating of pipe. Any pipe which has floated shall be removed from the trench, cleaned, and relaid in an acceptable manner. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench conditions or weather are unsuitable.

3.4 FISH CONVEYANCE PIPING

A. GENERAL

1. Piping and fitting joints shall be installed such that the spigot end (of a bell and spigot joint) is positioned at the downstream end of a pipe or bend segment.

2. The piping may be field aligned by heating the piping with a heat blanket or bath. Field heating shall not result in buckling the pipe or pipe cross sectional deformations that exceed 10 percent of true round diameter.

3. Piping shall be cleaned and flushed.

3.5 TESTING

A. GENERAL

1. Each pipe segment or segments shall be tested by plugging the lower end of the piping and pressurizing the piping to a head of at least 10 feet of water above the highest point. No visible leakage shall be observed at the piping joints over the duration of 15 minutes.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 10 12 – HDPE PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. The Contractor shall provide the high density polyethylene (HDPE) piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. The Drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. Where pipe supports and spacings are indicated on the Drawings and referenced to a Standard Detail, the Contractor shall use that Detail. Where pipe supports are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide all spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.

3. This section does not include piping 48 inches in diameter or larger. See Section 46 80 13 Pump Back Diffuser Structure and Piping for large diameter piping specifications.






E. SECTION 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. GENERAL


B. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Drawings: Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists. Fabrication drawings shall indicate spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings, and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system.


1. Product literature shall include dimension of the piping components, material descriptions, and coatings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. GENERAL

1. High-density polyethylene pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3350, Cell Classification 34544C. The outside diameter and wall thickness shall conform to the SDR number and nominal pipe size called for in the Drawings.


B. JOINTS

1. All polyethylene pipe shall be joined by the thermal-butt fusion method in accordance with ASTM D2657 and be performed according to the pipe manufacturer's procedure. The polyethylene pipe shall be connected to other piping materials and metal fittings by pre-manufactured flange adapters butt-fused to the pipe, complete with slip-on stainless steel metal flanges and stainless steel fasteners.

C. TRACING

1. The entire length of all polyethylene pipe runs shall contain a 12-gauge, direct-bury, UF, single-conductor tracer wire, and a warning tape at 4 inches below the finished surface. The tracer wire shall be accessed by 1-inch PVC pipe stubbed out of the ground complete with cap and identifying label. The PVC stubs shall be located as shown on the Drawings.

D. INSPECTION

1. Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements.

E. TESTS

1. Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing material tests.

F. WELDING REQUIREMENTS

1. Qualification of welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding procedures shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review.

G. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS

1. Welding shall be done by skilled welders and welding operators who have adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9, by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the Work shall be used in qualification tests. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during testing is part of the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. GENERAL

1. Piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials.

3.2 GENERAL

A. GENERAL

1. Piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of applicable Sections of Division 15. Proprietary manufactured couplings shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendation.


2. Care shall be taken to ensure that piping flanges, mechanical-type couplings, sleeve-type couplings, flexible connectors, and expansion joints are properly installed as follows:

a. Gasket surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and inspected prior to making up the connection. Each gasket shall be centered properly on the contact surfaces.

b. Connections shall be installed to prevent inducing stress to the piping system or the equipment to which the piping is connected. Contact surfaces for flanges, couplings, and piping ends shall be aligned parallel, concentric, and square to each axis at the piping connections.

c. Bolts shall be initially hand-tightened with the piping connections properly aligned. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in a staggered sequence to the AISC recommended torque for the bolt material.

d. Groove ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from the pipe end to the groove.

e. After installation, joints shall meet the indicated leakage rate. Flanges shall not be deformed nor cracked.

B. LINED PIPING SYSTEMS

1. The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection.

C. CLEANUP

1. After completion of the Work, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition.

D. TESTING

1. Pipeline shall be tested at a pressure of 125 psi for a period of 15 minutes and shall require less than 0.5 gallons of water to re-pressurize the piping after the 15 minute duration.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 10 13 – COPPER TUBING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copper tube for water piping, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents

2. The requirements of Section 15000 – Piping, General apply to the WORK of this Section.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE MATERIAL

A. GENERAL

1. Copper water tube shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 – Seamless Copper Water Tube, and shall be soft temper tube in rolls for buried locations, or hard drawn lengths for all other applications. Unless otherwise indicated, all copper water tube shall be of Type K wall thickness.

2.2 JOINTS

A. GENERAL

1. Copper water tube shall have either soldered joints, flared ends and fittings, or compression type joints. Soldered joints shall be made with 95 – 5 percent tin-antimony solder or with silver solder. Buried piping shall have flared or compression type joints. No soft-soldered joints will be allowed on buried piping. No solders containing more than 0.2 percent of lead shall be used.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. SOLDERED FITTINGS

1. Soldered fittings shall conform to ANSI B 16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings, or to ANSI/ASME B 16.22 – Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder – Joint Pressure Fittings. The soldering flux shall be the Manufacturer’s approved type for the fitting and solder used.

B. FLARED FITTINGS

1. Flared fittings shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 16.26 – Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.

C. COMPRESSION FITTINGS

1. Compression type fittings shall be brass fittings as manufactured by Crawford Company – SWAGELOK, Parker-Hannifin – CPI, or equal.


D. FLANGED FITTINGS

1. Cast copper alloy flanges and flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B 16.24 – Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, and ASTM B 62 – Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, with 150 lb. ratings, or as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. All copper tubes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the site, to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed tubing shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary all tubing shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. All installations shall be acceptable to the CITY.

B. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

1. All tubing shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers, brackets, or supports. Supports shall be by “Uni-Strut” or approved equal. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the tubes shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for expansion due to temperature differences.

C. VALVES AND UNIONS

1. Unless otherwise indicated, tubing to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Low points in water systems and driplegs in steam, gas, and air systems shall have drainage valves. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection.

D. BRANCH CONNECTIONS

1. Branch connections in horizontal runs of air and gas tubing shall be made from the top of the main to avoid drainage of condensate into the equipment.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. GENERAL

1. Prior to installation, each tube length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of tubes shall be reamed and filed smooth. All fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly.

3.3 JOINTS

A. BRAZED AND SOLDERED JOINTS

1. Brazed and soldered joints shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the specifications and recommendations of ANSI/ASME B 31.1 – Power Piping. All brazing shall be done by skilled and qualified welders. Prior to the application of flux, the end of all tubes shall be thoroughly dried and cleaned. After brazing or soldering the joint and adjacent pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of excess solder and flux and further rubbed down with fine steel wool.


3.4 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING

A. INSPECTION

1. All finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Any damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the CITY.

B. FIELD TESTING

1. Prior to enclosure or burying, all piping systems shall be air pressure tested to 150 psi for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding a pressure drop of 5 psig. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials, and devices at no extra cost to the CITY.

2. Piping for potable water service shall be flushed, disinfected with a 50 ppm chlorine solution, flushed again, and a sample tested for bacteria contamination. After successful testing the fixtures and system can be connected and placed into service.

C. LEAKAGE

1. Shall be determined by loss of pressure and testing of all joints with a soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures.

D. LEAKS

1. Shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the CITY, and the system shall be re-tested until no leaks are found.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 14 25 – CENTRIFUGAL END SUCTION PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of the centrifugal end suction pumps for the vacuum cleaning system and the sampling reuse circulation. The Contractor shall provide pumps and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Pumps included in this section are as follows:

Description Quantity Vacuum Cleaning Pump (VCP-1) 1 total Sampling Reuse Pump (SRP-1) 1 total






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, description of operation, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Performance Curves based on model or full scale tests of pumps. Guaranteed Pump Performance Curves based on model or full scale tests of pumps in accordance with procedures as specified by Standards of the Hydraulic Institute. Curves shall be certified by a professional engineer, registered in the state where the tests are conducted and employed full time by the pump Manufacturer. Any submittal not including such curves shall be considered invalid.

3. Complete electric motor data including complete dimensions, weights, enclosure construction, performance information, and nameplate data.


A. GENERAL

1. All pumps and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All pumps and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. Any pumps and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE



2. Any pumps and accessories damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. GENERAL

1. A list of recommended spare parts and prices shall be provided to the Engineer with the Contractor submittal.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL

A. GENERAL

1. The pump and drive equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be new and made by a single Manufacturer regularly engaged in such work, who has furnished like equipment and specialties for at least five (5) similar installations which have been in continuous successful operation for no less than five (5) years. Evidence of this experience, which shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and data on the equipment and its operation in those plants, shall be made available to the Engineer on request that they may determine whether the equipment and specialties offered meet the requirements of these specifications. Where major items of equipment are similar in type and description, they shall be the product of a single Manufacturer. Pump bowls, propellers and motors shall also be the product of a single Manufacturer.

2. The pump manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, factory assembly, and testing of the pumps; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the City for compliance of the pumps with the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM CLEANING PUMP

The Vacuum Cleaning Pump (VCP-1) shall be Peerless C815A Pump, or approved equal.

A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maximum Shutoff Head, ft 240 Design Flow Capacity, gpm 140 Design Flow TDH, ft 225 Design Flow Minimum Bowl Efficiency 60% Pump Speed, rpm 3450 Motor Size, hp 20 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz

B. OPERATING CONDITIONS

The pumps shall be suitable for long term operation under the following conditions:

Duty Intermittent Drive Contactor Ambient Environment Outdoor Ambient Temperature, Degrees F 0°-105°F Ambient Relative Humidity, Percent 10% - 100% Fluid Service Water Fluid Temperature Range, Degrees F 33°-75°F Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0


Project Site Elevation, ft, msl 830

C. PUMP DIMENSIONS

Suction Connection, inches NPT 2 Discharge Connection, inches NPT 1.5

D. COMPLETE ASSEMBLY

The pump assembly shall be a close coupled radially split case end suction centrifugal type pump. The pump is located outdoors next to the Juvenile Holding Ponds.

E. GENERAL MATERIAL

In general the pump assembly shall be constructed from cast iron with bronze fittings.

F. IMPELLER

The impeller shall be cast iron with smooth finish.

G. SHAFT AND SHAFT COUPLING

The shafts and shaft couplings shall be 416 stainless steel.

H. SEAL

A face type mechanical seal with ceramic stationary seat, carbon washer, Buna N rubber flexible members, 18-8 stainless steel metal parts and 18-8 stainless steel spring. Seal shall be mounted over a bronze shaft sleeve. Seal to be rated for 225 degrees F. maximum.

I. MOTOR

The motor shall be a 20 horsepower, nominally 3600 rpm, 3 phase, 460 volt premium efficient, with totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) enclosure.

J. COATING

The pump shall be coated in accordance with section 09 91 00.

2.2 SAMPLING REUSE PUMP

The Sampling Reuse Pump (SRP-1) shall be Peerless C610A Pump, or approved equal.


Maximum Shutoff Head, ft 24

Design Flow Capacity, gpm 40 Design Flow TDH, ft 20 Design Flow Minimum Bowl Efficiency 50% Pump Speed, rpm 1780 Motor Size, hp 1.0 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz



Duty Intermittent Drive Contactor Ambient Environment Outdoor Ambient Temperature, Degrees F 0°-105°F


Ambient Relative Humidity, Percent 10% - 100% Fluid Service Water Fluid Temperature Range, Degrees F 33°-75°F Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0 Project Site Elevation, ft, msl 830

C. PUMP DIMENSIONS

Suction Connection, inches NPT 2 Discharge Connection, inches NPT 1.0


The pump assembly shall be a close coupled radially split case end suction centrifugal type pump. The pump is located outdoors next to the Juvenile Holding Ponds.

E. GENERAL MATERIAL

In general the pump assembly shall be constructed from cast iron with bronze fittings.

F. IMPELLER

The impeller shall be cast iron with smooth finish.



H. SEAL

A face type mechanical seal with ceramic stationary seat, carbon washer, Buna N rubber flexible members, 18-8 stainless steel metal parts and 18-8 stainless steel spring. Seal shall be mounted over a bronze shaft sleeve. Seal to be rated for 225 degrees F. maximum.

I. MOTOR

The motor shall be a 1 horsepower, nominally 1800 rpm, 3 phase, 460 volt premium efficient, with totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) enclosure.

J. COATING

The pump shall be coated in accordance with section 09 91 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. The Pumps shall be installed as detailed on the drawings.

2. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the pumps with the pump Manufacturer. All construction and installation shall be in conformance with the drawings and specifications and the pump Manufacturer's written recommendations.

3. Pump testing shall include verification of operation, correct rotation, performance, and wiring connections. This testing shall be performed prior to testing in coordination with the PCS integration.

4. The pumps will be field tested to demonstrate performance at the duty condition. Verification shall be done before checkout of the system operation in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.


3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER

A. INSPECTION, STARTUP, AND FIELD ADJUSTMENT

1. A Service Representative of the Manufacturer shall be present at the site for a minimum of one (1) work days to oversee and inspect the installation and initial startup of the pumps. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide certification that the pumps were installed as per the Manufacturer’s recommendations and that the pumps are functioning properly.

B. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

1. A Training Representative of the Manufacturer shall be present at the Site for a minimum of one (1) work day to instruct the City’s operations personnel in the proper operation and routine maintenance of the pumps. The scheduling of the training session shall be coordinated with the City in advance to ensure that the appropriate personnel are available.

C. WORK DAY

1. For the purposes of this section, a work day is defined as an 8 hour period at the site, excluding travel time.

END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of the vertical turbine pumps for the spring supply water system. The Contractor shall provide pumps and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Pumps included in this section are as follows:

Description Quantity Spring Supply Pumps (SSP-1 and SSP-2) 2 total





D. SECTION 26 29 24 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES


A. GENERAL



3. Complete electric motor data including complete dimensions, weights, enclosure construction, performance information, and nameplate data. The motor submittal for pumps shall also include data required in Section 26 29 24 – Variable Frequency Drives.


A. GENERAL


B. SHIPPING




C. STORAGE



1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. GENERAL



A. GENERAL



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRING SUPPLY PUMPS

The Spring Supply Pumps (SSP-1 and SSP-2) shall be Hydroflo Pumps USA 4 stage 5LH Vertical Turbine Pump, or approved equal.


Maximum Shutoff Head, ft 247 Design Flow Capacity, gpm 100 Design Flow TDH, ft 180 Design Flow Minimum Bowl Efficiency 72% Pump Speed, rpm 3450 Motor Size, hp 7.5 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz



Duty Intermittent Drive Variable speed Ambient Environment Indoors Ambient Temperature, Degrees F 0°-105°F


Ambient Relative Humidity, Percent 10% - 100% Fluid Service Water Fluid Temperature Range, Degrees F 33°-75°F Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0 Project Site Elevation, ft, msl 830 Minimum Submergence – Water surface to top of inlet strainer (inches)

12

C. PUMP DIMENSIONS

Discharge Connection, in flanged 4 Overall Length – top of sole plate to bottom of inlet strainer

See contract drawings.


The pump assemblies shall include the pump with strainer, pump column, sole plate, discharge head, and motor as shown on the drawings. The pump assemblies are located in a building at the Spring Development site.

E. GENERAL MATERIAL

In general the pump assembly shall be constructed from Ductile Iron and 201 stainless steel.

F. DISCHARGE HEAD

The discharge head shall be fabricated from ductile iron with 4 inch diameter 125 lb discharge flange connection.

G. BEARINGS

Bowl bearings shall be B10 C932 Bronze.

H. IMPELLER

The impeller shall be stainless steel enclosed type.

I. SHAFT AND SHAFT COUPLING


J. SEAL

The seal shall packing – John Crane #1345 or approved equal.

K. INLET STRAINER

The inlet strain shall be 6 inches long by 8.5 inches in diameter and fabricated from 304 stainless steel.

L. INLET STRAINER

Sole plate shall be coated mild steel as shown on the drawings.

M. MOTOR

The motor shall be a 7.5 horsepower, nominally 3600 rpm, 3 phase, 460 volt premium efficient, inverter duty rated, with fully enclosed fan cooled enclosure


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL



3. Pump testing shall include verification of operation, correct rotation, performance, and wiring connections through to the PCS PLC terminations. This testing shall be performed prior to testing in coordination with the PCS integration.

4. The pumps will be field tested to demonstrate performance at the duty condition and that that the pumps maintain a pressure setpoint based on pressure transmitter (PTPW-1) of 30 psig plus or minus 2 psig when operating as a backup to the existing process water pumps PWP-1 and PWP-2. Verification shall be done before checkout of the system operation in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.

5. PCS integration testing will require coordination with the owner. The Contractor shall assist the Owner’s integrator to verify that the PCS is receiving correct inputs, to simulate operating sequences, and to assist with startup and commissioning testing. Testing of the Process Water Pumps shall include toggling of active to redundant pumps based on a timed period of pump run. Testing shall also include calls for pump runs based on demand for reuse water supply and as an alternative to the existing process water pumps PWP-1 and PWP-2.






C. WORK DAY


END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of the submersible nonclog pumps for the Juvenile Holding Pond reuse circulation. The Contractor shall provide pumps and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Pumps included in this section are as follows:

Description Quantity Holding Reuse Pump (HRP-1 and HRP-2) 2 total






A. GENERAL





A. GENERAL


B. SHIPPING



C. STORAGE




1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. GENERAL



A. GENERAL



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HOLDING REUSE PUMPS

The Holding Reuse Pumps (HRP-1 and HRP-2) shall be a Pentair – Hydromatic S6L Pump, or approved equal.


Maximum Shutoff Head, ft 50 Design Flow Capacity, gpm 900 Design Flow TDH, ft 26 Design Flow Minimum Bowl Efficiency 71% Pump Speed, rpm 1165 Motor Size, hp 10 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz



Duty Intermittent Drive Contactor Ambient Environment Outdoor / Submerged Ambient Temperature, Degrees F 0°-105°F Ambient Relative Humidity, Percent 10% - 100% Fluid Service Water Fluid Temperature Range, Degrees F 33°-75°F Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0


Project Site Elevation, ft, msl 830

C. PUMP DIMENSIONS

Discharge Connection, inches flanged 6


1. The pump assembly shall be a submersible non clog pump with integral submersible motor. The pump is located outdoors in the channel between the Juvenile Holding Ponds.

E. GENERAL MATERIAL

1. In general the pump assembly shall be constructed from ASTM Type A-48 Class 30 Cast Iron.

F. IMPELLER

1. The impeller shall be cast iron with smooth finish.


1. The shafts shall be stainless steel.

H. SEAL

1. The seal shall be a double mechanical seal in a bronze or cast iron seal housing constructed in two sections with a registered fit. The seal shall be of double carbon and ceramic construction.

I. MOTOR

1. The motor shall be a 10 horsepower, nominally 1200 rpm, 3 phase, 460 volt premium efficient, with oil filled construction in a cast iron house for submersible service.

J. COATING

1. The pump shall be coated in accordance with section 09 91 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL



3. Pump testing shall include verification of operation, correct rotation, performance, and wiring connections. This testing shall be performed prior to testing in coordination with the PCS integration.

4. The pumps will be field tested to demonstrate performance at the duty condition. Verification shall be done before checkout of the system operation in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.







C. WORK DAY


END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 15 10 – COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of a new compressed air supply system to replace the existing in the Air Compressor building. The Contractor shall provide pumps and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Equipment included in this section is as follows:

Description Quantity Air Compressor Package (C-1, C-2, Aftercooler, and Receiver) 1 total Air Dryer (AD-1) 1 total Coalescent Air Filter (AF-1) 1 total Particulate Air Filter (AF-2) 1 total Automatic Drain Valves (DV-1, DV-2, and DV-3) 3 total






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, description of operation, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Performance Data.

3. Submittal information for the electrical panel shall include dimensional drawing of the front elevation view, wiring diagrams with wire and terminal numbering.



A. GENERAL

1. All equipment and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All compressors and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. Any equipment and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.


C. STORAGE


2. Any equipment and accessories damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. LIST


B. SPARES

1. Spare filter elements for the filters shall be provided.


A. GENERAL

1. The equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be new and made by a single Manufacturer regularly engaged in such work, who has furnished like equipment and specialties for at least five (5) similar installations which have been in continuous successful operation for no less than five (5) years. Evidence of this experience, which shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and data on the equipment and its operation in those plants, shall be made available to the Engineer on request that they may determine whether the equipment and specialties offered meet the requirements of these specifications. Where major items of equipment are similar in type and description, they shall be the product of a single Manufacturer.

2. The air system manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, factory assembly, and testing of the system; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the City for compliance of the pumps with the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPRESSOR PACKAGE

The compressor (C1 and C2) package shall be Quincy QR-FF350-200 , or approved equal.


Flowrate per compressor, scfm each 33.3 Rated delivery pressure, psig 175 Max Operating pressure, psig 175 Compressor Speed, rpm 859 Motor Size, hp 10 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz Receiver Tank Volume, gallons 200

B. COMPLETE ASSEMBLY

1. The compressor packages shall include two compressors with an aftercooler and pressure relief valves mounted on the air receiver tank and installed in the existing compressor building as shown on the contract drawings.


C. COMPRESSORS

1. The compressors shall be two stage, cast iron, air-cooled, pressure lubricated, load-less starting, hydraulic unloading on drop in oil pressure, and constructed to allow for valve maintenance without removing the cylinder head. Motors shall be high efficiency, with totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) housing. Drive belts shall include guards meeting OSHA protection requirements.

D. RECEIVER TANK

1. The air receiver tank shall be installed in a horizontal configuration and shall be ASME code rated for 200 psig and include an automatic drain valve.

E. AFTERCOOLER

1. Aftercooler shall be sized for rated compressor air flow and include an automatic drain valve.

F. COMPRESSOR MOTOR CONTROL PANEL

1. The compressor motor control panel shall include duplex across the line NEMA rated contactors rated for 10 hp, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 460 volt operation. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4 rated. Panel shall include the following features:

a. Hand-Off-Auto switch each compressor – Hand starts compressor and Auto runs the compressors based on pressure and lead / alternate / lag switches.

b. C-1 Lead / Alternate / C-2 Lead switch shall start compressor C-1 with the lead pressure switch, alternate starts of compressors C-1 and C-2 with the lead pressure switch, and start compressor C-2 with the lead pressure switch with respect to the switch position. Alteration will be achieved with an alternating relay.

c. The lead pressure switch (PS1AC-1) shall start the compressor called to start at 120 psig and stop at 150 psig.

d. The lag pressure switch (PS2AC-1) shall start the compressor called to start at 100 psig and stop at 150 psig.

e. A high pressure switch (PSHAC-1) shall be set at 155 psig. This switch shall light a red front panel mounted light labeled “HIGH PRESSURE” and latch in a relay that will stop both compressors from operating. The latch shall be reset by a momentary push button mounted on the front of the panel labeled “RESET”. A single reset button shall reset all latched alarm conditions.

f. A low pressure switch (PSLAC-1) shall be set at 90 psig. This switch shall light a red front panel mounted light labeled “LOW PRESSURE” and latch in a relay that will stop both compressors from operating after a time delay adjustable between 0 and 10 minutes (this is allow for pressurizing the system at startup). The latch shall be reset by a momentary push button mounted on the front of the panel labeled “RESET”. A single reset button shall reset all latched alarm conditions.

g. A high temperature switch shall be set at the manufacturer recommended setting. This switch shall light a red front panel mounted light labeled “HIGH TEMPERATURE” and latch in a relay that will stop both compressors from operating. The latch shall be reset by a momentary push button mounted on the front of the panel labeled “RESET”. A single reset button shall reset all latched alarm conditions.


h. A dry contract shall be provided for Compressor C-1 Run status based on the auxiliary motor contactor contact for C-1. The contract shall be wired to a labeled terminal for connection to the external PCS.

i. A dry contract shall be provided for Compressor C-2 Run status based on an auxiliary motor contactor contact for C-2. The contract shall be wired to a labeled terminal for connection to the external PCS.

j. A dry contract shall be provided for the high pressure alarm status based on a contact with the associated latching relay. The contract shall be wired to a labeled terminal for connection to the external PCS.

k. A dry contract shall be provided for the low pressure alarm status based on a contact with the associated latching relay. The contract shall be wired to a labeled terminal for connection to the external PCS.

l. A dry contract shall be provided for the high temperature alarm status based on a contact with the associated latching relay. The contract shall be wired to a labeled terminal for connection to the external PCS.

m. Terminals shall be provided for status and alarm wiring to the PCS, pressure and temperature switches, and at least 6 spares.

G. MOTOR

1. The motor shall be a 10 horsepower, nominally 1800 rpm, 3 phase, 460 volt premium efficient, with totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) enclosure.

H. COATING

1. The pump shall be coated in accordance with section 09 91 00.

I. PRESSURE SWITCHES

1. Pressures Switches shall be in accordance with section 40 73 00.

2.2 COMPRESSED AIR DRYER

The air dryer (AD-1) shall be Zeks Hydronix Model 40 MPS-UL with AirMizer moisture control module, or approved equal.


Inlet Air Flow, scfm 40

Outlet Air Flow, scfm 34 Final Pressure Dew Point, degrees F -40 Maximum Inlet Air Pressure 150 Maximum Inlet Air Temperature, degrees F 120 Minimum Inlet Air Pressure 75


1. The dryer shall be a heatless, regenerative type compressed air dryer, fully automatic, complete with desiccant charge and NEMA 1 electrical enclosure. This unit has a 3/4" threaded inlet and outlet and is complete with power cord, wall mount bracket.

C. CONTROL

1. The air dryer shall have fully automatic control with 1 phase, 60 hertz, 120 volt power. Control shall include the following features:

a. Pressure gages and relief valves on each tower.


b. Purge pressure gauge indicating reactivation flow rate, with optional

adjustable purge valve.

c. On-Off selector switch and “on” indicator light.

d. Left / right “tower drying” indicator light.

e. Separate desiccant fill and drain ports.

f. Moisture load control system to reduce overall purge air consumption during low demand or low water loading.

2.3 AIR FILTERS

A. COALESCING FILTER

1. The coalescing filter (AF-1) shall be a Parker Finite Model HN2L-6CN:

a. Filter shall be rated for 50 scfm at 100 psig.

b. Filter shall have ½ inch diameter NPT inlet and outlet.

c. Filter shall be outfit with an automatic drain valve.

d. A spare filter element shall be provided.

B. PARTICULATE FILTER

1. The particulate filter (AF-2) shall be a Parker Finite Model HN2S-3PUN:

a. Filter shall be rated for 42 scfm at 100 psig.

b. Filter shall have ½ inch diameter NPT inlet and outlet.

c. A spare filter element shall be provided.

2.4 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE

A. GENERAL

1. The automatic drain valves (DV-1, DV-2 shall be a Posi-Drain Model PD7020/A:

a. Drain valve shall be powered by 1 phase, 60 hertz, 120 volt power.

b. Drain valve shall have an adjustable duration and drain frequency, be self-cleaning, and in a NEMA 4X enclosure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. The compressor package, dryers, filters, and piping shall be installed as detailed on the drawings.

2. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation with the Manufacturer. All construction and installation shall be in conformance with the drawings and specifications and the pump Manufacturer's written recommendations.

3. Compressor testing shall include verification of operation, correct rotation, performance, and wiring connections. This testing shall be performed prior to testing in coordination with the PCS integration.

4. The air system will be field tested to demonstrate performance at the duty condition. Verification shall be done before checkout of the system operation in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.







C. WORK DAY


END OF SECTION


DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SECTION 23 05 00 – GENERAL HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


1. General HVAC Requirements

2. HVAC Submittals

3. Motors

4. Equipment and Piping Identification


Division 23

1.3 REFERENCES

NOT USED


A. SCOPE

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all HVAC work as specified in Division 23 and as shown on the drawings.

2. This section applies to all Division 23 specifications.

3. All mechanical equipment and devices furnished or installed under other Divisions of this specification or by the City which require connection to any HVAC systems shall be connected under this division of the specifications.

B. GENERAL

1. All work shall conform to the General Provisions, the Special and Technical Provisions, and all other provisions of the contract documents.

C. COMPLETE SYSTEMS

1. Furnish and install all materials, appurtenances, devices, and miscellaneous items not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all HVAC systems.

2. Not all accessories or devices are shown or specified that are necessary to form complete and functional systems.

D. REVIEW AND COORDINATION

1. To eliminate all possible errors and interferences, thoroughly examine all the drawings and specifications before work is started. Consult and coordinate with each of the various trades regarding the work.

2. Such coordination shall begin prior to any work starting and continue throughout the project.


E. CONFLICTS

1. Notify the City of any discrepancies or conflicts within the contract documents or between the contract documents and field conditions.

2. Do not proceed with any work or the purchasing of any materials for the area(s) of conflict until obtaining written instructions from the City on how to proceed.

3. Any work done after discovery of such discrepancies or conflicts and prior to obtaining the City's instructions on how to proceed shall be done at the contractor's expense.

4. In case of a conflict between Division 23 requirements and other project requirements, the most stringent shall prevail and be approved by the City Engineer.

F. FIELD CONDITIONS

1. Check field conditions and verify all measurements and relationships indicated on the drawings before proceeding with any work.

2. In verifying existing conditions, the contractor shall verify by direct physical inspection, complete tracing out of systems, by applying test pressures, by excavation and inspection, use of pipeline cameras and other suitable absolute certain methods to confirm the actual physical conditions that exist.

G. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

1. Drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both.

H. OFFSETS/FITTINGS

The drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangement of the construction and therefore do not show all offsets, fittings and accessories which are required to form a complete and operating installation.

1. Duct Systems:

a. Include in bid all necessary fittings, offsets, and transitions to completely connect all systems, maintain clear access paths, and comply with all project requirements.

b. Contractor is responsible to determine the quantity of offsets and fittings required, and the labor involved.

c. No added payments or “extras” will be granted for the contractor’s failure to correctly estimate number of offsets, fittings, transitions and labor required.

d. Contractor is advised that transitions are required at connections to all equipment, to all air inlets/outlets, crossing of beam lines, at crossing with piping, and similar locations.

2. Added Offsets:

a. In addition to the offsets and fittings required per above paragraphs, include two (2) added elbows for each 30-feet of pipe and duct runs. Such offsets shall be of the same size and material of connecting runs.

b. Offsets shall be bid as 90° elbows with turning vanes.

c. City reserves the right to obtain credit for any elbows required by this paragraph but not actually used.


d. Added offsets shall be calculated based on the project total accumulated duct (or pipe) lengths, with lengths rounded up to the nearest 20-feet in order to calculate offsets. (For example: If the project had 5-feet of 24 x8 duct in one location, and 8-feet of 24 x 8 duct in another location, total accumulated length of 24 x 8 would be 13-feet, round up to 20-feet, with calculated offsets to be provided as two (2).)

I. LOCATIONS

1. Unless dimensioned locations for HVAC items are shown, select the precise location of the item in accordance with the contract documents and subject to the City Engineer's review.

2. No allowances will be granted for failure to obtain the City Engineer's review.

J. DESIGN

1. The level of design presented in the documents represents the extent of the design being furnished to the contractor. Any additional design needed shall be provided by the contractor.

2. All design by the contractor shall be performed by individuals skilled and experienced in such work, and where required by local code (or elsewhere in the documents) shall be performed by Contractor’s Design Engineer licensed in the State where the project is located.

3. The contractor shall include in his bid the costs of all such added design including project engineering, drafting, coordination, and all related activities and work.

a. Such designs services are required for many building systems; including but not limited to fire sprinkler systems, control systems, hanger/support systems, temporary duct/piping systems, system offset/adjustments to suit structure, and for methods/means of accomplishing the work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. CODE

1. All work shall be done in accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.

2. Throughout the project documents, items are shown or specified in excess of code requirements. In all such cases, the work shall be done so that code requirements are exceeded as indicated.

B. ASME

1. All pressure vessels, safety devices, and appurtenances shall comply with the standards of and bear the stamp of ASME.

C. ELECTRICAL

1. All electrical devices and wiring and equipment shall comply with standards of NEC and applicable sections of this Specification.

2. All electrical devices shall be UL (or other approved agency) listed and so identified.

D. INSTALLATION

1. All items shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.


E. CHECK-OUT

1. The contractor shall be responsible to verify that proper installation and proper connections have been provided for all HVAC work.

2. Contractor shall provide installation checkout, start-up services, and perform a thorough check of all systems to prove proper operation.

3. Contractor shall operate all items multiple times under varying conditions to confirm proper operation.

4. Contractor shall submit a checklist listing all equipment, fixtures, and similar items furnished on this project, with a date and initials indicating when the item was checked, a list of what was checked, and by whom.

5. Such check shall, as a minimum utilize documents provided by the equipment manufacturer.

6. Such a check-out is in addition to any commissioning activities specified (unless noted otherwise).


A. Submittals shall comply with the Section 01300 – Submittals Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Those products or systems requiring approved shop drawings (as indicated in these specifications) must first have their shop drawings submitted to the City Engineer for review and approval before they may be fabricated.

C. Product information submittals includes all manufacturers catalog data, technical data sheets manufacturers standard dimension sheets, and similar product data.

1. To the greatest extent possible all product submittals shall be delivered at the same time, and shall be for placement in 3-ring notebook(s), or alternate City approved process, as specified herein.

a. A finished index shall be provided when all product submittals have been made; listing all items, and shall be located at the front of the 3-ring notebook.

i. The front cover shall be labeled with the name of the Job, Tacoma Power, City Engineer, Contractor, and Date of Submittal.

ii. The spine shall be labeled with the name of the job and Tacoma Power.

iii. Notebook shall have divider sheets with typewritten identification tabs between categories.

2. Product information sheets shall be neat, readable, clean, 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch in size; larger sizes shall be accordion folded to 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch size.

a. Sheets shall be numbered corresponding to the product item number listed in the index.

1.7 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

1. Shop Drawings are defined as illustrative plans, to scale, showing installation details and dimensions for a given system.

a. Shop drawings are custom design drawings, specifically prepared for and applicable to this project by the installing Contractor.


2. At least thirty (30) days, unless specified sooner elsewhere, after the Notice to Proceed, submit multiple copies of the shop drawings to the Project Engineer.

3. All shop drawings relating to the same system shall be submitted at the same time.

4. Drawings shall be developed using AutoCAD 2014 (or newer), with hard copy prints and CD’s (with dwg or pdf files) of the drawings.

a. Except that AutoCAD files, for manufacturer’s proprietary equipment details are not required.

b. Minimum drawing size shall be 24-inches x 36-inches, minimum scale shall be 1/8-inch = 1-foot 0-inches.

5. Drawings shall be neat, clean and legible; and shall clearly illustrate the fabrication, layout, operation, and installation (as applicable) of the product or system submitted.

6. Drawings shall have a title block containing the name of the job, name of contractor who made the drawing, date of drawing, and drawing title.

a. A legend shall be included.

7. Shop drawings shall be provided for the following systems:

a. City Multi HVAC Systems.

b. City Multi Refrigerant piping system (Signed - Manufacture approved)

c. HVAC Control System(s).

d. For any parts of any system which are to be installed differently than as shown on the drawings.

e. Other areas/work as noted in documents.

f. For those systems requiring shop drawings, reference that system's specification section for any specific requirements of the shop drawings.

1.8 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. At completion of project this contractor shall furnish to the Project Engineer one complete set of any and all special tools such as odd size wrenches, keys, etc. (allen wrenches are considered odd), which are necessary to gain access to, service, or adjust any piece of equipment installed under this contract.

B. Each tool shall be marked or tagged to identify its use.

1.9 PRODUCT PROTECTION

A. Protect all material, equipment and apparatus provided under the applicable Division 23 Specification sections from damage, water, corrosion, freezing and dust, both in storage and when installed, until final project acceptance.

B. Protect premises and work of other divisions from damage arising out of installation of work of this division.

C. Completely cover motors, control panels, equipment, machinery and similar items to protect from dirt and water during construction.

D. Provide temporary heated and sheltered storage facilities for material and equipment.

E. Condensation: Provide adequate venting arrangements for all protected items to avoid condensation damage.


F. Cap all openings in pipe to protect against entry of foreign matter until all work that has dust or fumes associated with it is complete.

1. Caps shall be of sufficient strength and seal integrity to prevent entry of water if sprayed direct with a hose, and to prevent entry of general fumes.

G. Improper Storage/Protection: Material, equipment, or apparatus damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected.

1.10 PAINT FINISHES

A. Painting shall comply with Section 09 91 00 –Coatings.

B. Painting finishes that are damaged by handling, storage, etc. shall be corrected by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the City.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. STANDARD PRODUCTS

1. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.

2. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two (2) years prior to bid opening.

a. The two (2) year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. The two (2) years’ experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures.

3. Equipment changes made solely to satisfy code requirements or to improve unit efficiency are not required to have two (2) years prior operation.

B. SERVICE SUPPORT

1. Qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment shall be located reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

C. MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

1. For each item of equipment, provide a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place.

2. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

3. Nameplates for fuel-burning appliances, electric heating appliances, heat pump appliances, and other items listed in International Mechanical Code (IMC) shall provide added information as required by the IMC.

D. COMPATIBILITY

1. All components and materials used shall be compatible to the conditions and materials the items will be exposed to.


2. All items exposed to the weather shall be galvanized, or be of stainless steel or similar corrosion resistant material.

E. LEAD FREE

1. All solder, valve components, drinking fountain components, and other items in contact with potable water shall be lead free.

F. NAMEPLATES/LABELS/LEGENDS

1. Where nameplates or labels are required, these shall have minimum of 1/8-inch high (unless indicated otherwise) lettering, engraved on laminated plastic.

2. Laminated plastic shall have black surface layer and white (unless other color indicated) sub-layer, with engraving through to expose white sub-layer.

3. Prior to making a list and applying labels, the Contractor shall submit a list of all proposed labels.

G. NON-SPECIFIED ITEMS

1. Materials shown on the drawings but not specified shall be provided as shown and as required to suit the application illustrated and intended and shall be of commercial quality, consistent with the quality of similar type items provided on the project.

2. Not all items shown on the drawings necessarily have a corresponding specification; such items shall be provided per this paragraph and so as to provide complete, finished, fully functioning mechanical systems.

H. WARRANTY

1. Equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free from all manufacturing defects and capable of providing satisfactory operation for a period of one (1) year (or longer, where indicated so) after the date of project acceptance.

2. The contractor shall include in his bid all costs associated with this warranty to insure that the warranty extends to one (1) year after the date of project acceptance.

3. Possible project delays and failure by others to complete their work may cause the date of project acceptance to be substantially delayed.

4. The contractor shall be responsible for increasing the warranty dates by corresponding amounts to still provide one year warranties.

I. WEIGHTS

1. Unit weights shall not exceed the weights shown unless the contractor provides added structural supports as required by the Project Engineer.

2. The contractor shall bear all costs for all redesign and added supports to accommodate heavier equipment.

3. The contractor shall reimburse the Project Engineer for all time associated with all review and analyses regarding the use of equipment heavier than that indicated.

J. ASBESTOS FREE

1. All products used shall be asbestos free.


K. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE RATING

1. All materials and components furnished shall be suitable for the temperature and pressures they will be exposed to.

2. Contractor shall consider possible operating modes to insure proper material ratings.

3. Consideration shall include such factors as high temperatures caused by heat transfer from piping, coils, etc. when fans are shut down (e.g., motors, control devices, etc. installed within air handling units or mechanical rooms shall be rated for high temperatures due to such heat gain).

L. STANDARDIZATION

1. All like products shall be by the same manufacturer and have the same characteristics and features to allow for the City's standardization.

M. MODEL NUMBERS

1. Any reference to a manufacturer’s model number is a reference to a manufacturer’s series number or type of product. Any series numbers included in the contractual documents are only meant to convey a type of product that may meet the project requirements. The inclusion of manufacturer’s series numbers does not indicate the City has verified the products meet all applicable project requirements.

2. Conflicts of discrepancies occur regarding current manufacturer's series numbers versus series numbers specified in these documents shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for review and disposition using the formal transmittal process.

3. The series number is not to be construed as limiting the features or capabilities of the item.

N. FAULT CURRENT RATING

1. All equipment requiring the use of electrical power shall have a fault current rating of 25,000 AIC; except where a lower fault current value is indicated on the drawings, or Code allows uses of a lower number.

2. Where the contractor wishes to utilize equipment having fault current limitations lower than 25,000 AIC (or as shown on plans, whichever is less), the contractor shall be responsible to provide suitable fusing, additional devices, and/or other changes to the building electrical system as necessary to accommodate the proposed equipment.

O. SPECIAL PRODUCTS

1. Numerous products specified for this project are custom products, or require special and unique construction, and special and unique features.

a. Such special items may include: Finishes, controls, UL (or other independent testing lab) listing, construction, configuration, capacities, accessories, spare parts, warranty, testing, flow rates, application, installation, delivery date, cleaning, etc.

2. Contract documents may reference a manufacturer’s series number, but may still be considered special and custom. In this case the series number is considered a reference point for the unit manufacturer.


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Any reference in the specifications and/or the drawings to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make, model number, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition.

B. The manufacturers listed as Acceptable Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for the items indicated without obtaining prior approval.

C. Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project require prior approval. Section 01300 – Submittals Procedures, “Or Equal” or Substitutions for requirements.

D. The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the contractor from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and specifications.

E. In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance, factors considered include the following:

1. Project Engineering data showing item's performance.

2. Proper local representation of manufacturer and likelihood of future manufacturer's local support of product, service availability, previous installation.

3. Previous use by Tacoma Power/City Engineer/ and record.

4. Product quality, availability/quality of maintenance and operation data, capacity/performance compared to specified items, acoustics, items geometry/access utility needs, and similar concerns.

2.3 ELECTRICAL

A. All electrical work performed under this section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable portions of the contract documents and shall conform to all governing codes.

B. All electrical work, conduit, boxes and devices in connection with control wiring required to install the control equipment specified herein or shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed per the applicable specification sections.

C. All starting switches and disconnect switches provided by the contractor shall be labeled to identify the equipment served and usage.

D. All equipment shall be factory wired to a junction box for connection of electrical service.

E. All low voltage wiring shall be installed within electrical conduit. See Division 26 – Electrical for conduit specifications.

2.4 MOTORS AND CONTROLS

A. Where a piece of equipment specified includes an electric motor, the motor shall be furnished and mounted by the Contractor.

B. MOTORS

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Westinghouse, Reliance, Allis-Chalmers, Gould, Century, Wagner, Baldor, U.S. Motors, Marathon.

2. Motors located indoors shall be open frame, drip-proof type, unless indicated otherwise.


a. Motors located outdoors exposed to weather shall have corrosion resistant finish and shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) type, unless indicated otherwise.

3. All motors shall be UL listed.

4. All motors 1 HP and larger shall be high energy efficient type.

a. Efficiency shall comply with the Washington State Energy Code (WSEC).

5. Motors shall not be smaller than indicated on drawings; however, motors shall be of adequate size to drive the respective equipment when handling the quantities specified without exceeding the nameplate full load current at any conditions encountered in actual operation.

a. If it becomes evident that a motor furnished is too small to meet these requirements as a result of the contractor using substituted equipment or having revised the system arrangement, the contractor shall replace it with a motor of adequate size at no additional cost to the City.

b. This contractor shall also increase the size of the wiring, motor starter and other accessories as required to serve the larger motor at no additional cost to the City.

6. Motors used with Variable Frequency Drivers (VFD’s) shall be rated for such use.

2.5 PRODUCT LISTINGS

A. GENERAL

1. Any piece of equipment used in this project and hereinafter specified which requires electrical hook-up, such as fans, pumps, hot water tanks, boosters, air handling equipment, etc. shall be provided with an approved label from an agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.


1. Approval of agency shall be for the complete assembly (approval of individual components not acceptable) and all labels must be located outside of equipment and shall be visible to inspector.

2.6 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. GENERAL

1. All piping, valves, and mechanical equipment shall be marked.

2. All markings in concealed accessible spaces shall be reviewed and verified by Project Engineer prior to being concealed.

B. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MARKINGS

1. All mechanical equipment shall be marked with the name of the item; i.e., Heating Ventilating Unit No. 1, Exhaust Fan No. 2, Boiler No. 1 etc., and an additional label that indicates the area served by the equipment. NOTE: Not required on central boilers, chillers, or hydronic pumps.

2. The identification shall be the same as shown on the contract drawings and shall include the room names and numbers that the equipment serves.


3. The marking shall be located on a side of the equipment so as to be easily read, with the marking visible to a person standing at floor level near the unit (assuming any necessary access to a concealed unit has been made).

4. Lettering shall be a minimum 2-inches high (except that lettering indicating the room or area served shall 1/2-inch high), with color contrasting sharply with the color of unit.

5. Marking shall be with phenolic engraved labels, white lettering on a black background, drilled for fastening with two screws.

6. Equipment marking is not required for air outlets and inlets or plumbing fixtures.

7. Submit list of labels prior to fabricating per Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

C. CONCEALED ITEMS

1. Items concealed above accessible ceilings shall have the ceiling marked to indicate such items' location.

2. The marking system shall consist of a colored round head screw (approximately 1/4-inch diameter head); screws shall be installed through visible ceiling T-bar (or ceiling tile itself for concealed T-bar type ceilings) below the concealed item.

3. Colors to be used shall be verified with the City and, unless directed otherwise, shall be:

Item Color

Fire/Smoke Dampers Green

Controls Yellow

Equipment Red

D. PLAN POSTING

1. Post reduced as-built schematics in mechanical room.

2. As-built schematics shall be 11-inches x 17-inches in size and be laminated in clear plastic.

E. BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

1. Polyethylene plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines, refrigerant piping, etc.

2. Tape shall be of the type provided in rolls, 6-inches minimum width, and yellow or orange in color, with metallic backing (or tracer wire).

3. The warning and identification shall be imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over the entire tape length.

4. Warning shall be CAUTION--BURIED WATER LINES BELOW or similar.

a. Word WATER shall be replaced with a word appropriate to the utility that lies below.

5. Code and letter coloring shall be permanent an unaffected by moisture or other substances contained in the trench backfill material.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. WORKMANSHIP

1. This contractor shall furnish and install all equipment included in the contract to provide complete and functioning systems with a neat and finished appearance.

2. If, in the judgment of the City Engineer, any portion of the work has not been installed in accordance with the specifications and in a neat workmanlike manner, or has been left in a rough, unfinished manner, the contractor shall be required to revise the work so that it complies with the specifications and is acceptable to the City Engineer at no increase in cost to the City.

B. OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING IN NEW CONSTRUCTION

1. Openings - General: The General Contractor shall provide all required spaces and provisions in structures of new construction for the installation of work of all other contractors or subcontractors.

2. Coordination: The Division 23 Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor (in a timely manner) all needed dimensions and locations of openings to allow for these openings to be provided as the construction adjacent to the opening is being done.

3. Cutting and Patching: Cutting and patching of structures in place made necessary to admit work, repair defective work, or by neglect shall be performed by the General Contractor at its expense.

a. Such cutting and patching shall comply with Openings, Cutting, and Patching in Existing Construction.

3. Patching Materials: Patching shall be with materials of like kind and quality of the adjoining surface and performed by skilled labor experienced in that particular trade.

C. Site Work: All trenching, backfilling, compacting, and similar groundwork for utilities shall comply with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork and best professional practices.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE

1. Equipment shall be installed to permit easy access for normal maintenance, to ensure parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance (e.g., coils, heat exchanger bundles, sheaves, filters, meters, bearings, etc.) can be replaced or removed as necessary.

2. If it is determined there are interferences between components which could affect normal operations or maintenance activities it will be at the contractor’s expense to reconfigure all equipment, components, subcomponents and any associated equipment to remove said interferences and provide proper clearances.

a. Repair plans will be submitted to the City for approval prior to commencement of repair work.

B. ACCESS DOORS

1. Provide and install all necessary access doors in building to access equipment, dampers, valves, control boxes, and ducts as required to allow for inspection, service, and proper maintenance.


C. MANUALLY OPERATED COMPONENTS

1. Actuators, Valves and other devices which are manually adjusted or operated shall be located so as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor.

2. Any such items which are not in the open shall be made accessible through access doors in the building construction.

D. MONITORING COMPONENTS

1. Meters, Gauges, thermometers, instrumentation and other components which are installed to monitor equipment performance, operating conditions, etc., shall be oriented so as to be easily read by a person standing on the floor.

2. Provide necessary brackets and hangers as needed.

E. DIFFICULT INSTALLATION

1. If circumstances at a particular location make the accessible installation of an item difficult or inconvenient, the situation shall be reviewed and approved with the City Engineer before installing the item in a poor access location.

F. ROTATING PARTS

1. Belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts which may pose a danger to personnel shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with applicable codes, so as not to present a safety hazard.

G. EQUIPMENT PADS

1. All ground and slab mounted mechanical equipment shall be installed on a minimum 4-inch thick concrete pad, unless indicated otherwise.

2. Where the largest dimension for any pad exceeds 6-feet provide a 6 x 6 - 10 gauge x 10 gauge welded wire fabric reinforcement in the pad (unless noted otherwise).

H. DISSIMILAR METALS

1. Provide separations between all dissimilar metals.

2. Where not specified in another way, use 10 mil plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or plastic centering inserts.

I. ELECTRICAL OFFSETS

1. Provide offsets around all electrical panels (and similar electrical equipment) to maintain space clear above and below electrical panels to structure and clearance of 3-feet directly in front of panel, except where indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more.

J. PIPING-THROUGH-FRAMING

1. Piping through framing shall be installed in the approximate center of the member.

2. Where located such that nails or screws are likely to damage the pipe, a steel plate at least 1/16-inch thick shall be installed to provide protection.

3. At metal framing, wrap piping to prevent contact of dissimilar metals.

4. At metal and wood framing, provide plastic pipe insulators at piping penetrations through framing nearest each fixture and on at least 32-inch centers.


K. SAFETY PROTECTION

1. All ductwork, piping and related items installed by this contractor that present a safety hazard (i.e., items installed at/near head height, items projecting into maintenance access paths, etc.) shall be covered (at hazardous area) with 3/4-inch thick elastomeric insulation and reflective red/white self-sticking safety tape.

2. All sharp corners on supports and other installed items shall be ground smooth.

L. EQUIPMENT ACCESS

1. Access to equipment is of utmost importance.

2. Contractor shall apply extra attention to the laying out of pipe and duct routings, locations of equipment, and in coordinating all work.

3. Poor maintenance access will not be accepted.

4. Contractor shall note that in essentially all areas piping and ducts elbows / fittings / transitions at crosses of ducts / pipes and at all connections to mains and branches; and requiring added fittings to maintain a clear maintenance walkway path.

M. MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS

1. Installation shall comply with manufacturers installation instructions.

2. Submit such instructions for City Engineers review prior to beginning installation.

3.3 COMMISSIONING

A. The products and systems specified in the Division 23 – HVAC are to be commissioned by the City.

1. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation as discussed throughout the contract documents.

2. At a minimum, the Contractor shall provide a documented and signed record to verify that all equipment and systems installed under this contract have been installed properly, have been inspected, and are ready for City commissioning.

B. At a minimum the contractor shall commission per the Washington State Energy Code (Latest Revision) Section 1416.4 System Commissioning.

1. Provide all necessary documentation, in type written form, of all commissioning documentation.

3.4 WATERPROOFING

A. GENERAL

1. Where any work pierces construction intended to be watertight or weatherproof, including waterproof concrete, the method of installation shall be as approved by the Project Engineer before work is done.

2. Contractor shall furnish all necessary caulking and flashing required to make such penetrations absolutely watertight.

3. Where not detailed or indicated how to install, the contractor shall submit shop drawings of his proposed methods per Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.


B. EQUIPMENT

1. All equipment or material located outdoors shall be watertight and shall be designed and intended by the manufacturer to be used outdoors in the conditions of the climate of the installation.

3.5 FINAL INSPECTION AND INSTRUCTION

A. FINAL INSPECTION AND FIELD INSTRUCTION

1. Prior to acceptance of the HVAC work, the contractor shall put all HVAC systems into operation for a period of not less than five (5) working days so that they may be inspected by the City Engineer.

2. The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the City Engineer and contractor.

3. The contractor shall furnish adequate staff to operate the mechanical systems during inspection.

4. During the final inspection period, the contractor shall demonstrate to the City's representatives the operation of all equipment, showing that it operates and is controlled properly.

a. Such demonstration period shall include an 8 hour field instruction period.

b. Contractor shall have representatives present of the equipment manufacturers to explain operation and maintenance procedures.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe Hangers and Supports

B. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports


A. Division 23 - HVAC


A. All methods, materials and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC) and International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having jurisdiction.


A. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data for all hangers, supports, and anchors. Indicate where such items are to be used.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Shop drawings are required for all trapeze hangers, equipment supports, and any fabricated supports or assemblies and any support arrangements to be used that are not shown on the plans.

1.5 REFERENCES

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

IMC International Mechanical Code

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Products shall comply with Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC, Paragraph 2.2 - Manufacturers.

B. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B-Line Systems, Unistrut, Michigan, PHD, Tolco

C. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Michigan, Tolco, PHD

2.2 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. HANGER RODS

1. Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated.

2. Hanger rods shall be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not exceed the following:


Normal Rod Diameter Maximum Load

1/4-inch 240 pounds

5/16-inch 440 pounds

3/8-inch 610 pounds

1/2-inch 1130 pounds

B. HANGER STRAPS

1. Galvanized steel minimum 1-inch x 18 gauge.

2. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed the following:

Strap Size Maximum Load

1-inch by 18 Gauge 380 pounds

1-inch x 16 Gauge 630 pounds

1-1/2 inch x 16 Gauge 990 pounds

C. BEAM ATTACHMENTS

1. Shall be of the following MSS type: 21, 22, 23, 28, and 30.

2. All beam attachments shall have retaining clips or other devices to prevent beam attachment from dislocation.

D. CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS

1. "Kwik Bolt TZ" by Hilti Fastening systems for concrete.

2. "Kwik Bolt 3" by Hilti Fastening systems for masonry.

E. GENERAL ANCHOR BOLTS/FASTENERS

1. ASTM A307, SAE J429, ASTM A563

2. Unified inch screw threads (course, UNC).

3. Electro-plated zinc finish.

F. MANUFACTURED "STRUT" CHANNELS

1. Shall be minimum 12 gauge.

2. 1-5/8-inch x 1-5/8-inch unless noted otherwise.

3. Electro-plated zinc finish.

4. With holes to suite application.

G. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.

H. Wood: Shall be pressure treated where used outside building; and same type as used in surrounding construction for structural purposes.

2.3 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Constructions Standards.

B. VERTICAL DUCT SUPPORTS AT FLOOR

1. 1-1/2-inch x 1-1/2-inch x 1/8-inch (minimum) galvanized steel angle and to support ducts, as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.


2. For ducts over 30-inches wide provide riser reinforcing with hanger rods between the riser support and riser reinforcing.

C. Vertical Duct Supports at Wall: 1-1/2-inch x 1/8-inch (minimum) strap or 1-1/2-inch x 1-1/2-inch x 1/8-inch (minimum) angle bracket as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

D. HANGER ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE

1. As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Constructions Standards to suit building construction and as allowed on structural drawings.

2. Where C-clamps are provided, retainer clips shall be used.

3. Friction beam clamps shall not be used.

E. Hanger Attachments to Ducts: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Constructions Standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, beams, angles, turnbuckles, rod connectors, stanchions, wall/roof/floor backing and attachments, and any other miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes, ducts, and mechanical equipment.

1. All supports, whether from floor, walls, or hung from structure are the contractor's responsibility.

B. Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) and in ceiling (anchored to joists or trusses), as required to provide substantial support for all items.

C. Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish.

E. Attach to building structure as shown on drawings (reference structural drawings). Where not indicated on the plans, the contractor shall detail the methods used to support mechanical items and submit sketches to the Project Engineer for review.

F. Maximum spans between piping supports may be significantly less than the maximum spans allowed herein due to structural limitations of allowable loads on hangers.

1. The most restrictive criteria governs.

2. Reference drawing notes.

G. Where installed items incur loads that exceed the buildings structural capacity (i.e., roof or wall carrying capacity as indicated on structural drawings or otherwise noted in the documents), provide supports to transmit the loads to floors or other parts of structure that can carry load (e.g., bridging between joists to distribute load, added structure between walls to allow walls to carry load, column supports from the floor, etc.).

1. Such supports shall consist of all welded steel angle iron supports, pipe columns, or similar custom fabricated items.

2. Provide with base plates, U-bolts, or similar type accessories to allow proper anchoring and seismic hold-down for all items supported.


3. Where not detailed on the drawings, the selection and design of such supports is the contractor's responsibility, subject to submittal review and acceptance by the Project Engineer.

H. Provide seismic bracing and added supports per Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide anchors and supports for all ductwork.

1. Provided steel angle, channels, and other accessories as needed to support ducts.

B. RECTANGULAR DUCT

1. Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct.

2. Hangers maximum allowable loads shall not be as shown in SMACNA Tables but shall be as specified in these specifications.

C. Round Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct.

D. HANGER SPACING – RECTANGULAR DUCT

Duct Area Maximum Spacing

Up to 4 square feet 8-feet

4.1 to 10 square feet 6-feet

10 square feet and up 4-feet

E. HANGER SPACING – ROUND DUCT

Duct Area Maximum Spacing

Up to 24-inches diameter 8-feet

25-inch to 48-inch diameter 6-feet

49-inch diameter and up 4-feet

F. Vertical ducts shall be supported at each floor level, but in no case less than on 12-foot intervals.

G. Provide supports of each change in direction of duct for ducts with 4-square-foot area or more, or for ducts larger than 24-inch diameter.

1. Locate hangers at inside and outside corners of elbows – or at each end of fitting on each side.

2. Provide supports within 12-inches of the end of each duct run.

H. Provide additional supports at each side concentrated loads (such as modulating dampers, duct heaters, sound attenuators, etc).

I. Provide supports for exterior ductwork as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

3.3 CEILING AIR TERMINALS/ SERVICES

A. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runner (or ceiling supports members) or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runners (or support members).


B. Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 46 pounds, in addition to the above, shall have two (2) No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the ceiling system hangers or to the structure above. These wires may be slack.

C. Terminals or services weighing more than 46 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment. All equipment shall be anchored to building structure.

B. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment where suspended from the structure shall be supported using the methods shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as shown on the drawings.

C. Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is transmitted to the building structure (see Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment).

1. All fans and air handling units are to be hung from the building structure (except where are roof top mounted; then units shall be base supported on roof curb).

D. Added supports and bracing shall be provided to prevent swaying and horizontal movement of equipment (see Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment).

E. Provide support assemblies and accessories as required to support all mechanical equipment.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Vibration Isolation

B. Seismic Restraints



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. "Equipment" is defined to mean any item with power connections (fans, HV units, water heaters, air compressors, etc.), and also to include all hoods and expansion tanks; but does not include pumps less than 3 hp.

B. "Equipment Requiring Vibration Isolation" is defined to be any equipment (as defined above) with rotating components (e.g. pumps, fans, etc.).



B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data on all items to be used.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated support assemblies.

2. Submit shop drawings showing proposed locations of all seismic control bracing and details of bracing construction.

3. Submit calculations showing vibration isolation selection for all isolation devices provided under this section. (i.e. where isolation is not furnished integral with equipment or by the manufacturer of the equipment).

1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. Contractor is responsible to select and provide all vibration isolation devices for all rotating equipment so as to provide complete installed mechanical systems free of the transmission of vibration and vibration generated noise to the structure.

B. Where not provided by the equipment manufacturer, all vibration isolation devices and support assemblies shall be supplied as a coordinated package by a single vibration isolation manufacturer or representative.

C. Isolation devices furnished by equipment manufacturer shall comply with this specification section and be selected by the manufacturer to suit, and provide satisfactory performance, for the applications of this project.

D. Vibration isolation is shown on the drawings for various items but is not shown for all items requiring isolation. Provide all isolation as required and specified herein.

1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Piping seismic restraints are typically not shown on the drawings but are to be provided as specified herein.


B. Contractor is responsible to select and provide all seismic anchoring devices for all mechanical equipment and all piping.

C. For all equipment:

1. The contractor shall retain a specialty consultant or equipment manufacturer to develop a seismic restraint system and perform seismic calculations in accordance with the state and local codes and additional requirements specified in this section.

a. Calculations, restraint selections, and installation details shall be done by a professional experienced in seismic restraint design and installation and licensed in the state where the project is located.

2. The seismic restraint design, consisting of calculations, restraint selection, installation details, and other documentation, shall be submitted.

a. This submittal shall be signed and sealed by a professional Engineer (where required by Code).

3. The seismic restraint design shall clearly indicate the attachment points to the building structure and all design forces (in X, Y, and Z direction) at the attachment points.

a. The seismic restraint engineer shall coordinate all attachments with the building’s structural engineer of record, who shall verify the attachment methods and the ability of the building structure to accept the loads imposed.

4. The seismic restraint design shall be based on actual equipment data (dimensions, weight, center of gravity, etc.) obtained from submittals or the manufacturers.

a. The equipment manufacturer shall verify that the attachment points on the equipment can accept the combination of seismic, weight, and other loads imposed.

5. Analysis should include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure.

a. Analysis should detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and/or welded length.

b. All seismic restraint devices should be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed above in “Identification of Application Codes” in this chapter acting through the equipment of system’s center of gravity.

1.7 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA/PPIC: Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.

B. MASON: Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Guidelines for suspended piping, Ductwork, Electrical Systems and Floor Mounted Equipment, 2005 6th Edition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. Products: Mason, Peabody, Vibration Eliminators, Amber-Booth.

2.2 NEOPRENE ISOLATORS

A. ISOLATION PADS

1. Oil resistant neoprene pads, minimum 1/4-inch thick, with cross-ribbed or waffle design.

2. Size pads for not more than 50 psi or as recommended by vibration isolator manufacturer.


B. FLOOR MOUNTED ISOLATORS

1. Double deflection type neoprene mounts, having minimum deflection of 0.35-inch.

2. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered, base plate shall have mounting holes, and top shall have threaded steel plate or threaded steel insert.

3. Element shall be color coded or labeled with molded symbols to identify capacity. Mason Series ND, or approved.

C. SUSPENSION ISOLATORS

1. Shall be double deflection neoprene type, with isolator encased in open steel bracket and minimum 3/8-inch deflection.

2. Hanger rod shall be isolated from steel bracket with neoprene grommets.

3. Mason Series HD, or approved.

2.3 SPRING ISOLATORS

A. GENERAL

1. The load carried by each isolator shall be carefully calculated and isolators selected so that the static deflection will be the same and the supported equipment will remain level.

2. Isolators shall be so designed that the ends of the springs will remain parallel during and after deflection to operating height.

3. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50% of the operating deflection.

4. Suspension isolator springs shall have a static deflection not less than 1-1/2-inch, except that for units with components rotating at 1000 rpm and less, the static deflection shall be not less than 2-inches.

5. Floor isolator springs shall have deflection of not less than 1-inch.

6. All isolators shall provide at least 96% isolation efficiency.

NOTE: Deflections other than these may be used where circumstances warrant and more optimum isolation results can be achieved.

B. SUSPENSION TYPE SPRING ISOLATORS

1. Shall consist of a rigid steel frame, a stable steel spring in the bottom part of the frame, and double deflection neoprene isolating pad at the top of the frame.

2. Where supporting rods pass through the frame, a clearance of not less than one-half rod diameter shall be provided all around the rod.

3. Mason Series DNHS, or approved.

C. FLOOR HOUSED TYPE

1. Housed spring isolator with ductile iron housing, steel base plate with mounting holes, spring inspection ports, neoprene cushion, leveling screws.

2. Mason Series SSLFH, or approved.

2.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. General: Shall be as shown in "SMACNA/PPIC" “MASON” and as designed by the contractor per Paragraph 1.7 - References.


B. MATERIALS

1. Steel:

a. Shall be per ASTM A36; hangers and other devices shall be per Section 23 05 29 – Hangers and Supports and as shown in SMACNA/PPIC.

b. Sheet metal used for bracing shall be no less than 16 gauge.

2. Cabling:

a. Cables shall be minimum 1/8-inch diameter, 7 x 19 strand, galvanized steel with clear vinyl coating.

b. Provide with galvanized thimble, clamps, and accessories.

c. End termination and clamping/application shall comply with "SMACNA/PPIC".

C. EXPANSION DEVICES/FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

1. Piping Systems:

a. "V" design connector with braided hose and attachment fittings.

b. Shall be constructed of type 321 stainless steel hose and braid with carbon steel elbows and ends (for steel piping systems); and bronze hose and braid with copper elbows and ends (for copper piping systems).

c. Unit shall allow for 2-inch movement in all planes, and have minimum 150 psi working pressure at the system temperature installed.

d. Unisource Manufacturing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. Provide vibration isolators for all rotating equipment so that no vibration is transmitted to the structure.

1. Isolators shall be the type indicated on the drawings (except that where not shown, type shall be as selected by vibration isolation manufacturer (or equipment manufacturer to provide adequate isolation).

2. Isolators are not required for vertical inline style pumps.

B. Install all isolators in accordance with isolator manufacturer's instructions and isolated equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Should vibration isolators prove inadequate to prevent transmission of vibrations to the building structure or limit equipment vibration generated noise, such isolators shall be replaced with isolators having the largest deflection that can be practically installed or otherwise modified/replaced to produce satisfactory isolation.

1. Such replacement shall be at no additional cost to the City.

D. Isolators which cannot be adjusted so that the rod is centered in the hole shall be replaced at no additional cost to the City.

E. All fans are to be hung from the structure; air handling units are to be base supported (unless shown or noted otherwise).

3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. EQUIPMENT

1. Equipment Not Requiring Vibration Isolation:


a. General: Shall be rigidly connected to the structure.

b. Base Mounted Equipment: Where the height of the equipment is two (2) or more times the smallest base dimension, provide seismic bracing to resist calculated forces.

c. Provide elastomeric pad (1/4-inch thick) between seismic strap and equipment.

d. Other Equipment: Where equipment is 36-inches or more from the supporting structure (e.g. top of unit is hanging 36-inches below supporting joist) provide seismic bracing to resist calculated forces.

e. Provide elastomeric pad (1/4-inch thick) between seismic strap and equipment.

2. Equipment with External Vibration Isolators:

a. Base Mounted Equipment: Provide housed spring isolators, seismic snubbers, or padded steel angle (with minimum 1/4-inch clearance between pad and equipment); sized to resist calculated forces.

b. Other Equipment: Where equipment is 36-inches or more from the supporting structure provide rigid welded steel frame with resilient pads around equipment with approximate 1/2-inch gap (or as required) to allow free movement.

c. Size bracing to resist calculated.

3. Equipment with Internal Vibration Isolation:

a. Base Mounted Equipment: Provide bracing (or anchoring) sized to resist calculated forces.

b. Other Equipment: Where equipment is 36-inches or more from the supporting structure provide slacked cable bracing to allow slight movement, but installed so as to prevent more than 1-inch motion in any direction.

c. Size bracing to resist calculated forces.

4. Forces shall be calculated in accordance with accepted engineering practice, using appropriate seismic “zone” and other factors for the building type and location. This project’s building is considered a “non-essential” facility.

B. Do not brace to dissimilar parts of a building or dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. (Examples: wall and roof, solid concrete wall and lightweight roof, existing building structure and new isolated building structure.)

C. Provide flexible connectors allowing at least 1-inch movement in all directions where piping and ductwork crosses building expansion joints, and where needed to accommodate differences in movement of building and systems.

3.3 TEST AND INSPECTION

A. FIELD INSPECTIONS

1. Prior to initial operation, the vibration isolators and seismic devices shall be inspected for conformance to drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's data and instructions.

B. SPRING ISOLATOR INSPECTION

1. After installation of spring isolators or protected spring isolators and seismic restraint devices, the machinery shall rock freely on its spring isolators within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices.

2. Eliminate or correct interferences.


C. TESTS

1. Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls.

2. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.

3. Re-balance, adjust, or replace machinery with noise or vibration levels in excess of those given in the machinery specifications or machinery manufacturer's data.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air Balancing

B. Report



1.3 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council: National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation.

B. ASHRAE: 2005 Handbook of Fundamentals.

C. American Conference of Governmental Hygienists: Industrial Ventilation, a Manual of Recommended Practice.


A. General: The air balancing shall be done by a company which specializes in this type of work and is totally independent and separate from the company or contractor which has installed the systems to be balanced.

B. Approved Balancers: If other than approved balancing subcontractor noted below, the contractor shall submit all necessary information for City engineering review prior to acceptance. It is the City’s engineer’s determination if the submitted balancing contractor is approved to do the work.

1. TAC Services, LLC.

2. MacDonald Miller Facility Solutions

3. Harden & Sons

4. Neudorfer Engineering

C. Prior to beginning balancing, submit the name of the company the contractor proposes to have complete the balancing to the City Engineer for approval.

D. Engineer: The final report of this work shall be accompanied by a statement that the work complies with the Associated Air Balance Council Standards and these project specifications.

E. Notify the City Engineer in writing of all problems or discrepancies between actual conditions and what design documents show as work proceeds.

F. The Balancer shall be directly responsible to the City Engineer and shall perform this work as directed by the City Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION

A. Balancing equipment shall comply with Associated Air Balance Council recommendations for field measurement instrumentation.


B. All measuring instruments shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. Calibration dates and certifications shall be available at engineer's request.

C. Instruments shall be capable of:

1. Air velocity instruments, direct reading in feet per minute with 2% accuracy.

2. Static pressure instruments, direct reading in inches water gauge with 2% accuracy.

3. Tachometers, direct reading in revolutions per minute with 1/2% accuracy; or revolution counter accurate with 2 counts per 1,000.

4. Thermometers, direct reading in degrees Fahrenheit with 1/10 of a degree accuracy.

5. Pressure gauges, direct reading in feet of water or psig with 1/2% accuracy.

6. Water flow instruments, direct reading in feet of water or psig with 1/2% accuracy suitable for readout of balancing valve provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All air systems shall be completely balanced and adjusted to provide the air flow rates indicated, and to produce an even heating and cooling effect and control response.

B. Consult and coordinate with other Division 23 – HVAC contractors for the adjustment of all control devices to allow for proper system operation.

C. Make final adjustments for flow rates in order to optimize each space's comfort, including such considerations as temperature, drafts, noise, pressurization, and air changes.

1. Where variances are made from design values, state reasons in report (e.g., "too noisy", "too drafty," etc.).

2. All such variances are subject to approval by the City Engineer.

D. All measurements and adjustments shall be in accordance with the Associated Air Balance Council National Standards.

3.2 PRELIMINARY AND FINAL BALANCING REQUIREMENTS

A. The contractor shall provide in their bid to perform a complete preliminary air balance and a complete final air balance based on any required changes deemed necessary by the engineer due to installing Division 23 – HVAC contractor’s deficiencies.

1. Preliminary balancing: This requires the balancing company to provide a complete preliminary balancing of all the HVAC equipment to set airflows and determine inefficiencies that need to be addressed.

2. Final balancing: This requires the balancing company to provide a complete final balancing of all HVAC equipment. Showing corrections based on inefficiencies. This may require the balancing company to redo the initial preliminary balancing as required to finalize a proper balanced system.

3.3 AIR BALANCING

A. Pre-check of System: Prior to beginning balancing, perform, as a minimum, the following:

1. Verify that clean filters have been installed, that system is free from debris, and that all inlets/outlets are not obstructed.

2. Check all fans and equipment to verify that proper start-up and system preparation has been done by the installing contractor.


3. Check all door/window and similar building opening status to insure building is ready and proper pressurization can be obtained.

4. Open all dampers to full flow position, check positions and operation of all motorized dampers to allow full system flows.

5. Review controls and sequences of operation.

B. Tolerances: All air flow rates (supply, return, and exhaust) shall be adjusted to within plus 5% and minus 5% of the values shown in the contract documents, except that relative space-to-space pressure relationships shall always be maintained (e.g., restrooms shall be negative relative to other areas, general offices shall be positive, etc.).

C. All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts and to eliminate objectionable noise.

D. Air balancing shall be done with new, clean air filters installed.

1. Adjust air deliveries so that design quantities will be obtained when filters are half dirty.

2. This condition shall be simulated by covering a portion of the filter area.

E. Adjust fan speeds and fan drives as required to produce design air quantities.

F. Measurements and adjustments of the air handling and distribution equipment shall be executed in a manner consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations.

G. At completion of balancing, mark the final position of all balancing dampers and record all data.

H. Air flow measurements in main ducts shall be made with a duct traverse using a pitot tube and micromanometer.

1. Summation of air terminal outlets and inlets is not sufficient.

2. Quantity of duct leakage shall be indicated.

I. Duct traverses in rectangular duct shall measure the center of equal areas in the air flow stream, with centers not more than 6-inches apart.

1. Round duct traverses shall measure at least 20 locations, with locations being the centers of equal annular area.

2. Reference the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual, Chapter 9, Testing of Ventilation Systems.

J. Balance each branch run so that there is at least one wide open run; balance branches relative to one another so that at least one branch damper is wide open.

K. Requirements for All Air Handling Systems: Data to be measured/recorded and provided in report:

1. Floor plans clearly showing and identifying all diffusers, grilles, O.A. louvers, ducts and all other items where air flow rates were measured.

2. Identify manufacturer, model number, size, and type of all air inlets/outlets.

3. Initial, trial, and final air flow measurements for all diffusers, grilles, O.A. louvers, ducts, and all other items where air flow rates were measured.

4. Design air flow rates and percentage final air flow rates are of design values.

5. The connected voltage and corresponding nameplate full load amps, and the initial and final amperages of all fan motors.

6. Initial and final RPMs of all fans.


7. Static pressures on inlet and outlet of all fans.

8. Fan initial and final CFMs.

9. Outdoor air CFMs (record minimum and maximum values).

10. Entering air temperature (db heating) across coils and fan.

11. Leaving air temperature (db heating) across coils and fan.

12. Static pressure drop across each filter and coil bank.

13. Data required for all equipment which are part of balanced systems:

a. Equipment name and number (as used on drawings).

b. Service.

c. Equipment manufacturer and model numbers.

d. Sheave and belt sizes (where applicable).

e. Filters sizes and quantities (where applicable).

f. Motor manufacturer and complete nameplate data.

g. Design operating conditions.

h. Actual operating conditions (flows, pressure drops, rpm, etc.).

3.4 BALANCING REPORT

A. General: A balancing report shall be submitted as specified herein, documenting all balancing procedures and measurements.

B. Preliminary Report: Two (2) preliminary review copies of the balancing report shall be submitted to the engineer when the balancing work is 90% complete (or as near 90% complete as possible due to uncompleted work of other trades).

1. In addition to containing all the information required of the final report, the preliminary report shall contain a list of all the work required of other trades in order to allow the balancing work to be completed.

2. The engineer will review the preliminary report and inform the contractor of any additional items or revisions required for the final report.

3. Preliminary reports may be omitted where the engineer grants approval.

C. Final Report: Shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1. Submit reports to contractor for inclusion in manuals (or, when manuals have been already sent to engineer, send report to engineer who will insert report into manual).

2. Provide number of reports as required to match quantity of O&M Manuals, but in no case less than five (5).

D. Report Organization: The report shall be divided into logical sections consistent with the building or system layout (i.e. by floors, building wings, air handling units, or other convenient way).

1. Tabulate data separately for each system.

2. Describe balancing method used for each system.

E. Format: 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch size, neat, clean copies, drawings accordion folded.

1. Report shall be typed, shall have a title page, table of contents, and divider sheets with identification tabs between sections.


2. Information shall be placed in a three hole notebook, with the front cover labeled with the name of the job, owner, engineer, balancing contractor, and report date.

F. GENERAL BALANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED

1. At the beginning of the report, include a summary of problems encountered, deviations from design, remaining problems, recommendations, and comments.

2. List of instruments used in making the measurements and instrument calibration data.

3. Names of personnel performing measurements.

4. Explanation of procedures used in making measurements and balancing each system.

5. List of all correction factors used for all diffusers, grilles, valves, venturi meters, and any other correction factors used.

6. Areas where difficulties were encountered in obtaining design flow rates, or where unstable operating conditions may exist.

7. Note any parts of the system where objectionable drafts or noises may be present and efforts made to eliminate same and why they may still be present.

8. Note where variances from design values occur; explain why.

G. Air Balancing Information: All previously cited required measurement/recorded data, any additional recorded data, and observations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct Insulation

B. Equipment and Specialties Insulation


A. Division 23 – HVAC

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. "Run-out" means "piping not more than 12-feet long that runs to an individual fixture or unit."


A. All insulation shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke development, as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL-723.


A. All submittals shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals Procedures.

B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Provide product data on all insulation materials to be used. Indicate thicknesses to be used.


A. GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

1. The contract shall include the insulation of all HVAC ducting and accessories within the Powerhouse per these specifications.

B. CODE COMPLIANCE

1. Contractor shall insulate all systems with the materials and thicknesses as specified herein which exceed code in some cases. But in no case shall the insulation be less than that required by the Washington State Energy Code (latest edition and amendments) or Energy Code enforced by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Contractor shall, in addition to insulating those systems/items specified herein, provide insulation where required by Code.

C. INSULATION AT HANGERS

1. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all insulated systems (except ductwork.)

2. Inserts at pipe hangers are specified in Section 23 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Equipment and are considered as part of the hanger and support system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – DUCTWORK SYSTEMS


B. Insulation: Manville, Armstrong, Owens-Corning, CSG, Knauf, Rubatex, Pittsburgh Corning, Imcolack, Halstead, CertainTeed Manson.


C. Accessories: Same as for insulation and Lewco, Manville, Duro Dyne, Gustin Bacon, Childers, RPR, Tee Cee, J. P. Stevens.

2.2 DUCT INSULATION

A. Fiberglass Insulation: 1.0-pound-per-cubic-foot minimum density; thermal conductivity no greater than 0.26 Btu-in/hr-sq. ft.-deg. F. at 75°F with factory applied jacket as specified below.

B. Fiberglass Insulation Jacket: Vapor proof jacket, consisting of aluminum foil cover with open mesh fiberglass, reinforcement, laminated to UL rated kraft, vapor transmission rate shall not exceed 0.05 perms.

C. Adhesive: Fire retardant, Duro Dyne type FPG or equal.

D. Clips: Cement-on or welded-on pins impaled through glass fiber, with surface washers.

E. INSULATION THICKNESS

Unless revisions to the latest energy code the following insulations thickness shall be provided or code required R-value. It shall be up to the contractor to adhere to the latest code requirement.

1. Supply Air Ductwork: 2.0-inch thick (except where duct runs inside the building envelop, 1.0-inch thick insulation shall be provided).

2. Return Air Ductwork: 2.0-inch thick (except where duct runs inside the building envelop, 1.0-inch thick insulation shall be provided).

3. Outdoor Air Intake Ductwork: 2.0-inch thick.

4. Exhaust Air Ductwork: 2.0-inch thick.

5. Alternative Insulation Thickness:

a. Insulation thicknesses indicated are based on the thermal conductivities specified (and minimum insulation density).

b. Contractor at his option may use other insulation thicknesses for insulation with different thermal conductivities provided that the overall heat transfer coefficient is the same as if the specified insulation had been used.

c. Submit calculations showing insulation equivalency for approval.

2.3 ALTERNATIVE INSULATION THICKNESS

A. Insulation thickness indicated is based on the thermal conductivities specified.

B. Contractor, at his option, may use other insulation thicknesses for insulation with different thermal conductivities, provided that the overall heat transfer co-efficient is the same as if the specified insulation had been used.

C. Submit calculations showing insulation equivalency for approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR PROTECTION

1. Cover existing equipment and finished floors to protect such items from insulation fiber and dust.

2. Keep all such existing areas in a “broom clean” condition at the end of each day.


B. INSTALLATION

1. Finish all insulation ends, no raw edges allowed.

2. Joints: Tightly butt adjacent insulation sections together without any voids. Provide overlap of jacket material over all circumferential joints.

C. All ends shall be firmly butted together and secured with butt strips recommended by the manufacture.

D. Jacketing and Sealing: Shall be completely sealed to provide a vapor proof barrier. Provide over-laps and seam offsets as per manufacture recommendation. All raw edges shall be sealed with approved sealer.

E. Items in piping that require access (i.e. flow measurement devices) shall have removable insulation provided.

F. Provide slip joints between fixed supports and on continuous long runs of straight piping as necessary. At a minimum, slip joints are achieved by increasing circumferential overlap to 8- to10-inches and applying a flexible white caulking in the overlap area to maintain a sealed system.

G. Items To Be Insulated: Provide insulation on all ductwork, all items installed in these duct systems, all energy conveying, all energy storage, and all energy consuming devices specified as part of Division 23, except where such insulation has been specifically excluded.

H. ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM BEING INSULATED

1. Electric motors

2. Factory insulated or factory lined fan coil units

3. Fans

4. Internally lined ductwork (where lining provides sufficient insulation to meet code)

5. Ducts which convey only exhaust air except for the last 4-foot – 0-inches before exiting building or unless noted to be insulated on the drawings.

6. Ducts which carry only return air except for the first 4-foot – 0-inches from the mechanical equipment for sound attenuation and where noted to be insulated on the drawings.

3.2 DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. All HVAC supply and outdoor air ducts shall be covered or lined with glass fiber insulation.

B. Insulation shall be firmly butted at all joints with a maximum allowable compression of 25%.

1. All seams shall overlap a minimum of 2-inches and be finished with appropriate pressure sensitive tape or glass fabric and vapor retardant mastic.

2. Pressure sensitive tapes and glass cloth shall be a minimum 3-inches wide.

C. For rectangular ducts over 18-inches wide, duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the ductwork with mechanical fasteners on 18-inch centers to reduce sagging.

1. Washers shall be applied without compressing the insulation.

2. All seams, joints, penetrations, and damage to the facing shall be sealed with vapor retardant mastic.


3.3 EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. All equipment where access is required shall have insulation installed so that it can be easily removed and reinstalled without requiring new insulation. Items requiring such removable insulation include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Balancing Devices

2. Pressure/Temperature/Flow Measuring Devices.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 09 00 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

Reference each section in Division 23 for control information regarding that specific section. Unless note otherwise, each Division 23 section will provide information on the controls for that section’s equipment. It is the contractor’s responsibility to review each section and provide the necessary instrumentation and controls to provide complete operating systems.

1.2 RELATED SECTION


B. Division 26 – Electrical

1.3 BIDDING

A. Unless noted otherwise: Provide all labor and materials to install a complete control system for the Cowlitz Fall project.

B. Reference mechanical drawings, and this section for complete requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. EQUIPMENT LIST

1. Submit a complete list of equipment to be furnished, including product information for each item on the material list.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit a complete set of shop drawings prior to installation containing the following information: interconnect drawings showing all wiring and control connections; control panel details; arrangement of devices in panels; sequence of operation for all equipment; location of all control devices on scaled building plans; list of dampers with sizes and where used; and list of actuators with sizes and where used.

D. PROPOSAL LABELING

1. Submit list of proposed component labeling.

E. RECORD DRAWINGS

1. Record Drawings: See Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC.

F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. A list of spare parts and prices recommended for purchase by the City.

2. System description and complete sequence of operation.

3. Reduced size (11-inch x 17-inch) copies of record drawings.

4. Description of unique devices/controls/programs specific to this system.

G. SUBCONTRACTORS

1. See paragraph 1.5, B. below.

2. Submit name(s) of proposed subcontractor(s) who will perform control work and extent of the work they will perform and their qualifications.

3. Contractors doing sub-contracted control work are subject to approval by the City Engineer.



A. The entire control system shall be installed by skilled electricians and mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for the work they perform.

B. One (1) single contractor shall be responsible to design, furnish and install the complete Section 23 09 00 – Instrumentation and Controls systems.

1. Any subcontracted installation work shall be done by contractors experienced and qualified in the work they perform.

C. System shall be designed, programmed, and commissioned by local office personnel of approved contractors.

D. Control Cabinets: All electrical devices, relays, and DDC components shall be installed in protective covers (i.e. control cabinets), except that were installed concealed above ceilings a cover is not required.

1. Control cabinets exposed to outdoor weather shall be rated NEMA-4 enclosure.

E. Programming Point Names: Custom point naming is required on this project to match the City’s standard point naming scheme.

1. Coordinate with the City.

1.6 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Spare Parts: Contractor shall furnish the City with minimum of the following spare parts, of same type as used in this project:

B. Special Tools: Provide any special tools needed per Division 23 – HVAC.

1.7 WARRANTY AND SERVICE

A. WARRANTY

1. After completion of the installation of the control system and acceptance by the City, the system shall be warranted as free against defects in manufacturing, programming, workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of acceptance.

2. In addition, the system shall be warranted to provide the sequence of operation and basic features specified, with the accuracy and flexibility also specified.

3. The system shall be repaired or replaced, including materials and labor, if in the City’s reasonable opinion; the system is other than as warranted.

4. Preventive and emergency maintenance shall be included.

5. Timely repair of equipment during the warranty period is essential.

B. MODIFICATIONS

1. For DDC type systems, software and data shall be revised and updated as necessary to reflect system changes thereto during warranty period.

C. SERVICE

1. During the warranty period the contractor shall maintain a 24 hour emergency phone service and be able to respond by a trained and qualified Controls Engineer familiar with the installed system.

D. END OF WARRANTY SERVICE

1. At the end of the warranty period, the contractor shall provide a re-check of the entire system operation, including calibration testing of a sample number of components and providing any necessary control adjustments for proper system operation.

2. Such work shall be for a minimum of eight (8) man-hours.


PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Products shall comply with Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC, Paragraph 2.2, Manufacturers.

B. Control Accessories: Veris, Setra, Kreuter, ACI, Functional Devices, Idec, Hoffman, McDonnell, Tridelta, Edwards, Mamac, Penn, Belimo, Honeywell and manufacturers listed for Control Components.

C. Control Dampers: Ruskin, Greenheck.

D. Actuators: Belimo (No Substitute)

2.2 BASIC SYSTEM

A. SYSTEM TYPE

1. System shall provide complete stand-alone temperature control/monitoring.

B. COMMUNICATION NETWORK

1. Provide DDC communication control system as listed through Division 23.

2.3 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Shall be solid state electronic type with digital temperature display, employing a resistance type output, factory calibrated to within one-half degree F.

B. DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Shall be solid state electronic type, employing a resistance type output.

2. The sensor shall include a utility box and gasket to prevent air leakage and vibration noise.

3. For all mixed air and preheat air applications, install averaging duct sensors installed so as to sense a representative sample of the medium being controlled.

C. DUCT FREEZE PROTECTION SENSOR

1. Low temperature control thermostat, electric type manual reset, non-averaging 20-feet long sensing elements that switch whenever any 6-inch section or more of any portion senses a temperature as low as the thermostat setpoint.

2. Provide two (2) contacts, one hard-wired to stop fan and one for automation system.

D. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Shall be an RTD or electronic solid state device mounted in the outdoors where air flow occurs.

2. The temperature range shall be -20°F to 180°F.

3. Provide a sun shield and weatherproof assembly for mounting to 1/2-inch rigid conduit.

2.4 ACTUATORS

A. Actuators shall be Belimo heavy-duty reversible type, driving motor and gear train type.

1. Unit shall have a sealed case.

2. All actuators shall be proportional type.

3. Actuators shall have a built-in electro-mechanical system to provide for positive repeatability of position, regardless of changes in output load.

4. Actuators shall have a built in switch for reversing the direction of the actuator.


5. Spring return actuators shall have a manual positioning crank non-spring return actuators shall have a manual gear release handle.

6. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the rated torque and shall have a two (2) year manufacturer’s warranty.

B. Units shall be complete with all linkages, brackets, and hardware required for mounting and to allow for the proper control of the regulated damper or valve.

C. Actuator shall spring return upon power interruption (except not required at air terminal units).

1. Actuator shall "fail safe" in open or closed position as dictated by freeze, fire or temperature protection requirements.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Wiring and Conduit: Shall comply with Division 26 - Electrical specifications.

1. Wiring that performs code required life safety shutdown of equipment or fire alarm interface shall comply with NFPA and local codes for fire alarm system wiring.

2. All control wiring shall be run inside metal conduit to match Division 26 – Electrical Specifications.

B. Control Cabinet: Wall mounted, NEMA Type 1 construction (NEMA Type 4 for wetted areas or subject to outdoors), UL listed per 504 as a complete assembly, minimum 14 gauge sheet metal, hinged front door with latch.

1. Size as required to house controls.

2. Controls/devices shall be logically assembled in cabinet, with all devices and cabinet labeled.

C. Relays: Shall be rated for the application enclosed in a dust-proof enclosure.

1. Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million (1,000,000) operations.

2. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 milliseconds or less.

3. Relays should be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150% of rated coil voltage.

4. Relays shall have visual indication of on/off status

D. Miscellaneous Sensors/Transmitters/Switches/Transformers: Shall be manufacturer's standard, designed for application in commercial building HVAC control systems, compatible with other components so as to provide sequence of operation specified.

E. Interval Timer: 4 hour (unless specified longer) spring operated interval timer with wall plate indicating timer setting, and control knob.

1. Timers shall not have a permanent HOLD position.

F. Control Panel Lights: Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800H, push-to-test type, or approved.

2.6 SWITCHES

A. Air Flow Switches: General Purpose utilizing differential air pressure, SPDT snap-acting contacts, adjustable 0.1-inch W.C. to 2.0-inch (minimum), neoprene diaphragm, all aluminum construction.

B. Damper End Switches: Shall be momentary type limit switches for monitoring the motion of the damper at a prescribed arc of rotation.

1. The switch shall be hermetically sealed mercury contacts that operate by way of a trip lever.


2. The switch shall be mounted on the exterior of the duct so that the trip lever is aligned with the damper vane.

3. Mechanical adjustments in the switch case shall permit the proper lever action for tripping the mercury switch contacts.

4. The switch shall have a SPDT contact arrangement that exceeds the load requirements for both voltage and current.

C. Wall On/Off Switch: Standard wall box type switch, single pole, with illuminated switch for when controlled item is on.

1. Provide with stainless steel wall plate, labeled as to function.

2. Leviton or approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. Provide all software and hardware, operator input/output devices, sensors, relays, switches, dampers, actuators, conduit, tubing, wiring, motor starters and all other devices required to provide a complete Control System with the sequence of operation and basic system features as specified.

2. It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate with other trades for the installation of control devices in the systems installed by others.

B. THERMOSTATS

1. Room thermostats shall be mounted 4-feet - 6-inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise.

2. Thermostats shall connect to the HVAC unit serving the space the thermostat is located in, unless indicated otherwise.

3. Not all thermostats are shown on the drawings and those shown are preliminary only.

4. Contractor shall indicate all final thermostat locations on submittal drawings.

5. Contractor is responsible to coordinate locations to avoid chalkboards, tackboards, casework, and other interferences.

C. POWER

1. It shall be the responsibility of this contractor to provide power for all damper motors, time clocks, and other control devices requiring power. Unless noted otherwise

2. Power for controls may be obtained from dedicated circuits or circuits used to power mechanical equipment.

D. ELECTRICAL

1. Provide all electrical wiring and devices in accordance with applicable National, State and local codes and Division 26 - Electrical requirements.

2. All wiring shall be installed in conduit and in accordance with electrical section of these specifications.

3. Low voltage wiring within the ceiling plenum spaces may be open plenum rated cable. Unless noted otherwise either in Division 23 or Division 26.

4. Install all conduit and wiring parallel to building lines, in neat bundles, supported at not less than 5-foot intervals with screwed down bridal devices.

5. All controllers shall be mounted to structure.


E. COMPONENT LABELING

1. All control components, except regular room thermostats, shall be equipped with name plates to identify each control component.

2. Components in finished rooms shall be labeled as to generic item controlled for better user understanding; other devices shall be labeled with the same designation which appears on the Control Diagrams.

3. Contractor shall submit list of proposed labeling prior to installing.

4. Reference Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC.

5. Programming: Provide complete system totally programmed to provide all specified sequences, monitoring data, communications and features.

F. INTERLOCKS

1. Where required, may be accomplished by COS rather than field hard wired relays or other devices, except for: fire alarm shut-down of equipment.

G. THERMOSTAT SETPOINTS

1. Thermostat Setpoints (all adjustable) shall be as follows unless indicated otherwise:

2. Specialty areas require special temperature setpoint to be verified with the engineer.

Occupied Heating 68°F

Unoccupied Heating 45°F

Occupied Cooling 70°F

Unoccupied Cooling 90°F

3. Room thermostat setpoint adjustment shall be limited as to range of adjustment allowed (by physical restriction or by system software).

4. Range shall initially be plus/minus 3°F and shall be adjustable (with special tool or system password).

H. UNOCCUPIED MODE BYPASS SWITCH

1. Provide integral with each room sensor.

2. Provide additional ones as indicated on the plans and where room sensor is not accessible.

3. Bypass switch shall serve unit that supplies space in which bypass switch is located.

4. Activation of bypass switch shall put unit(s) bypassed into the occupied mode as well as all equipment interlocked with the bypassed units.

5. Bypass shall initially be for two (2) hours.

I. OA TEMPERATURE

1. Not applicable.

J. MOTOR STARTERS

1. Shall be by Division 26 - Electrical; except for loads 1/2 hp and less which shall have starting relays required by this section.

K. DEVICE DUCT INSTALLATION

1. All control devices installed in ductwork shall be positively anchored and attached to the ductwork by mechanical means (fasteners, straps, unistrut, etc).


L. COS

1. Provide one in each of the Building as noted on drawings; (See Section 23 81 26 Split System Mitsubishi City Multi).

2. Verify location shown on plans with the City prior to installation.

3. All necessary phone/Comm. outlets are by the City.

a. Locations to be City verified prior to installation.

b. Provide modems, routers, fiber converters, programming and accessories for communication between the building COS and the Owner's existing central COS.

M. SERVICE LOOP

1. Provide minimum of 6-inches extra wiring at all wiring terminations for ease of future maintenance/servicing.

2. Such extra wiring shall be neatly coiled/bundled to allow for uncoiling when the connected equipment is serviced.

P. Provide point-to-point checkout of complete control system to verify wiring continuity, proper terminations, signal integrity, and point addressing.

1. See Section 01900 – Commissioning General Requirements for additional work related to Commissioning.

3.2 MONITORING DATA

A. GENERAL

1. See each section in Division 23.

3.3 START-UP AND CITY INSTRUCTION

A. As each part of the systems become operational, this contractor shall calibrate all sensing and readout devices and shall test and observe the operation of each and every air moving and/or heating unit and shall adjust all controls so that the items function according to the intent of the specifications.

B. REPORT/STATEMENT

1. After making all necessary system testing and adjusting, the contractor shall submit a report to the engineer indicating all testing/adjustment work done and comment on how system is operating.

2. Such report shall be signed by an officer of the company and by the individual directly responsible for supervision of the installation of the control system.

3. When the contractor feels that the system is complete and ready for review by the engineer, contractor shall submit a written statement (signed by same individuals as for report) stating that the system is in compliance with the project requirements and ready for review.

4. Provide such report/statements for each phase of the project, as each area is completed.

C. INSTRUCTION

1. Upon completion of the work, the Control Contractor shall instruct operating personnel in the operation of the system.

2. Control Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) sessions of eight (8) hours of on-site training in the operation of the control system for the maintenance personnel and other employees (as deemed necessary by the administration).

3. Also provide to the City Engineer at his facility, a minimum of eight (8) hours instruction including an on-line system operational demonstration with the installed system.


4. Coordinate with the City for scheduling of sessions.

D. DOCUMENTATION

1. Contractor shall provide a hard copy documentation of the software application program for each stand-alone digital controller.

2. Documentation provided shall include block software flow chart showing the interconnection between each of the control algorithms and sequences for systems utilizing program listings.

3. A program listing shall be printed onto the same blueprint, along with the program flow chart, and description of the sequence of operation.

4. A hard copy of this document shall be stored and maintained in each stand-alone digital controller panel.

5. System acceptance shall not be completed until this documentation is provided and located in each panel.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. The products referenced in this section are to be commissioned per Section 01900 – Commissioning General Requirements.

1. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test, development, testing and documentation.

2. At a minimum, the contractor shall provide a documented and signed record to verify that all equipment and systems installed under this contract have been inspected and functionally tested to verify full compliance with the contract specifications.

3. In many cases, this shall require the contractor to create or otherwise provide procedures and checklists for approval by the Commissioning Consultant prior to the start of functional testing.

4. Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Agent.

PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

4.1 GENERAL

A. General: If not listed in Division 23, for equipment sequences of operation.

4.2 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS

1. Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ductwork Systems

B. Flexible Duct

1.2 RELATED WORK


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes: All duct dimensions shown are inside clear dimensions. Where inside duct lining is specified or indicated, duct dimensions are to the inside face of lining.

B. Gauges: Steel sheet and wire are U.S. Standard Gauge; aluminum sheet is Brown and Sharpe Gauge.


A. Fabricate and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA duct construction publications and ASHRAE handbooks.

B. Materials and installations shall comply with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and the IMC.

1.5 DUCT PRESSURE CLASS

A. As noted on plans (where not noted, construct to total static pressure (TSP) indicated for the fan that serves the ductwork.

1.6 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

B. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard

C. NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

D. NFPA 90B: Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

E. IMC: International Mechanical Code

PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. Sheet Metal: All domestic manufacturers.

C. Spin-in Fittings: General Environment Corp., Clevepak Corp.

D. Duct Sealant and Tape: Durkee-Atwood, Hardcast, Duro-Dyne, Benjamin Foster, Products Research and Chemical Corp.

E. Flexible Duct: ThermaFlex, Atco, Lamborn.

F. Acoustical Duct Lining: Johns-Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf.

G. Double Walled Aboveground Acoustical Ductwork: McGill Air Flow, LLC


2.2 GENERAL MATERIALS

A. DUCTS

1. Construct of galvanized sheet steel, suitable for lock forming without flaking or cracking, conforming to ASTM A527, having a zinc coating of 1.25-ounces total per square foot for both sides of a sheet, corresponding to coating designation G90 per ASTM A525.

B. FASTENERS

1. Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws are acceptable on low pressure ductwork only.

C. SPIN-IN FITTINGS

1. Factory fabricated of galvanized steel with die-formed mounting groove and damper.

2. General Environmental Model SM-1D.

D. DUCT SEALANT

1. Shall be fire resistant with a flame spread rating of 25 or less, and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Sealant shall also be water resistant and compatible with mating materials and types of joints or connections being sealed, specifically made for sealing ducts.

3. Exterior duct sealant shall be specifically intended for outdoor use as a duct sealant.

E. DUCT TAPE

1. Shall be fire resistant with a flame spread rating of 25 or less, and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Tape used shall be specifically compounded for maximum adhesion to galvanized steel, and shall be compatible with the duct sealant used.

2.3 DUCT FABRICATION

A. DUCT GAUGE AND REINFORCEMENT

1. Shall be as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards according to the pressure classification of the system and the duct dimensions.

B. JOINTS AND SEAMS

1. Construct in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Leakage shall be less than 5% of total system airflow.

2. Button punch or bolt connections in standing seams shall be spaced on centers not greater than 6-inches apart.

3. Coordinate joint spacing with duct reinforcement requirements so that transverse joints having the required stiffness may be incorporated in the reinforcement spacing schedule.

C. ELBOWS AND TEES

1. Shall be long-radius type with a center-line radius not less than 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct.

2. Where space does not permit the use of long-radius elbows, short-radius or square elbows with turning vanes shall be used.

D. TRANSITIONS

1. Increase duct sizes gradually.


2. Transitions for diverging air flow shall be made with each side pitched out not more than 20°.

3. Transitions for converging air flow shall be made with each side pitched in not more than 30°.

E. BRANCH CONNECTIONS

1. Duct take-offs from rectangular ductwork to round ductwork shall be made using spin-in fittings (unless a different fitting type is specifically shown).

2. Duct take-offs from rectangular duct to rectangular duct shall be as shown on the drawings and in compliance with SMACNA Standards.

F. DUCT MATE SYSTEMS

1. Ductmate Systems: Transverse duct joints may be made with Ductmate System, or approved equal. System shall consist of companion flanges of 20 gauge galvanized steel with an integral polymer mastic seal; corner pieces of 12 gauge G90 galvanized steel; 20 gauge G90 galvanized cleats; closed cell, high density gasket type; and galvanized carriage bolts with hex nuts.

2. The flanges shall be securely fastened to the duct walls using self-drilling screws, rivets or spot welding. Fastener spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the size of duct and the pressure class.

3. The raw duct ends shall be properly seated in the integral mastic seal. A continuous strip of gasket tape, size 1/4-inch x 3/4-inch, shall be installed between the mating flanges of the companion angles at each transverse joint; and the joint shall be made up using 3/8-inch diameter x 1-inch long plated bolts and nuts.

4. Galvanized drive-on or snap-on cleats shall be used at spacing as recommended by the manufacturer.

G. LINED DUCTWORK

1. Rectangular Ducts: Contractor Fabricated ductwork with internal duct lining (see Paragraph 2.4).

2. Round and Oval Ducts: Manufactured fabricated galvanized spiral ductwork based on SMACNA recommendations. Exposed ductwork and hidden ductwork as per drawing. Snap-lock type ductwork shall not be used unless approved by engineer.

I. EXPOSED DUCTWORK

1. All exposed ductwork shall be fabricated for best appearance. Dented, scratched, dirty or damaged ductwork will not be accepted. Duct sealant shall be installed with a clean-line appearance and no over coverage past the duct seam. The duct seam shall be pre-taped with painter’s tape to help keep a clean appearance after tape is removed.

2.4 DUCT LINING

A. MATERIAL

1. Flexible, inorganic glass fiber material, maximum thermal conductivity of 0.26 Btu-inch/hr-sq. ft.-degree F at 75°F, coated with an acrylic surface treatment to prevent erosion, factory applied edge coating; and conforming to SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard, ASTM C1071 (Type 1), NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2. Lining shall be 1-inch thick on ductwork within the building and 2-inch thick on ductwork exterior of the building. Manville "Permacote" Linacoustic.


B. ADHESIVES

1. Fire resistant, Type 1, conforming to the Standard for Adhesives for Duct Liner, ASC-A-7001C-1972, of the Adhesive and Sealant Council, as contained in the SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard.

C. MECHANICAL FASTENERS

1. Shall conform to the Mechanical Fasteners Standard, MF-1-1975, as contained in the SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install all ductwork and plenums in sizes and locations as shown on the drawings, complete with all accessories and connections to provide complete and operable heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and exhaust systems.

B. Ducts shall be installed level and in neat lines with the building construction.

C. All ducts are to be installed concealed unless indicated otherwise.

D. All rectangular duct elbows shall have turning valves.

E. Attach flexible duct to sheet metal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using draw bands to secure the duct; in addition, coat the inside of flexible duct at connection with duct sealant, and wrap duct tape over the insulation and vapor barrier at the connection.

F Apply a bead of duct sealant to all spin-in fittings where fitting seals against sheet metal duct.

G. Install flexible duct with a centerline turning radius not less than one duct diameter. Where this turning radius cannot be maintained with the flexible duct, sheet metal elbows shall be used.

H. All "Ductmate" and similar systems shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

I. Seal all joints with duct sealant. In addition to applying sealant to joints all joints and seams shall be taped over with minimum 3-inch wide duct tape. Such tape is not required on exposed ducts, but all joint corners shall have adhesive applied. Exposed ducts shall be neatly sealed to maintain good appearance. Painter’s tape shall be used to maintain clean sealed joint lines after tape has been removed.

J. Coordination: The Contractor shall fully coordinate the work of all trades to avoid interferences and conflicts. Due to the extremely tight ceiling spaces in portions of the building, the Contractor shall coordinate duct reinforcement spacing and supports with other trades as necessary to avoid interferences. In addition, the Contractor shall select duct gauge and reinforcement types to avoid interferences. Changes required due to lack of coordination between trades, improper spacing or selection of hangers, or improper duct gauge and reinforcement selection, shall be done at no additional cost to the owner.

3.2 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical duct lining in ducts to extent shown on drawings, covering all interior surfaces. See drawing notes for base bid lining, versus alternate bid using sound attenuators.

B. Installation shall comply with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standards and these specifications.


C. The duct liner shall be applied with 100% coverage of adhesive.

D. Horizontal Duct Runs: Tops of ducts over 12-inch wide and sides of duct over 16-inch high shall have liner additionally secured with mechanical fasteners.

E. Vertical Duct Runs: Any side of duct over 12-inch in size shall have liner additionally secured with mechanical fasteners.

F. Mechanical Fasteners shall be installed flush with the liner surface, and shall be spaced in accordance with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standards, Figure 5.

G. All joints, exposed edges and any damaged areas of the liner shall be heavily coated with fire resistant adhesive.

H. The liner shall be cut to assure tightly butted joints.

3.3 DUCT SERVICE PREPARATION

A. All new ducts shall be wiped or blown clean of all dust and debris prior to the installation of grilles or diffusers.

B. All plenums shall be vacuum cleaned of all dust and debris prior to system operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 31 14 – SLEEVES AND SEALS – HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct Sleeves

B. Duct Closure Collars




A. Shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Provide product data on all materials to be used.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Provide shop drawings showing proposed sleeving, closure collar, and fire sealing for all applications on this project.

1.4 REFERENCES

ASTM E814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

UL 1479 Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems

PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. Fire Seals: 3M, Dow Corning

2.2 DUCT SLEEVES

A. Size: Inside dimension of sleeves shall be at least 1/2-inch larger than the outside diameter of the duct or duct covering on all sides.

B. Ends: Sleeve ends shall be cut flush with finished surfaces.

C. Material – Non Structural: Sleeves shall be fabricated from 20 gauge galvanized steel, shall be continuous around the interior without holes or openings, and shall match the configuration of the item being sleeved.

D. Material - Structural: Sleeves through structural elements shall be fabricated from schedule 40 steel pipe (round openings) and welded steel supporting elements 3-inch x 3-inch x 3/8-inch steel angle with sizes/arrangements to suit openings for other openings.

2.3 DUCT CLOSURE COLLARS

A. General: Closure collars shall provide closure of openings between duct and opening in element penetrated and shall abut tight up to and overlap duct and shall consist of rolled angle material (for round ducts) and welded framed angles (for rectangular/round ducts).


B. Size: Closure collars shall be sized to match duct/opening applied to and shall have minimum 2-inch overlap on duct side and minimum 2-inch overlap at opening/penetrated element side and shall completely comer opening in element penetrated with minimum 1-inch overlap to undisturbed element (i.e., wall, floor, etc).

C. Material: Closure collars shall be fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel for ducts 15 inches diameter and less and shall be fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized steel duct for all larger ducts and all square and rectangular ducts.

2.4 SEALS

A. SEALS IN ABOVE GRADE INTERIOR FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES

1. Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and shall be UL classified per UL 1479 as a through-penetration fire stop device.

2. 3M Brand Fire Barrier Caulk, 3M Brand Fire Barrier, or 3M Brand Sealing Systems, or approved.

B. SEALS IN EXTERIOR WALLS AND FLOORS:

1. Silicone type sealant, designed for use with duct or pipe material involved as weatherproof sealant and as specified in Division 7.

2. Where flashing or similar weatherproof sealing/shielding is needed, such work shall comply with the 3rd Edition of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

C. SEALS IN BELOW GRADE MASONRY WALLS AND VAULTS

1. Ducts: Silicone type sealant, designed for use with duct material involved as weatherproof sealant and as specified in applicable Division 7 Specifications Section.

D. SEALS IN OTHER AREAS:

1. Packed fiberglass or wool insulation, where no weatherproofing or adhesive properties are required; otherwise, sealants shall be silicone type, as specified in applicable Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCT SLEEVES

A. Provide duct sleeves for ducts where duct passes through fire-rated floors, fire-rated walls, and fire-rated ceilings.

B. Round ducts larger than 15-inches in diameter, and square or rectangular ducts larger than 14-inches in any dimension, shall have framed openings where the duct passes through any element.

1. Such framed openings shall be of the same type as the structural materials used in the wall and shall comply with materials specified for this project.

C. Set sleeves plumb or level in proper position and location, tightly fitted into the work.

D. Fill openings around outside of duct sleeve with same material as surrounding construction, or with material of equivalent fire and smoke rating.

E. Sleeves are not required for penetrations through existing single solid elements, having no voids, at the location where the duct passes through the element (e.g., pre-cast concrete panels with pre-framed openings, core drilled/saw cut solid concrete, etc.).

1. Where any sleeve is required, such sleeve shall continue all the way through any solid items within that element however.


F. Insulation shall not run continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for use with insulated ducts.

G. Sleeves for fire dampers shall be as specified for fire dampers and be in compliance with the damper UL listing.

3.2 CLOSURE COLLARS

A. Closure collars shall be provided for all exposed ducts on each exposed penetration where the duct passes through any floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, partitions, and similar elements.

1. Ducts visible in mechanical rooms, (i.e., with fan coil units) are considered exposed and shall have closure collars.

B. Collar shall be installed tight against surfaces and shall fit snugly around the duct.

1. Provide silicon sealant where collar abuts to walls and ducts.

2. Duct insulation shall cover edge of collar that contacts duct.

C. Sharp edges of the collar around insulated duct shall be ground smooth to preclude tearing of puncturing the insulation covering of vapor barrier of insulated ducts.

D. Collars shall be anchored to element penetrated, with fasteners appropriate to material fastening to on maximum 4-inch centers.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SEALS

A. Provide seals around all piping and ducts passing through walls, floors, roofs, foundations, footings, grade beams, partitions, and similar elements.

B. Seals shall be of material and workmanship to maintain the fire and smoke rating of element being penetrated.

1. Seals ability to maintain the rating of the element being penetrated shall be listed in UL Laboratories Building Materials Directory or otherwise confirmed by an approved listing agency.

C. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to select the fire seals and methods to be used, and to submit shop drawings and technical data showing these proposed seals and systems and to obtain approval from the local code agency.

1. The contractor shall be responsible to submit any data as required by the local code agencies to satisfy them that the contractor's proposed fire seals are satisfactory.

2. Submit data showing local code agency approval.

D. Seals shall be watertight where the penetration may be exposed to water or moisture.

E. Penetrations through roof or exterior wall assemblies shall be provided with flashings for a weather tight assembly in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Such openings shall be sealed to be weatherproof.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manual Dampers

B. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers

C. Backdraft Dampers

D. Turning Vanes

E. Flexible Connections

F. Duct Access Doors

G. Building Access Doors

H. Control Dampers

I. Flange Connectors

J. Flexible ducts.

K. Duct Smoke Detectors




A. Construction and installation of all duct accessories shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1st Edition.


A. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals Procedures.

B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product information on all items to be used.

2. Submit cfm versus pressure drop curve for backdraft dampers.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1st Edition.

B. NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

C. UL 555S: Leakage Rated Dampers for use in Smoke Control Systems.

D. UL 555: Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

E. AMCA Standard 500-D: Outdoor Air Intakes, Exhaust, and Relief Leakage Rate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. Manual Damper Hardware: Duro-Dyne, Young Regulator Co., Ventfabrics Inc., Krueger, Titus, Anemostat.


C. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: Ruskin, National Controlled Air, American Warming and Ventilating, Air Balance, Greenheck

D. Backdraft Dampers: American Warming and Ventilating, Ruskin, Greenheck

E. Flexible Connections: Ventfabrics, Duro-Dyne.

F. Duct Access Doors: National Controlled Air, VentFabrics, United-McGill, Air Balance, Kees, Ruskin, Vent Products.

G. Building Access Doors: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Josam, Acudor, Elmdoor, Kees, J.L. Industries.

2.2 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Dampers shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, two gauges heavier than duct in which installed.

B. Maximum blade width is 12-inches; fabricate multi-blade dampers with opposed blade pattern for ducts larger than 12-inch x 48-inch.

C. Damper regulator sets shall have quadrant dial regulator with locking nut, square end bearing one (1) side, and spring round end bearing other side (small sizes) or open end square bearing (larger sizes), axis of blade the long dimension.

1. Regulator sets shall be Duro-Dyne Model numbers as follows:

Maximum Blade Dimension Duro-Dyne Regulator Set Shaft Size

10-inch and less KS-145, 145L 1/4-inch

11- to 14-inches KSR-195, 195L 3/8-inch

15- to 23-inches SRS-388, SB-138, KP105 3/8-inch

24-inches and larger SRS-128, SB-112, KP105 1/2-inch

D. Multiple blade dampers shall have individual quadrants for each blade or one quadrant with interconnected blades.

E. Flush-mounted concealed type damper quadrants shall have prime paint finish, and shall be Ventfabrics No. 666 or Young Regulator Co. No. 301.

F. Extractor Fittings: Krueger Model No. EX-88, with worm gear mechanism for adjustment through face of grille.

2.3 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Ruskin Model FSD36 (or equal) combination fire smoke damper, with blade and jamb seals, Class II (or better) leakage rated, listed per UL 555S and UL 555, with fusible link, factory installed actuators, and related accessories to operate properly and in accordance with code and listing requirements.

B. Actuator shall be for use with 120 volt AC power, UL 555S qualified, and shall be the fail close type (close upon loss of power).

C. Unit shall have a switch package to allow remote indication when the damper is in any position other than full open.

D. Auto reset control with remote indicator light with LED Green (open) Red (closed). With push-test button to close damper for visual inspections of operation. Mounted either in ceiling or 6-inches below the ceiling for ease of visual inspection and testing. Provided by Div. 23, Installed by Div. 16.


2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Note: Dampers not provided with equipment are to be by Mechanical Contractor.

B. MANUFACTURERS

Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

4. Duro Dyne Inc.

5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

7. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

8. M&I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd.

9. McGill AirFlow LLC.

10. METALAIRE, Inc.

11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.

12. Nailor Industries Inc.

13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

14. Ruskin Company.

15. TITUS.

16. Young Regulator Company.

C. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

D. FRAMES

1. Hat or Angle shaped.

2. Galvanized or Stainless-steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) thick.

3. Mitered corners.

E. BLADES

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8-inches (200-mm).

2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design.

3. Galvanized or Stainless steel.

4. 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) thick.

5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.

6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

F. BLADE AXLES

1. 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; galvanized steel, stainless steel or nonferrous metal; blade linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.


2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200F (minus 40 to plus 93 C).

G. BEARINGS

1. Oil-impregnated bronze.

2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axle’s full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.5 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Shall be metal blade type with gasketed edge seals.

1. Blades shall be made of 24 gauge aluminum.

2. Frames shall be constructed of 0.063-inch 6063-75 extruded aluminum.

B. Seals shall be felt or neoprene material; no noise or blade "chattering" will be accepted.

C. Bearings shall be self lubricated nylon.

D. Unit shall have adjustable counter-weights to allow adjustment of unit operation.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Turning vanes may be either contractor or factory fabricated.

B. Vanes and runners shall be fabricated of minimum 24 gauge galvanized.

C. Turning vanes shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. For duct widths less than 19-inches, vanes may be single wall construction; for widths greater than 19-inches, vanes shall be double wall "airfoil" type.

D. Turning vanes shall be equally spaced, parallel to each other, and securely attached to runners.

E. For elbows where the inlet and outlet dimensions are not the same, modify vane shape or angle to provide optimum turning.

2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. MANUFACTURERS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Material shall be a flexible glass fiber fabric with an inorganic elastomeric coating.

B. Material shall be flame retardant and comply with requirements of NFPA-90A.


2.9 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Access doors shall be of double wall construction, made with minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel, tight fitting, with sealing gasket, and cam locks (or may be hinged type with latches).

B. Access doors shall be of sufficient size so that items concealed in duct can be serviced and inspected, and shall be adequately sized to allow complete removal of the item being served (where removal cannot be made without disturbing fixed ductwork).

C. Doors shall be minimum 14-inches x 14-inches. Where duct size will not accommodate this size door, the doors shall be made as large as practicable.

D. Doors larger than 14-inches x 14-inches shall have a minimum of 4 cam locks (or where hinged type is used, have a minimum of two (2) latches).

E. Doors in insulated ducts shall be insulated type, with minimum 1-inch thick fiberglass insulation.

F. Round ducts shall use either lined rectangular tap off with insulated rectangular access door or curved insulated access door (for insulated duct); or curved type uninsulated access door (for uninsulated duct).

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).

3. Temperature Range: -10°F to plus 160°F (-23°F to plus 71°C).

4. Insulation R-value: Comply with Energy Code.

C. FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action or Nylon strap in sizes 3- through 18-inches (75- through 460-mm), to suit duct size.

2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

2.11 BUILDING ACCESS DOORS

A. Hinged lockable steel access door, for mounting on face of wall, with 10 gauge frame and 14 gauge door, concealed hinge, can and cylinder lock, and adjustable anchor straps.

1. Provide of 18-8 stainless steel construction with No. 4 finish where used in restrooms, locker rooms, kitchens, and similar "wet" areas.

2. Provide steel construction with prime coated finish in other areas.


a. Size shall be 12-inches x 12-inches (unless indicated otherwise) but shall be large enough to allow necessary access to item being served and sized to allow removal of the item (where access door is the only means of removal without disturbing fixed construction).

B. Fire Rating: Door shall maintain fire rating of element installed in; reference drawings for required rating.

C. Access doors shall all be keyed alike.

1. Provide two (2) keys for each door.

2.12 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS

A. MANUFACTURERS


1. System Sensor, Honeywell or approved equal.

B. Description: Low-Flow Photoelectric duct smoke detector with automatic reset. With broad band of air velocities from 100 to 4000 fpm, telescopic sample tube sized to fit ductwork, LED visual indicators, remote alarm outputs, With remote test station/annunciator either mounted in the HVAC control cabinet or other accessible location, operating voltage between 15-30 VDC, 24 VAC power supply voltage. Provide 24 volt power transformer if required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Dampers shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA requirements for volume dampers.

B. Install dampers at locations shown on the drawings, and at all other locations as required by the Balancer to allow for the balancing of the system.

C. Locate dampers at a point where the duct is accessible wherever possible.

D. Provide flush-mounted concealed type damper quadrants for ducts concealed in walls or non-removable ceilings and where a remote damper operator has been indicated.

E. Set and lock all dampers in the full open position prior to balancing.

3.2 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS AND FIRE DAMPERS

A. Install units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and their listing.

1. Provide duct access doors at each unit, and building access doors as necessary for access.

2. Locate access doors on corridor side of dampers where possible.

B. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: Connection of power and fire alarm interface shall be by Division 26 - Electrical.

1. Damper shall operate (close) upon a smoke detector alarm, unit shall restore to its normal position upon restoration of the alarm to normal.

2. The Contractor installing the dampers shall verify proper operation of each damper with the Division 26 - Electrical Contractor present.

3. Connection of switch package to remote indicating devices shall be per Division 23 – HVAC.


3.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide access doors to backdraft dampers, except that where damper is installed immediately behind a ceiling or wall grille, and is accessible by removing this grille; an access door is not required.

C. Adjust dampers' counterweights to give proper opening and closure.

1. Perform initial setting prior to balancing and then final setting when balancer is present.

2. Notify engineer when setting is occurring to allow witness of adjustments by engineer.

3.4 TURNING VANES

A. Install turning vanes in all square duct turns, and at locations shown on the drawings.

B. Securely attach turning vane runners to ductwork.

3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide flexible connections at all duct connections to fans, where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected, and where shown on the drawings.

B. For round ducts, the flexible material shall be secured by zinc-coated, iron clinch type draw bands.

C. For rectangular ducts, the flexible material shall be locked to metal collars which shall be connected to the duct using normal duct seam construction methods.

D. Install flexible connections with sufficient slack to permit 2-inches of horizontal or vertical movement of ducts or equipment at flexible connection point without stretching the flexible material.

E. Where installed exposed to outside weather, provide a galvanized "hat" channel protecting top and vertical stretches of flexible connector from sunlight and weather.

3.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide duct access doors at all automatic control dampers, fire/smoke dampers, duct control devices, filters, and any other components in the duct system that require service or inspection.

B. Provide duct access doors at all louver plenums, and at the top of all vertical duct runs that exceed then feet.

C. Access doors shall be of sufficient size and so located so that the concealed items may be serviced and inspected or completely removed and replaced.

3.7 BUILDING ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access doors in walls, floors, ceilings, etc. where needed to provide access to duct access doors, damper actuators, dampers, coils, fans, HVAC equipment and similar items.

B. Consult architectural drawings and coordinate location and installation of access doors with trades which are affected by the installation.

3.8 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Component provided and installed by Division 23 and all wiring by Division 26. Coordinate with Division 26 prior to installation.

B. Locate and mount duct smoke detector and sampling tube on all air handling units of greater than 2000 cfm capacity or as noted on the drawings.


1. Location shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations and IMC.

2. Provide additional duct work as required to maintain manufacturer’s installation requirements.

3. Division 23 shall install control voltage, unless noted otherwise, and shall be installed in electrical conduit based on Division 26 specifications.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

4. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 34 00 - HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ceiling Cabinet Fans

B. Sidewall Propeller Fans


A. Division 23 - Mechanical


A. Fans shall bear the AMCA certified seal unless indicated otherwise.


A. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals Procedures.

B. FAN CURVES

1. Submit fan curves showing SP vs. CFM and BHP vs. CFM with system operating point clearly marked.

C. SOUND POWER LEVEL DATA

1. Submit sound power level data showing sound power levels in decibels referenced to 10 watts for each of the eight octave bands (not required for fans under 1500 CFM). Submit sound power levels in sones for fans under 1500 CFM (or decibel values if available).

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Products shall comply with Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC, Paragraph 2.2 – Manufacturers.

B. Fans: Greenheck, Cook, or approved equal.

2.2 GENERAL

A. GUARDS

1. All belt drives shall be equipped with belt guards, or enclosed within fan casing.

2. Guards shall be factory fabricated and furnished with equipment, and comply with OSHA regulations.

3. Exposed openings into fan housings shall be protected with substantial metal screens or gratings.

B. MOTORS

1. Shall be UL listed and as specified in Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC.

2. Motors shall have adjustable supports for adjusting belt tension.

3. Provide explosion proof motors in accordance with NEC Class 1 group D standards where indicated on the drawings.

C. Drives: Shall be sized for not less than 150% of the rated motor horsepower.


D. ADJUSTABLE SHEAVES

1. All belt drive fans shall have adjustable sheaves.

2. Sheaves shall be selected so that they are at their midpoint at design conditions.

E. Capacity: Fan capacity shall not be less than the values listed in the Fan Schedule on the drawings.

F. Outlets and Inlets: Equipment shall be furnished with attachment angles and/or flanges as required for attaching ductwork flexible connections as shown on the drawings.

G. Fan Types: The type of each fan is indicated on the Fan Schedule, under the "Type" column, and corresponds to the types specified herein.

H. Fan Performance Ratings: Shall be based on laboratory tests conducted in accordance with AMCA Test Codes.

I. Fan Arrangement and Drive: Shall be as shown on the drawings.

J. Finish: All fans shall have factory applied enamel finish (manufacturer's standard color) over a rust inhibiting primer base coat (except not required on sidewall fans).

K. BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

1. Provide all exhaust fans with backdraft dampers, constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel, having felt or neoprene lined edges unless noted otherwise.

2. Backdraft dampers shall be gravity type unless indicated to be motorized type.

L. Weatherproof: Where installed exposed to weather, fans shall have weatherproof enclosure, preventing any wind driven water entry into unit or drive assembly.

2.3 CEILING CABINET FANS

A. TYPE

1. Centrifugal exhaust fan with grille, for mounting in ceiling or above the ceiling.

2. Greenheck Model SP or CSP or approved.

B. HOUSING

1. Shall be constructed of galvanized steel, with inlet and outlet duct connection collars, spring-loaded discharge backdraft damper, adjustable mounting brackets for wall or ceiling mounting, and minimum 1/2-inch - 1-1/2 lb/cubic foot density fiberglass duct liner insulation.

2. Fan shall have access panel allowing access to fan motor and scroll without disturbing fan housing, ductwork or wiring.

C. FAN WHEEL(S)

1. Unit shall have forward curved centrifugal type fan wheels(s).

2. Wheel(s) shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

3. Provide twin fan wheels when indicated on the fan schedule or where required to provide capacity indicated.

D. Drive: Fan shall be direct drive, with drive assembly mounted on vibration isolators.

E. ACCESSORIES

Provide the following accessories where indicated on the fan schedule or shown on the drawings:


1. Speed Controls: Solid state speed controller allowing speed reduction down to 50% of maximum.

2. Disconnect: Factory mounted on side of cabinet or within unit but so as to be accessible when unit is installed.

3. Interval Timer: 4 hour (unless specified longer) spring operated interval timer with wall plate indicating timer setting, and control knob.

a. Timers shall not have a permanent HOLD position

2.4 WALL MOUNTED PROPELLER FANS

A. TYPE

1. Sidewall Mounted Propeller Fans

2. Greenheck Series S or approved. See drawing schedules.

B. HOUSING

1. Shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless noted otherwise.

C. FAN WHEEL

1. Propeller shall be aluminum blade riveted to steel hub.

2. A standard square key and set screw or tapered bushing shall lock the propeller to the motor shaft.

3. Statically and dynamically balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-05.

4. The propeller and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency

D. ACCESSORIES

Provide the following accessories where indicated on the fan schedule or shown on the drawings:

1. Speed Controls: Solid state speed controller allowing speed reduction down to 50% of maximum.

2. Disconnect: NEMA-1 General Purpose unless noted otherwise. See drawing schedule. Provided by Division 23 installed by Division 26.

3. With: Wall Housing (long or short depending on installation), gravity back-draft damper (unless noted otherwise), OSHA motor side guard.

4. Interval Timer: 4 hour (unless specified longer) spring operated interval timer with wall plate indicating timer setting, and control knob.

a. Timers shall not have a permanent HOLD position

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans at locations as shown on the drawings and as best actual construction conditions allow. Allow proper fan access.

B. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

C. Fans with solid state speed controllers shall have the speed controller mounted on the fan housing unless another location is indicated on the drawings (controller is for use by balancer).


D. Check fans for correct rotation, adjust fan rpm to value shown on drawings, and lubricate bearings per manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Provide flexible connections in ductwork connections to all fans; except that internally spring isolated fans do not require a flexible connection.

F. Install all fans with vibration isolators so that no sound or vibration is transmitted to the structure. See Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment isolation specifications. If fans have internal spring isolators then no additional isolation is necessary. Fans installed on roof curbs do not require isolators unless noted otherwise.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Supply Outlets

B. Exhaust Inlets

C. Return Inlets

D. Louvers



1.3 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1st Edition


A. Shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals Procedures.

B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product information on all items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Products shall comply with Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC, Paragraph 2.2, Acceptable Manufacturers.

B. Diffusers, Grilles, Registers, and Louvers: Titus, Krueger, Price, Ruskin, Greenheck.


A. Air outlets shall be of the size, type, and with number of throws as shown on the drawings; and shall match the appearance and performance of the manufacturers' models specified and scheduled on the drawings.

B. Air outlet application shall be based on a noise level of NC 30 maximum.

C. Furnish all necessary screws, clips, duct collars, and transitions required to allow for the air outlet installation and connection to ductwork.

D. Finish: Factory enamel finish, color as selected by City Engineer.

E. FRAME STYLE

1. Provide air outlets and inlets with frame style to match ceiling or wall construction installed in.

2. Where installed against gypsum board surface, brick or similar hard surface or, where exposed, provide with 1-1/4-inch wide outer border.

3. Where space does not permit installing 2-feet x 2-feet metal panel, provide outlets or inlets with 1-1/4-inch wide outer border.

F. Where air outlets are installed adjacent to surface mounted light fixtures, outlets shall have 4-inch deep drop frames. (See reflected ceiling plan and/or electrical lighting plan for ceiling type and allowable space).


G. Ceiling transfer grilles (TG) shall be same as CEG's unless specifically shown otherwise; wall transfer grilles (WTG or TG) shall be same as WRG unless specifically shown otherwise.

2.3 SUPPLY AIR OUTLETS

A. CEILING DIFFUSER (CD)

1. Shall be of aluminum or steel modular core construction, have louver face and square neck (integral round neck is acceptable provided that performance equal to specified diffuser is provided).

2. Cores shall be easy snap-in/out core installation - with no tools required.

3. Provide with air flow grid to allow uniform airflow.

4. Damper: Heavy duty volume control damper (OBD) opposed blade damper operable through the face of the grille. Add were noted on drawings

5. Grids shall be comprised of a single set of extruded aluminum vanes set on 2/3" centers and tapered to a semi-air-foil shape for greater performance efficiency. Krueger Series 1240.

B. WALL SUPPLY GRILLE (WSG)

1. Shall be of aluminum or steel construction, double deflection type, with horizontal face bars and vertical rear bars.

2. Unit shall have outer frame borders 1-1/4-inch wide, gasket to prevent air leakage and minimize smudging.

3. Deflecting bars shall be rigid extruded aluminum of semi-air-foil design, on 3/4-inch centers.

4. Vertical and horizontal bars shall be adjustable.

5. Damper: Heavy duty volume control damper (OBD) opposed blade damper operable through the face of the grille. Add were noted on drawings.

6. Krueger Series 5880H or 880H.

2.4 RETURN AIR INLETS

A. Ceiling Return Grille (CRG): Aluminum construction, "cube-core" or "egg-crate" type, with 0.025" thick X 1/2" deep strips mechanically joined to form 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" cubes. With opposed blade dampers. Krueger Series EGC-5.

B. Ceiling Return Register (CRR): Same as CRG but without opposed blade damper.

C. Wall Return Grille (WRG): Shall be of aluminum or steel construction, with 35 degree angular horizontal face bars. Unit shall have outer frame border, 1/4" wide, gasketed to prevent air leakage and minimize smudging. Deflecting bars shall be rigid extruded aluminum of semi-air-foil design, on 3/4" centers. Krueger Model No. S580H or S80H.

D. Damper: Heavy duty volume control damper (OBD) opposed blade damper operable through the face of the grille. Add were noted on drawings.

2.5 EXHAUST AIR INLETS

A. Ceiling Exhaust Grille (CEG): Same as CRG.

B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER): Same as CEG but with opposed blade damper operable from face of register.


C. Damper: Heavy duty volume control damper (OBD) opposed blade damper operable through the face of the grille. Add were noted on drawings.

2.6 WALL LOUVERS (WL OR WL-A)

A. Type: Drainable stationary type. Ruskin Model ELF6375DX, ELF6375DXH or approved. As noted on drawings

B. Construction: Wall mounted aluminum construction with aluminum Insect screen. Flanged or standard frame construction to best suit installation application. Minimum free area of 57 percent or greater.

C. Size: Wall louvers shall be of size as shown on the drawings. In some locations the size may require special installation and custom sizing. The Contractor shall allow for this in their bidding.

D. Dampers: Heavy duty volume control damper (OBD) opposed blade damper operable through the face of the grille. Add were noted on drawings.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Screen: mesh constructed of either 0.051-inch aluminum wire or 19 gauge galvanized steel wire. Rated as Bug screen or Bird screen. Refer to drawing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air outlets in locations shown on the drawings and so as to conform to architectural features and lighting arrangements.

B. Paint ductwork, duct liner, turning vanes, liner attachments, air grids, and all visible items (includes fastening pins for duct lining) which are behind air inlets and outlets (including louvers) flat black.

C. All outlets/inlets and curbs exposed to the weather shall be adequately flashed and installed in a manner to assure complete weather profess. Sealing and caulking of all outlets and inlets exposed to the weather shall conform to best professional practices and appropriate standards.

D. Provide screened openings (SO) on all duct openings where indicated and where openings do not have grilles or registers.

E. Coordinate with the Division 9 Contractor for any necessary painting of air inlets/outlets/louvers/etc. prior to installation.

F. Where louvers require blanking off of unused area, use minimum 22 gauge sheet metal, painted flat black on louver side, and insulated on building side with 1-inch duct liner or similar equal rigid or fiberglass insulation. Tape off all raw edges of liner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 41 00 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air Filters

B. Temporary Air Inlet Filters



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product information on all products to be used.

2. Submit independent test lab data for all filters, showing air filter performance as tested per ASHRAE 52.2-1999.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999, Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter, Method of Testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Products shall comply with Section 23 05 00, Paragraph 2.1, Acceptable Manufacturers.

B. Filters: Farr, American Air Filter, Airguard.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Filter Types: Provide all air handling units with 30% efficient filters as specified herein. Unless noted otherwise.

B. Filter Performance: All filter performance specifications refer to filter test results when tested per ASHRAE 52-76.

2.3 MEDIUM EFFICIENCY

A. Type: Filters shall be medium efficiency, pleated panel type, disposable filters; Farr 30/30 or approved.

B. Efficiency/Arrestance: Filter media shall have a medium efficiency report valve of MERV 8.

C. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24-inches x 24-inches x 2-inches filter handling 2000 cfm shall not exceed 0.25-inch w.g.

D. Dust Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 170 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0-inch w.g.

E. Size: Filters shall be 2-inch deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes as required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings.

2.4 TEMPORARY AIR INLET FILTERS

A. Type: Glass fiber or synthetic material blanket type filter media.


B. Capacity: Shall have an average arrestance no less than 64%; dust holding capacity of 172 grams.

C. Size: Minimum 1-inch thick, cut to size as required to cover inlets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Filters: Contractor shall provide temporary sealing of all duct systems during the construction period to prevent the entry to dirt, dust and debris into the duct systems. See Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC.

B. Systems that are operated during the construction period shall have temporary filters installed over all inlets and filters installed in the air handling equipment. Filters installed in equipment shall be same type as final filters required for the units. Temporary air inlet type filters shall be taped over all inlets to completely filter all air drawn into the systems, and shall be laid in front of equipment filters as well. All duct systems carrying return or exhaust or relief air prior to dust generating work being complete, shall be vacuum cleaned by a professional duct cleaning contractor.

C. Filters must be in place and sealed properly before using fans.

D. Provide three (3) complete sets of all filters (Medium Efficiency Only). Store as directed by Owner. One set shall be placed in units at time of substantial completion. Other 2 sets are for future City use. All sets shall be clean and new, unused.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 81 26 – SPLIT SYSTEM – MITSUBISHI CITY MULTI

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRFZ (Variable Refrigerant Flow Zoning). (No Substitutes)

The R2-Series system shall consist of a PURY outdoor unit, BC (Branch Circuit) Controller, multiple indoor units, and M-NET DDC (Direct Digital Controls). Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be capable of operating in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups. System shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with no interruption to system operation. To ensure owner comfort, each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled and capable of changing mode automatically when zone temperature strays 1.8 degrees F from set point for ten minutes. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of outdoor rated capacity.


A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

C. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO).

D. All units must meet or exceed the 2010 Federal minimum efficiency requirements and the ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF systems. Efficiency shall be published in accordance with the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standard 1230.

E. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

1.4 CONTROLS

A. The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network of unitary built-in controllers with on-board communications and a web-based operator interface. A web controller with a network interface card shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface.

B. System controls and control components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

C. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start, night setback, request-based logic, and demand level adjustment of overall system capacity as specified in the sequence.

D. System shall provide direct and reverse-acting on and off algorithms based on an input condition or group conditions to cycle a binary output or multiple binary outputs.


E. Provide capability for future system expansion to include monitoring and use of occupant card access, lighting control and general equipment control.

F. System shall be capable of email generation for remote alarm annunciation.

G. Control system start-up shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in Mitsubishi controls system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of certification for Mitsubishi CMCN Essentials Training and/or CMCN Hands-On Training indicating successful completion of no more than two (2) years prior to system installation. This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals. This service shall be equipment and system count dependent and shall be a minimum of one (1) eight (8) hour period to be completed during normal working hours.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit a complete list of equipment to be furnished, including product information for each item on the material list.

C. Submit a complete set of shop drawings prior to installation containing the following information:

1. Interconnect drawings showing all wiring and control connections.

2. Control panel details.

3. Arrangement of devices in panels.

4. Sequence of operation for all equipment.

5. Location of all control devices on scaled building plans.

6. List of dampers with sizes and where used; and list of actuators with sizes and where used.

D. Record Drawings shall comply with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: In addition to the information required by that Section, provide (for inclusion in mechanical O&M Manual) the following:

1. System description and complete sequence of operation.

2. Reduced size (11" x 17") copies of record drawings.

3. Input/Output (I/O) summary forms for the system listing all connected analog and binary input and output functions and the number types of all points.

4. Description of unique devices/controls/programs specific to this system.

F. Sub Contractors: See paragraph 1.5, B. below.

1. Submit name(s) of proposed subcontractor(s) who will perform control work and extent of the work they will perform and their qualifications.

2. Contractors doing sub-contracted control work are subject to approval by the Engineer.


A. The entire control system shall be installed by skilled electricians and mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for the work they perform.

B. One (1) single contractor shall be responsible to design, furnish and install the complete Section 23 81 26.


1. Any subcontracted installation work shall be done by contractors experienced and qualified in the work they perform.

2. Prior to startup a Factory representative and Owner representative shall witness all pressure test of refrigerant piping per Manufacture’s recommendations.

3. Final startup and commissioning shall be completed by the Factory Manufacture’s Representatives. Owner shall be notified 48 hours in advance prior to final startup.

C. System shall be designed, programmed, and commissioned by local office personnel of Manufacture’s approved Contractors.

D. Control Cabinets: All electrical devices, relays, and DDC components shall be installed in protective covers (i.e. control cabinets), except that where installed concealed above ceilings a cover is not required.

E. Programming Point Names: Custom point naming is required on this project to match the Owner's standard point naming scheme.

1. Coordinate with Tacoma Power.

PART 2 WARRANTY

A. The units shall be covered by the manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The systems shall be:

1. Designed by a certified CITY MULTI Diamond Designer.

2. Installed by a contractor that has successfully completed the Mitsubishi Electric three day service course.

3. Verified with a completed commissioning report submitted to and approved by the Mitsubishi Electric Service Department.

B. Then the units shall be covered by an extended manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of five (10) years from date of installation.

C. In addition the compressor shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of seven (10) years from date of installation.

D. If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer (excluding labor).

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of thirty-three years of HVAC experience in the U.S. market.

2. All manufacturer technical and service manuals shall be readily available for download by any local contractor should emergency service be required. Registering and sign-in requirements which may delay emergency service reference are not allowed.

3. The CITY MULTI VRFZ system shall be installed by a contractor with extensive CITY MULTI install and service training. The mandatory contractor service and install training should be performed by the manufacturer.

2.1 MODIFICATIONS

A. For DDC type systems, software and data shall be revised and updated with latest version of software 1-month prior to final warranty closeout to reflect system changes thereto during warranty period.

B. Contractor to provide, free of charge, five (5) DDC software sequence modifications (no less than 40 hours of control technician's/programmer's time) as instructed by Tacoma Power and EEPROM changes as required.


2.2 SERVICES

A. During the warranty period the contractor shall maintain a 24 hour emergency phone service and be able to respond by a trained and qualified Controls Engineer familiar with the installed system.

B. For DDC type systems, the Controls Engineer shall be able to communicate with the system for purposes such as program algorithm alterations, program down-line loading, trouble-shooting, etc.; said response shall be within one day, with site visits (as necessary) in no less than three weekdays.

2.3 END OF WARRANTY SERVICE

A. At the end of the warranty period, the contractor shall provide a re-check of the entire system operation, including calibration testing of a sample number of components and providing any necessary control adjustments for proper system operation.

Such work shall be for a minimum of 8 man-hours.

PART 3 PRODUCTS

3.1 R2-SERIES L-GENERATION OUTDOOR UNIT

A. GENERAL

The contractor shall provide the latest series/generation of R-2 outdoor equipment available by the factory at the time of the bid. The contractor shall account for any added accessories or design changes and all cover all associated cost for these changes at the time of their bid. The contractor shall provide all new updates with clarifications at the time of the bid to notify the owner of these changes.

The R2-Series PURY outdoor unit shall be used specifically with CITY MULTI VRF components. The PURY outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. Each outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run tested at the factory.

1. The model nomenclature and unit requirements are shown below. All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kits shall be piped together in the field, without the need for equalizing line(s). If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to install additional lines shall be incurred by the contractor.

Outdoor Unit Model Nomenclature

208/230 Volt

Twinning Kit Model Number Units

PURY-P72TLMU (1) PURY-P72TLMU None

Outdoor Unit Model Nomenclature

460 Volt Twinning Kit

Model Number Units

PURY-P72YLMU (1) PURY-P72YLMU None


2. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 61 dB(A) individually or 64 dB(A) twinned. Units shall have a sound rating no higher than 51 dB(A) individually or 54 dB(A) twinned while in night mode operation. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet published sound levels shall be incurred by the contractor.

3. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the BC (Branch Circuit) Controller (Single or Main) shall be insulated in accordance with the installation manual.

4. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of installing the main refrigerant piping through the bottom of the unit.

5. There shall be no more than 3 branch circuit controllers connected to any one outdoor unit.

6. Outdoor unit shall be able to connect to up to 50 indoor units depending upon model.

7. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls.

8. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection.

9. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have total refrigerant tubing length of 1804-3100 feet. The greatest length is not to exceed 541 feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size changes or traps.

10. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating mode down to -4F ambient temperatures or cooling mode down to 23F ambient temperatures, without additional low ambient controls. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance shall be incurred by the contractor.

11. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in cooling mode down to -10F with optional manufacturer supplied low ambient kit.

12. Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be provided with predesigned control box rated for outdoor installation and capable of controlling kit operation automatically in all outdoor unit operation modes.

13. Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

14. Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be factory tested in low ambient temperature chamber to ensure operation. Factory performance testing data shall be available when requested.

15. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.

16. The outdoor unit shall be provided with a manufacturer supplied 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized snow /hail guard. The snow/hail guard protects the outdoor coil surfaces from hail damage and snow build-up in severe climates.

17. Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating more quickly. Partial defrost which may extend “no or reduced heating” periods shall not be allowed.

B. UNIT CABINET

1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished. Units cabinets shall be able to withstand 960 hours per ASTM B117 criteria for seacoast protected models (–BS models)


C. FAN

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG external static pressure, but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24 in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch.

2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed.

3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.

4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

5. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.

D. REFRIGERANT

1. R410A refrigerant shall be required for PURY-P-T/Y(S)KLU outdoor unit systems.

2. Polyolester (POE) oil shall be required. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using alternate oil types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison of hygroscopic properties for alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking alternate oil for approval at least two weeks prior to bidding.

E. COIL

1. The outdoor Hexicoil™ heat exchanger shall be of zinc coated aluminum construction with turbulating flat tube construction.

2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.

3. A stainless steel pipe connects the aluminum coil to copper piping.

4. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.

5. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor.

6. The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage.

F. COMPRESSOR

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor. Non inverter-driven compressors, which cause inrush current (demand charges) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be allowed.

2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s).

3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable with a turndown of 15%-5% of rated capacity, depending upon unit size.

4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.

5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

6. Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project.

G. CONTROLS

1. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of up to 8 levels of demand control for each refrigerant system

H. ELECTRICAL

1. The outdoor unit electrical power as noted on drawings.


2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz), 207-253V (230V/60Hz) or 414-506 volts.

3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.

4. The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS FOR R2-SERIES SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL

The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous heating and cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for heating or subcooled liquid refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for cooling. Refrigerant used for cooling must always be subcooled for optimal indoor unit LEV performance; alternate branch devices with no subcooling risk bubbles in liquid supplied to LEV and are not allowed.

The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R410A R2-Series systems. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity. The BC Controller shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4.

B. BC UNIT CABINET

1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.

2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves.

3. The unit shall house two tube-in-tube heat exchangers.

C. REFRIGERANT

1. R410A refrigerant shall be required.

D. REFRIGERANT BRANCHES

1. All BC Controller refrigerant pipe connections shall be brazed or flared.

E. REFRIGERANT VALVES

1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and up to three indoor units. Branches may be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH.

2. Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow.

3. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation.

4. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow.

F. INTEGRAL DRAIN PAN

1. An Integral resin drain pan and drain shall be provided


G. ELECTRICAL

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz.

2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 (230/60Hz).

3. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors

4. The control circuit between the indoor units and outdoor units shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

3.3 PKFY (WALL MOUNTED) INDOOR UNIT

A. GENERAL

The PKFY shall be a wall-mounted indoor unit section and shall have a modulating linear expansion device and a flat front. The PKFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit, or S-Series outdoor unit. The PKFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

B. INDOOR UNIT

The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

C. UNIT CABINET

1. All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the same white finish

2. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining shall be standard.

3. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall.

D. FAN

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one or two line-flow fan(s) direct driven by a single motor.

2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

3. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to right).

4. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution.

E. FILTER

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter.

F. COIL

1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.

2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.

3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.


5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

6. Both refrigerant lines to the PKFY indoor units shall be insulated in accordance with the installation manual.

G. ELECTRICAL

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.

2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz)

H. CONTROLS

1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 4 of this guide specification for details on controllers and other control options.

2. The unit shall be able to control external backup heat.

3. The unit shall have a factory built in receiver for wireless remote control

4. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required.

5. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F – 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point.

6. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

7. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

3.4 PLFY-P**NCMU-ER4 (4-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE) INDOOR UNIT

A. GENERAL

1. The PLFY-P**NCMU-ER4 shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

B. UNIT CABINET

1. The cabinet shall be a compact 22-7/16” wide x 22-7/16” deep so it will fit within a standard 24” square suspended ceiling grid.

2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake.

3. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow.

C. FAN

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor.


2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

3. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, Low, Mid, and High.

4. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow.

5. The auto air swing vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging up and down for uniform air distribution.

D. FILTER

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter.

E. COIL






6. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 19-3/4” inches above the condensate pan.

7. Both refrigerant lines to the PLFY indoor units shall be insulated in accordance with the installation manual.

F. ELECTRICAL


2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

G. CONTROLS

1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform functions necessary to operate the system.





3.5 PEFY-NMAU (CEILING-CONCEALED DUCTED) INDOOR UNIT

A. GENERAL

The PEFY shall be a ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling with a 2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and shall have a modulating linear expansion device.


The PEFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit, or S-Series outdoor unit. The PEFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4.

B. INDOOR UNIT

The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

C. UNIT CABINET

1. The unit shall be, ceiling-concealed, ducted.

2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake.

D. FAN

1. PEFY-NMAU models shall feature external static pressure settings from 0.14 to 0.60 in. WG.

2. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor.

3. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

4. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, High, Mid, and Low plus the Auto-Fan function

5. The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system.

E. FILTER

1. With: Optional return filter box (Series FBM) (rear or bottom placement) with 2” thick pleated MERV 13 high-efficiency filters.

F. COIL:






6. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil.

7. Both refrigerant lines to the PEFY indoor units shall be insulated in accordance with the installation manual.

G. ELECTRICAL


2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

H. CONTROLS

1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Refer to Part 5 of this guide specification for details on controllers and other control options.






3.6 LGH – LOSSNAY® ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR

A. GENERAL

The ERV unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, control circuit board and blowers with motors, filters, and insulated foam air guides. Each unit will have an automatic by-pass damper system for economic operation under certain conditions. The unit shall have factory installed control board with functions for local, remote, and optional control modes.

B. UNIT CABINET

1. The cabinet shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, and covered with polyurethane foam insulation as necessary with steel mounting points securely attached.

C. BLOWERS

1. The unit shall be furnished with two (2) [ LGH-F1200RX5-E = four (4) ] direct drive centrifugal blowers running simultaneously supplying and extracting air at the same rate for balanced ventilation air flow.

2. The blower motors shall be a directly connected to the blower wheels and have permanently lubricated bearings.

3. The blowers and motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.

D. HEAT EXCHANGER

1. The Lossnay® heat exchanger element shall be constructed of specially treated cellulous fiber membrane separated by corrugated layers to allow total heat (sensible and latent) energy recovery from the exhaust air to the supply air or from the supply air to the exhaust air as determined by design conditions.

2. The Lossnay® element shall have protective filters installed at both the supply and exhaust sides with an access cover to allow easy maintenance.

E. BYPASS DAMPER

1. The ERV shall have an automatic supply side by-pass damper to allow inbound ventilation air to by-pass the Lossnay® energy transfer core when outside weather conditions warrant.

2. The mechanism for opening and closing the bypass damper shall be a 208V-230V synchronous electric motor through an actuator. The motor will drive a steel cable connected to an mechanical damper flap to allow fresh air to bypass the Lossnay® element.

3. Supply and return air thermistor shall control the damper and may be interlocked with a Mitsubishi Electric PZ Series LCD remote controller.


F. FILTER

1. The ERV shall be equipped with factory installed air filters located at each intake face (both supply and exhaust sides) of the Lossnay® core to clean the air and prevent clogging.

G. MOUNTING

1. Mounting of the Lossnay® ERV shall be as indicated in the plans and drawings. The ERV shall not require and condensate pan or receptacle nor condensate drain or piping. Mounting may be horizontal or vertical and the unit may be inverted as required by ductwork connection.

H. ELECTRICAL

1. The units will require a 208-230Volt, 1 Phase, 60Hz power supply.

I. CONTROL

1. A 30vdc fuzzy logic signal generated by a CITY MULTI System via a 2 conductor non polar shielded, jacketed control wire to a PZ-60DR-E Mitsubishi Electric LCD remote controller or interlocked with a CITY MULTI indoor unit.

J. PERFORMANCE

1. The ERV units shall have the following nominal capacities:

Model Number Nominal Airflow External Static Capacity (In.

W.G.) at Nominal Airflow (208/230V)

LGH-F300RX5-E 300 CFM 0.60/0.78

1. The temperature recovery efficiency at extra low fan speed will be as follows:

Model Number Temperature Recovery

(208/230V) Enthalpic Recovery

(208/230V)

Heating Cooling

LGH-F300RX5-E 81/79% 79/77% 63/61%

Performance Certified to ARI Standard 1060

1. ERV operating sound level shall not exceed the following levels at maximum fan speed:

Model Number Sound Level dB(A) 59in Under

Center of Unit (208/230V)

LGH-F300RX5-E 34/37

K. DUCTWORK

1. The installer shall supply, install, test and commission all interconnecting ductwork for the Lossnay® ERV units.

2. Ductwork sizing, layout, fittings, etc. shall be in strict accordance with the design requirements.

3. The two outdoor ducts must be covered with heat insulating material in order to prevent condensation from forming.


4. The two outdoor ducts must be tilted at a gradient (1/30 or more) down toward the outdoor area from Lossnay® unit.

L. PREHEATER (FOR WINTER DESIGN TEMPERATURE LESS THAN 14°F)

1. A suitable pre-heater shall be supplied and installed to pre-heat and maintain the air entering the Lossnay® ERV to above 14°F.

2. The heater shall be sized to increase the temperature of the incoming supply air based on the heating (winter) design condition of the applicable site.

3. In the case where the outside air is mixed into the return air of a CITY MULTI indoor unit the pre-heater will be sized so that the mixed air temperature of return and ventilation air is always greater than 55°F.

4. The pre-heater shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

PART 4 – CONTROLS

4.1 OVERVIEW

A. GENERAL

The CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) shall be capable of supporting remote controllers, centralized controllers, an integrated web based interface, graphical user workstation, and system integration to Building Management Systems via BACnet® and LonWorks®.

4.2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. GENERAL

The CMCN shall operate at 30VDC. Controller power and communications shall be via a common non-polar communications bus.

B. WIRING

1. Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit.

2. Control wiring for the Smart ME remote controller shall be from the remote controller to the first associated indoor unit (TB-5) M-NET connection. The Smart ME remote controller shall be assigned an M-NET address.

3. Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers (centralized controllers and/or integrated web based interface), to the power supply.

4. The AE-200, centralized controller shall be capable of being networked with other AE-200, centralized controllers for centralized control.

C. WIRING TYPE

1. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire as defined by the Diamond System Builder output.

2. Network wiring shall be CAT-5 with RJ-45 connection.

4.3 CITY MULTI CONTROLS NETWORK

The CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) consists of remote controllers, centralized controllers, and/or integrated web based interface communicating over a high-speed communication bus.


The CITY MULTI Controls Network shall support operation monitoring, scheduling, occupancy, error email distribution, personal web browsers, tenant billing, online maintenance support, and integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) using either LonWorks® or BACnet® interfaces. The below figure illustrates a sample CMCN System Configuration.

CMCN System Configuration

4.4 CMCN: REMOTE CONTROLLERS

A. SMART ME REMOTE CONTROLLER (PAR-U01MEDU)

The Smart ME Remote Controller (PAR-U01MEDU) shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). The Smart ME Remote Controller shall be approximately 5.5” x 5” in size and white in color with an auto-timeout touch screen LCD display. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall support a selection from multiple languages (English, Spanish or French) for display information. The Smart ME supports temperature display selection of Fahrenheit or Celsius. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall control the following grouped operations: On/Off, Operation Mode (cool, heat, auto*, dry, fan and setback* (*R2/WR2-Series Simultaneous Heating and Cooling only)), temperature set point, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall support timer settings of on/off/temperature up to 8 times in a day in 5-minute increments. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall support an Auto Off timer. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall be able to limit the set temperature range from the Smart ME Remote Controller, or via a PC through a licensed EB-50GU. Also, the temperature range can be set from a touch screen panel on the TC-24. The room temperature shall be sensed at either the Smart ME Remote Controller or the Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor unit dipswitch setting. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall display a four-digit error code in the event of system abnormality or error.

The ME Remote Controller shall only be used in same group with other ME Remote Controllers with a maximum of two ME Remote Controllers per group.

The ME Remote Controller shall require manual addressing using rotary dial switch to the M-NET communication bus. The ME Remote Controller shall connect using two-wire, stranded, non-polar control wire to TB5 connection terminal on the indoor unit.


PAR-U01MEDU (Smart ME Remote Controller)

Item Description Operation Display

ON/OFF Run and stop operation for a single group Each Group

Each Group

Backlight Turns on when screen is touched. Timeout duration is adjustable.

Each Group

Each Group

Operation Mode

Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat/Setback. Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner unit. Auto and Setback mode are available for the R2/WR2-Series only.

Each Group

Each Group

Temperature Setting

Sets the temperature from 40°F – 95°F depending on operation mode and indoor unit. Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available depending on central controller and connected mechanical equipment.

Each Group

Each Group

Fan Speed Setting

Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Each Group

Each Group

Air Flow Direction Setting

Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor unit model.

Each Group

Each Group

Room Temp and Humidity Display

Displays the room temperature and humidity on the Home screen. Temperature and Humidity sensed can be calibrated using the sensor offset in 1 °F or 1% RH increments.

N/A Each Group

Occupancy Sensor

Detects occupancy using an infrared motion sensor. Occupancy status is indicated on the remote controller and through the web interface depending on connected equipment. Sensitivity is adjustable.

N/A Each Group

Brightness Sensor

Detects brightness in the space and indicates brightness on the remote controller and through the web browser interface depending on connected equipment. Sensitivity is adjustable.

N/A Each Group

Status Monitor

Displays the status of general equipment control points connected to the Advanced HVAC Controller (DC-A2IO)

N/A Each Group

Humidity Setting

Sets the relative humidity set point in 1% increments for any humidifier connected to the Advanced HVAC Controller (DC-A2IO)

Each Group

Each Group

LED Indicator

Can be set to indicate the operation status by lighting and flashing with different colors and brightness or by turning off to signal operation mode, stopped unit, error, occupancy, or home screen button pushes. Color can be set to indicate the current mode selected or room temp range being sensed. *Available colors include blue, light blue, yellow, white, green, red, and lime.

Each Group

Each Group

Schedule Set up to 8 operations per day, 7 days per week. Operations include time on/off, mode and room temperature set point.

Each Group

Each Group

Permit / Prohibit Local Operation

Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set temperature, Fan Speed, Air Direction, Reset filter).

*1: Operation icon lights up on the remote controller for prohibited functions.

N/A Each Group *1


PAR-U01MEDU (Smart ME Remote Controller)


Energy-Save control during vacancy

When vacancy is detected by the occupancy sensor 5 control options are available for selection: Stop/Setback Mode/Set Temperature Offset/Low Fan Speed/Thermo-off Brightness sensor can be used in conjunction with the occupancy sensor to increase accuracy.

Each Group

Each Group

Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed

N/A Each Unit

Test Run Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Each Group

Each Group

Ventilation Equipment

Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked system that has one LOSSNAY unit. LOSSNAY items that can be set are “Hi”, “Low”, and “Stop”. Ventilation mode switching is not available.

Each Group

Each Group

Set Temperature Range Limit

Set temperature range limit for auto, cool (drying) and heat modes.

Each Group

Each Group

Operation Lock Out Function

Locking of ON/OFF, Mode, Set Temp, Hold button and Air Direction.

Each Group

Each Group

Password User and Service password protections are available Each Group

N/A

Hold

Hold Prohibits the scheduled operation from being executed a. ON/OFF timer b. Auto-OFF timer c. Weekly timer d. Automatic return to the preset temperature

* While an operation is prohibited by Hold function, the operation icon lights up.

Each Group

Each Group

4.5 CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER (WEB-ENABLED)

A. AE-200 CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER

The AE-200A Centralized Controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of two hundred (200) indoor units across multiple CITY MULTI outdoor units with the use of three (3) AE-50A expansion controllers. The AE-200A Centralized Controller shall be approximately 11-5/32” x 7-55/64” x 2-17/32” in size and shall be powered with an integrated 100-240 VAC power supply. The AE-200A Centralized Controller shall support system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, night setback settings, free contact interlock configuration and malfunction monitoring. When being used alone without the expansion controllers, the AE-200A Centralized Controller shall have five basic operation controls which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a collection of indoor units (up to 50 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This basic set of operation controls for the AE-200 Centralized Controller shall include on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto (R2/WR2-Series only), dry, setback (R2/WR2-Series only) and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting.


Since the AE-200A provides centralized control it shall be able to enable or disable operation of local remote controllers. In terms of scheduling, the AE-200A Centralized Controller shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules (up to 24 scheduled events per day) with operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, air flow (vane) direction, fan speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers.

AE-200 (Centralized Controller)


ON/OFF Run and stop operation.

Each Block, Group or Collective

Each Group or Collective

Operation Mode

Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat. (Group of Lossnay unit: automatic ventilation/vent-heat/interchange/normal ventilation) Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner unit. Auto mode is available for the R2/WR2-Series only.


Each Group

Temperature Setting

Sets the temperature from 57°F – 87°F depending on operation mode and indoor unit.


Each Group

Fan Speed Setting

Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit.


Each Group

Air Flow Direction Setting

Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor unit model. *1. Louver cannot be set.

*1 Each Block, Group or Collective

Each Group

Schedule Operation

Annual/weekly/today schedule can be set for each group of air conditioning units. Optimized start setting is also available.

*1. The system follows either the current day, annual schedule, or weekly, which are in the descending order of overriding priority.

Twenty-four events can scheduled per day, including ON/OFF, Mode, Temperature Setting, Air Direction, Fan Speed and Operation Prohibition. Five types of weekly schedule (seasonal) can be set. Settable items depend on the functions that a given air conditioning unit supports.

*2 Each Block, Group or Collective

Each Group

Optimized Start

Unit starts 5 - 60 minutes before the scheduled time based on the operation data history in order to reach the scheduled temperature at the scheduled time.






Night Setback Setting

The function helps keep the indoor temperature in the temperature range while the units are stopped and during the time this function is effective.

Each Group

Each Group

Permit / Prohibit Local Operation

Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set temperature, Reset filter).

*3. Centrally Controlled is displayed on the remote controller for prohibited functions.


*3 Each Group

Room Temp

Displays the room temperature of the group. Space temperature displayed on the indoor unit icon on the touch screen interface.

N/A Each Group

Error

When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed

*4. When an error occurs, the LED flashes. The operation monitor screen shows the abnormal unit by flashing it. The error monitor screen shows the abnormal unit address, error code and source of detection. The error log monitor screen shows the time and date, the abnormal unit address, error code and source of detection

N/A

*4 Each Unit or Collective

Outdoor Unit Status

Compressor capacity percentage and system pressure (high and low) pressure (excludes S-Series)

Each ODU

Each ODU

Connected Unit Information

MNET addresses of all connected systems

Each IDU, ODU and BC

Each IDU, ODU and BC

Ventilation Equipment

This interlocked system settings can be performed by the master system controller. When setting the interlocked system, use the ventilation switch the free plan LOSSNAY settings between “Hi”, “Low” and “Stop”. When setting a group of only free plan LOSSNAY units, you can switch between “Normal ventilation”, “Interchange ventilation” and “Automatic ventilation”.

Each Group

Each Group

Multiple Language

Other than English, the following language can be chosen. Spanish, French, Japanese, Dutch, Italian, Russian, Chinese, and Portuguese are available.

N/A Collective




External Input / Output

By using accessory cables you can set and monitor the following. Input By level: “Batch start/stop”, “Batch emergency stop” By pulse: “batch start/stop”, “Enable/disable remote controller” Output: “start/stop”, “error/Normal”

*5. Requires the external I/O cables (PAC-YG10HA-E) sold separately.

*5 Collective

*5 Collective

All AE-200A Centralized Controllers shall be equipped with two RJ-45 Ethernet ports to support interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area Network (LAN) or to a network switch for IP communication to up to three AE-50A expansion controllers for display of up to two hundred (200) indoor units on the main AE-200A interface.

The AE-200A Centralized Controller shall be capable of performing initial settings via the high-resolution, backlit, color touch panel on the controller or via a PC browser using the initial settings.

Standard software functions shall be available so that the building manager can securely log into each AE-200A via the PC’s web browser to support operation monitoring, scheduling, error email, interlocking and online maintenance diagnostics. Additional optional software functions of personal browser for PCs and MACs and Tenant Billing shall be available but are not included. The Tenant Billing function shall require TG-2000 Integrated System software in conjunction with the Centralized Controllers.

4.6. CMCN: SYSTEM INTEGRATION

1. Onsite Personal PCs and Maintenance Tool

a. Contactor shall provide and install a desk mounted personal computer (PC) with adequate capabilities for operational control of the system listed by City Multi, 21” LCD monitor, uninterrupted power supply with 15 minute backup power)(UPS), software, software licensing, cabling and necessary routers for remote operations for the AE-200 Centralized Controller. Coordinate with engineer on location.

b. In Addition to the desktop personnel computer (PC), the contractor shall supply a laptop computer with adequate capabilities for remote operation with City Multi Maintenance tool software and Window 7. The laptop PC shall be provided with recommended operating systems listed by City Multi.

c. Contractor shall provide City Multi maintenance tool CMS-MNG converter to monitor system.

2. The CMCN shall be capable of supporting integration with Building Management Systems (BMS). Power Supply (PAC-SC51KUA) (If required)

4.7 STARTUP AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS

A. As each part of the systems become operational, this Contractor shall calibrate all sensing and readout devices and shall test and observe the operation of each and every air moving and/or heating unit and shall adjust all controls so that the items function according to the intent of the specifications.


B. Report/Statement: After making all necessary system testing and adjusting, the Contractor shall submit a report to the Engineer indicating all testing/adjustment work done and comment on how system is operating. Such report shall be signed by an officer of the company and by the individual directly responsible for supervision of the installation of the control system. When the Contractor feels that the system is complete and ready for review by the Engineer, Contractor shall submit a written statement (signed by same individuals as for report) stating that the system is in compliance with the project requirements and ready for review. Provide such report/statements for each phase of the project, as each area is completed.

C. Instruction: Upon completion of the work, the Control Contractor shall instruct operating personnel in the operation of the system. Control Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 sessions of 8 hours each of on-site training in the operation of the control system for the maintenance personnel and other employees (as deemed necessary by the administration).

Also provide to the Engineer at his facility, a minimum of 4 hours instruction including an on-line system operational demonstration with the installed system. Coordinate with Owner for scheduling of sessions.

D. Start-up Trend Logs: The Contractor shall submit to and review with the Engineer daily for a period of four weeks after substantial completion a hard copy log of the following:

E. Eight (8) owner selected room temperature values at 15 minute intervals.

F. Outside air temperature values at 15 minute intervals.

G. Documentation: Contractor shall provide a hard copy documentation of the software application program for each stand-alone digital controller. Documentation provided shall include block software flow chart showing the interconnection between each of the control algorithms and sequences for systems utilizing program listings. A program listing shall be printed onto the same blueprint, along with the program flow chart, and description of the sequence of operation. A hard copy of this document shall be stored and maintained in each stand-alone digital controller panel. System acceptance shall not be completed until this documentation is provided and located in each panel.

END OF SECTION

Section 23 83 00 Page 1 Specification No. PG10-0473F

SECTION 23 83 00 - HEATING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electric Duct Heaters

B. Electric Infrared Radiant Heaters

C. Electric Unit Heaters


A. Division 22 - Plumbing

B. Division 26 - Electrical

PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. Duct Heaters: Tutco, Indeeco, Warren, Dell Corp

C. Electric Infrared Radiant Heaters: Q-Mark, Marley

D. Electric Unit Heater: Q-Mark, Marley

2.2 GENERAL

A. Size and Capacity: Shall be as listed on the drawings.

B. Type and Manufacturer: As shown on the drawings.

C. Listing: All heaters shall be UL listed.

D. Shall have minimum one year warranty.

2.3 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

A. Type: Open coil type electric duct heaters; of size and capacity as shown on the drawings.

B. Listing: Heaters shall be UL listed for zero clearance to combustibles, and shall be built to meet all requirements of the National Electric Code and NFPA.

C. CONSTRUCTION

1. Heating coils shall be made of 80% nickel and 20% chromium coiled resistance wire.

2. Coils shall be supported in an aluminized steel frame and insulated by floating ceramic bushings.

3. Heaters shall be of the configuration to suit the application as shown on the drawings.

D. OVER-TEMPERATURE PROTECTION

1. All heaters shall be equipped with primary and secondary over-temperature safety devices.

2. The primary safety device shall be a disc or liquid filled bulb type with automatic reset.


3. The secondary device shall be a disc type with manual reset, wired in series with each heater stage, set to trip at a higher temperature than the primary safety device.

E. OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION

1. Fuses shall be provided for over-current protection.

2. Fuse capacities shall be rated for at least 125% of the circuit amperage.

F. PROOF OF AIR FLOW

1. Heaters shall be furnished with a differential air pressure switch and sensing tube (or sail flow switch), interlocked with the heater so as to prevent heater operation in case of insufficient airflow across the coil.

2. Where used on the suction side of fans, provide a sail type air flow switch or high sensitive airflow switch to allow proper operation even at fan low speed operations.

3. Configure air flow switch (or sail switch) for proper operation as the application requires.

4. Where air flow switch is used on suction side of fans, configure sensor to measure static pressure only.

G. TERMINAL BOX

1. All heater controls shall be mounted in a side mounted terminal box, unless a separate remote mounted terminal box is shown on the drawings.

2. Terminal box shall be insulated from the heater casing.

H. DISCONNECT

1. Heaters shall be provided with a built-in power disconnect switch, having a terminal door interlock.

I. CONTROLS

1. Heaters shall be furnished with 24 volt transformer and shall be for use with 24 volt controls unless indicated otherwise.

2. Transformer shall have secondary fusing, and transformers which are not Class 2 shall have primary fusing.

3. SCR with DDC interface used for controlling heater stages. Heater shall be furnished with a solid state proportional power controller allowing modulation of heater capacity from 0% to 100% of full capacity.

a. The SCR control shall energize the heater only for the number of AC cycles necessary to produce the amount of heat required.

b. For heaters with loads greater than 90 amps SCR control combined with a step controller in a vernier configuration (still providing full proportional control) is acceptable. (Backup or safety contactors - where used - shall be magnetic type).

J. ELECTRICAL

1. Heaters shall be for use with electricity of the voltage and phases indicated, and provide the output and number of control stages indicated.

2. Three (3) phase heaters shall have equal balanced three (3) phase circuits.

3. Heater element circuits shall be subdivided so that no circuit load exceeds 48 amperes.

4. All internal wiring shall be suitable for 220°F.


2.4 ELECTRIC INFRARED HEATERS

A. TYPE

1. Heavy duty – low watt density industrial infrared heater of size and capacity as shown on the drawings.

B. CONSTRUCTION

1. Aluminum extruded housing with highly polished aluminum focal point reflector.

2. Element connected to a gasketed, moisture resistant terminal enclosure.

3. Heater to have to ability to be washed down provided the heater is disconnected from power supply.

C. ACCESSORIES

1. Wire-face guard.

2. Independent variable temperature controller heat adjustment from 0%-100% of heater capacity, Solid state construction, short circuit protection, no thermal de-rating.

a. Payne Model 18TBP rated to meet heater capacity or approved equal. Supplied and installed by Division

D. CONTROLS

1. Division 26 to provide a central control station to control each radiant heater. Location to be coordinated with owner.

2. Each unit to be controlled by interval timer located on the central control station. Provided and installed by Division 26.

3. Multiple units to be controlled by single variable temperature control located on the central control station. By Division 26.

2.5 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

A. Type: Wall and ceiling mounted electric forced air unit heater.

B. CONSTRUCTION

1. Exposed sheet metal shall be constructed of heavy gauge die-formed steel housing with advanced pull-through air flow design. Individually adjustable discharge louvers to control air flow. The heater shall meet UL, NEC and OSHA requirements.

2. For wall or ceiling hung installation as shown on the drawings (see wall type on Architectural plans).

3. Unit shall have baked-on enamel finish two toned smartly styled.

C. Heating Elements: Unit shall have aluminum-finned, copper clad steel sheath heating elements for long life use.

D. Motor and Fan: Motor shall be shaded pole, heavy duty, total enclosed, permanently lubricated type.

E. ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS

1. Unit shall have automatic reset thermal cut-out to provide protection over the entire length of the element.

2. Provide with 24V control transformer to allow for low voltage thermostat interface.


3. Provide automatic fan delay to keep fan running after element is off to discharge residual heat.

4. Provide low voltage transformer as required for unit operations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. RADIANT HEATERS

1. 4-hour interval timer with variable temperature controller to meet manufacture’s installation instructions of heaters. Custom Shop fabricated NEMA 4 control panel to operate each heater individually.

B. ELECTRIC DUCT MOUNTED HEATERS

1. Refer to Section 23 09 00 – Instrumentation and Control.

2. Interlock duct mounted heaters with associated supply fan to operate at the same time.

3. Verify manufacture’s installation instructions of heaters.

a. Verify configurations, required clearances and locations prior to ordering and installing heaters.

C. ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

1. Controlled by low voltage thermostat. Mounted at the unit or mounted on the wall. Refer to drawings for locations.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items are specified in other sections but are subject to the general requirements of this section. The electrical drawings and schedules are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations.

B. This section covers the furnishing and installation of equipment and materials, including: 600V or less power and lighting panels, dry type transformers, lighting, conduit, wiring, and terminations for electrical equipment.

C. This section covers the installation and interconnection of electrical equipment specified under other sections, except electrical items designated to be installed under those sections.


SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTAL AND SHOP DRAWING PROCEDURES

SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01600 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT




SECTION 26 05 83 – ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 26 24 23 – 600VOLT CLASS MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


SECTION 26 29 24 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

SECTION 27 10 00 – BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

SECTOPM 40 61 11 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM


A. All work shall be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with the NEC - National Electrical Code, the NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, and the following standards where applicable:

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

AWG American Wire Gauge

Fed Spec Federal Specification

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

NEIS National Electrical Installation Standards


NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories

B. Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed for the purpose for which they are to be used, by an independent testing agency. Two such organizations are Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Independent testing agency shall be acceptable to the inspection authority having jurisdiction.

When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority to undergo inspection and testing at the manufacturer's place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price. Before the inspection is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the inspection procedure to be used.

Jurisdiction for this project is the City of Tacoma. Contractor shall verify that equipment provided is in conformance with the listing guidelines per City of Tacoma, Electrical Inspection Department. Contractor shall verify that equipment provided is in conformance with the listing guidelines per City of Tacoma requirements.


A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 - Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

1. Submittal for this section shall include a copy of specification section, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole.

If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The number in the margin shall refer a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The City shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Each submittal covered under Division 26 shall be thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor responsible for Division 26 work. The Contractor shall provide review comments attached to the submittal identifying compliance or non-compliance with the Division 26 specification section, confirming that he has verified that submittals meet specified requirements. Submittals shall be partitioned by specification section unless otherwise approved by the City.

3. Submittal information shall be manufacturer's catalog descriptive literature with identifying arrows pointing to the specific equipment, devices, and materials to be supplied. Catalog information shall include technical specifications and application information, including NEMA and electrical ratings, range, weight, accuracy, etc. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which apply and include all information as described below.


C. SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION

1. Information covering all materials and equipment shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Section 01300 – Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment as follows:

a. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the specification paragraph for which the equipment applies.

b. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out.

c. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and materials descriptive literature with the Drawings or Specifications.

D. SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA

1. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the work performed by the Contractor, shall be submitted in accordance with the Section 01300 Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following with additional requirements as provided by equipment type below as applicable:

a. Drawings and data.

b. Nameplate legends.

c. Bill of Materials.

d. Anchoring details.

e. Samples.

2. Conduit

a. Contractor shall furnish a submittal for all types of conduit to be provided. The submittal shall include the manufacturer and type, and sufficient data to indicate that the conduit meets the specified requirements.

3. Wiring Devices

a. Submittal for all types of wiring devices to be provided shall include the manufacturer and type and location used and sufficient data to indicate that the device meets the specified requirements. Devices include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Conduit boxes and fittings.

2) Device Plates.

3) Wall Switches.

4) Receptacles.

4. Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes and Wiring Gutters

a. Submittal for all types of junction boxes, pull boxes and gutters to be provided shall include the manufacturer and type and location used and sufficient data to indicate that the device meets the specified requirements. A list shall be submitted, in addition to manufacturer specifications, that lists all junction boxes, pull boxes, and wiring gutters with manufacturer and part number.

5. Light Fixtures

a. Light fixture descriptive sheets shall show the fixture schedule letter, number, or symbol for which the sheet applies.


6. Lighting and Power Panels

a. Submittal for all lighting and power panels to be provided shall include sufficient data, and drawings to indicate that the panel meets specified requirements.

7. Surge Protective Devices

a. Surge protective device submittals shall include drawings (including unit dimensions, weights, component and connection locations, mounting provisions, and wiring diagrams), equipment manuals that detail the installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the specified unit(s), and manufacturer’s descriptive bulletins and product sheets.

8. Control Stations

a. Control station submittals shall include drawings with unit dimensions, component and connection locations, and mounting provisions, wiring diagrams, descriptive bulletins and product sheets. Drawings shall be submitted for each control station as required for the project.

9. Disconnect Switches

a. Submittal for all disconnect switches to be provided shall include sufficient data, and drawings to indicate that the disconnect switch meets specified requirements. Applicable fusing data shall be included with the submittal. A list shall be submitted, in addition to manufacturer specifications, that lists all disconnect switches with manufacturer and part number.

10. Transformers

a. Submittal for all transformers to be provided shall include sufficient data, and drawings to indicate that the transformer meets specified requirements.

F. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE WARRANTY

1. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum Five Year Limited Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions.

G. RECORD DOCUMENTS

1. Contract documents shall be maintained and annotated by the Contractor during construction, including all record drawings.

H. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS

1. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Manufacturer's cut sheets, data sheets, specifications, user manuals, installation manuals, and maintenance manuals for all products included in the specification section.

b. Schematics, wiring diagrams, and panel drawings in conformance with construction record.

c. Model numbers and up-to-date cost data for all spare parts.

d. Troubleshooting procedures, with a cross-reference between symptoms and corrective recommendations.

2. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered.


3. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be organized with page numbers and table of contents. Furthermore, the O&M manuals shall include section title pages for each section that states what is included in the section. All cutsheets, manuals, and general product literature shall include a label specifiying what product it is applicable to.

1.5 GENERAL

A. Electrical apparatus on all equipment shall be installed complete and placed in readiness for proper operation.

B. Electrical materials furnished and installed under this section of the contract shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are approved by the City.

C. SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. Seismic design requirements for products specified in this contract shall be as indicated on the structural drawings.

D. COORDINATION

1. Electrical work shall conform to the construction schedule and the progress of other trades. Contractor shall ensure all critical path items and submittals for the Division 26 equipment are included in the overall construction schedule as required by Section 01040, paragraph 1.12 Construction Progress Schedules.

2. When manufacturer's field services are provided by the equipment manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment manufacturer. Contractor shall give the City written notice at least fourteen (14) days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services furnished by others.

3. Contractor shall review equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria.

E. ANCHOR BOLTS AND EXPANSION ANCHORS

1. All anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and expansion anchors shall comply with Anchorage in Division 3 - Concrete, except that smaller than 3/4 inch fasteners will be permitted to match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and electrical equipment.

F. DRAWING DEFINITIONS

1. ELEMENTARY OR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts.

2. ONE-LINE DIAGRAM: A one-line diagram shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded.

3. BLOCK DIAGRAM: A block diagram is a diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines.


4. WIRING OR CONNECTION DIAGRAM: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram.

5. INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM: Interconnection diagrams shall show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors and auxiliary devices. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection diagrams. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable.

Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical. All devices and equipment shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with individual terminal identification.

All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on the interconnection diagram. Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown. Spare wires and cables shall be shown.

6. ARRANGEMENT, LAYOUT, AND/OR OUTLINE DRAWINGS: An arrangement, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made.Supplementing this section, the Drawings indicate locations of equipment and enclosures and provide one line and schematic diagrams regarding the connection and interaction with other equipment. A partial drawing list is provided in the References paragraph above.

1.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. CONDUIT

1. Conduits in manholes, handholes, building entrance pull boxes, junction boxes, and equipment shall be provided with identification tags. Identification tags shall be 19 gage stainless steel, with 1/2 inch stamped letters and numbers as indicated on the Drawings. Identification tags shall be attached to conduits with nylon tie wraps and shall be positioned to be readily visible.

B. CONDUCTORS

1. All conductors in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be identified and color coded as described herein.

2. Conductor Identification Number. Except for lighting and receptacle circuits, each individual conductor in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with wire identification markers at the point of termination.

a. The wire markers shall be heat shrink type, printed, Brady IDXPERT Series PermaSleeve, XPS-250-1.

b. The wire numbers shall be as indicated on the Drawings. If a wire does not appear on the Drawings the wire number shall be as indicated on equipment manufacturer's drawings or any interconnection drawings.


c. Conductor labels shall be provided at each end of the wire termination. The label shall show both wire destination locations on each termination.

For example: for a wire that runs between terminal TA-1 and terminal CB1-2 in a common piece of equipment, a wire label would be placed at the connection at TA-1 and at CB1-2 and should read as follows (the order is not important):

TA1

CB1-2

Each conductor requires two (2) identical labels. These labels will allow a person to know where the termination points are when looking at either end of the wire. The wire labels shall be clearly visible.

d. Cable terminations shall be marked similarly as the conductors. For example, the label for Cable #3369, conductor #1 to terminal TA-1 should read as follows:

3369-1

TA-1

e. All wire marker labels shall be wipe resistant, polyolefin material that can withstand ambient temperatures from -50 degrees C to 130 degrees C.

f. The wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection.

3. Conductor Color Coding. Power conductors shall be color coded as indicated below. For conductors #6 AWG and smaller, the color coding shall be the insulation finish color. For sizes larger than #6 AWG, the color coding may be by marking tape. The equipment grounding conductor shall be green or green with one or more yellow stripes if the conductor is insulated.

a. The following color coding system shall be used:

120/240V, single-phase black, red, and white

120/208V, three-phase black, red, blue, and white

120/240V, three-phase black, orange, blue, and white

277/480V, three-phase brown, orange, yellow, and gray

b. Where 120/240 and 120/208 volt systems share the same conduit or enclosure, the neutral for either the 120/240 volt system or the 208 volt system shall be white with a permanent identifiable violet stripe.

c. Control and instrumentation circuit conductors shall be color coded as indicated in Section 26 05 19 – Conductors and Cables.

C. MOTOR STARTERS

1. All motor starters shall have front cover mounted permanent nameplates that include type, manufacturer's name and catalog number, and horsepower rating. An additional nameplate, engraved or etched, laminated black over white plastic with 1/8 inch letters shall be provided to identify the equipment tag number and equipment description. Both nameplates shall be securely fastened to the enclosure.

D. CONTROL STATIONS

1. Control stations shall be provided with nameplates identifying the related equipment. Pilot controls and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends ("start", "stop", etc.) as indicated on the Drawings.


Nameplates shall be laminated black over white plastic, with 1/8 inch engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the control stations.

E. PANELS AND DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1. All lighting and distribution panels shall be provided with nameplates, which include panel name and voltage. Nameplates shall be laminated black over white plastic with 3/8 inch engraved letters and shall be securely fastened to the panel exterior.

2. Circuit breakers shall be provided with nameplates identifying related equipment. Nameplates shall be laminated black over white plastic with 1/8 inch engraved letters and shall be securely fastened to the circuit breakers.

F. DISCONNECT SWITCHES

1. All switches shall have front cover mounted permanent nameplates that include switch type, manufacturer's name and catalog number, and horsepower rating. An additional nameplate, engraved or etched, laminated black over white plastic with 1/8 inch letters shall be provided to identify the equipment tag number and equipment description of both the power source and the load equipment. Both nameplates shall be securely fastened to the enclosure. Refer to NEC Article 110.22 for Identification of Disconnecting Means installation criteria.

G. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

1. All junction and pull boxes shall have clearly visible nameplates, securely attached and suitable for environment in which the box is installed. Nameplates shall have box tag number.

H. ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS

1. Lighting panels, power panels, power centers, meter socket enclosures, disconnect switches, industrial control panels, variable frequency drives, and combination motor starters shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed to meet the City’s standard for content as shown below and in accordance with ANSI Z535.



A. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected by Contractor in accordance with Section 01600 Material and Equipment, and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Equipment shall be protected by Contractor against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on earth or grass surfaces or come into contact with earth or grass. Contractor shall keep the equipment clean and dry at all times. Openings shall be plugged or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) during temporary storage.

B. Equipment and materials to be located indoors shall be stored indoors and sealed with plastic film wrap.

C. Electrical insulation on all electrical equipment shall be protected against absorption of moisture, and metallic components shall be protected against corrosion by strip heaters, lamps, or other suitable means. This protection shall be provided immediately upon receipt of the equipment and shall be maintained continuously.

D. Electrical equipment shall be moved by lifting, jacking, or skidding on rollers as described in the manufacturer's instructions. Special lifting harness or apparatus shall be used when required. Lifting and jacking points shall be used when identified on the equipment. Contractor shall have required unloading equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. As listed in sub-paragraphs herein.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Substitutions shall comply with specified requirements.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

See Section 26 05 19.

2.3 CONDUIT

A. Conduit and raceways shall be as described in the following paragraphs:

B. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

1. Rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall, hot-dip galvanized, shall conform to ANSI C80.1, and shall be manufactured in accordance with UL 6.


C. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be hot dip galvanized steel, shall be covered with a moisture proof polyvinyl chloride jacket, and shall be UL labelled.

D. RIGID NONMETALLIC (PVC) CONDUIT

1. PVC conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40, UL labelled for aboveground and underground uses, and shall conform to NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.

2. Under roadways, PVC conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 80, UL labelled for aboveground and underground uses, and shall conform to NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.

F. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

1. EMT shall be hot-dip galvanized, shall conform to ANSI C80.3, and shall be manufactured in accordance with UL 797. EMT shall be used only for interior concealed conduits inside finished walls and ceilings.

2.4 CABLE TRAY

A. Cable trays, fittings, and supports shall be manufactured by CPI Chatsworth. Part number and quantities are shown on contract drawings.

2.5 WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS

A. Concealed conduit systems shall have flush-mounted switches and convenience outlets. Exposed conduit systems shall have surface mounted switches and convenience outlets.

B. CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS

1. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings shall be manufactured by Crouse Hinds, Appleton, or O Z Gedney.

2. Rigid PVC device boxes and fittings shall be manufactured by Carlon or Cantex.

3. Sheet steel device boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton, Raco, or Steel City.

4. Hub arrangements on threaded fittings shall be the most appropriate for the conduit arrangement to avoid unnecessary bends and fittings.

C. DEVICE PLATES

1. Galvanized or cadmium-plated device plates shall be used on surface mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are not required.

2. Device plates on flush mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are not required shall be AISI Type 302 stainless steel, Eagle "93nnn series", Hubbell "S series", or Leviton "840nn 40 series".

3. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and finished to match the plate.

4. Device plates for switches outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall have provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off", and shall be Appleton "FSK 1VS", Crouse Hinds "DS185" or O Z Gedney "FS 1 WSCA".

5. Unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings, device plates for receptacles indicated as weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK WRD", Crouse Hinds "WLRD1", or O Z Gedney "FS 1 WDCA”.

6. Flush-mounted, weatherproof plates shall be provided with adapter plates, Appleton "FSK-SBA" or Crouse-Hinds "FS031".


7. Unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings, device plates for ground fault interrupter receptacles indicated to be weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK WGFI", Eagle "966", or O Z Gedney "FS 1 GFCA".

8. Receptacle covers indicated to be weatherproof while in-use shall be Crouse-Hinds TP7488 for single gang and TP7489 for double gang receptacles.

9. Engraved device plates, where required, shall be manufactured by Leviton, or equal.

10. Device plates on PVC conduit fittings shall be Carlon "E98 Series" or Cantex "513300 Series".

D. WALL SWITCHES

1. Standard switches on ac lighting panel load circuits through 277 volts shall be 20 amperes, 120/277 volts, Eagle "2221V" through "2224V", Hubbell "HBL 1221I" through "HBL 1224I", or Leviton "1221-2I" through "1224 2I".

2. Switches for pulse control of lighting contactors shall be 20 amperes, 120/277 volts, momentary, double-throw, center "Off", Eagle "2220V", Hubbell "1557I" or Leviton "1257-I".

E. RECEPTACLES

1. Standard convenience outlets shall be duplex, three-wire, grounding, 20 amperes, 125 volts, Eagle "5362V", Hubbell "5362I" or Leviton "5362 I" for 120 volt circuits, and 250 volts, Eagle "5462V", Hubbell "5462I" or Leviton "5462-I" for 240 volt circuits.

2. Switches for low voltage lighting controls shall be specified by lighting control supplier.

2.6 JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND WIRING GUTTERS

A. Indoor boxes (larger than switch, receptacle, or fixture type) and gutters shall be constructed of sheet steel, shall be galvanized after fabrication, and shall be rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts.

1. Outdoor boxes and gutters shall be NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel and shall be rigidly supported by stainless steel framing materials. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Bolt on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have rigid handles. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet shall be split.

3. Where indicated on the Drawings, junction and pull boxes with a removable side opposite the underground conduits shall be provided over building ends of underground conduit banks. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code, including space for full size continuations of all underground conduits not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space for future conduits.

4. All boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code, including percentage full and space for full size continuations of all underground conduits not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space for future conduits. Adequate space shall be provided in all junction boxes for installation and termination of future cables on spare terminal blocks.

5. Underground pull boxes shall be of polymer concrete construction and shall have stackable design with open bottom. Boxes and covers shall be rated for 5,000 pounds minimum. Pull boxes shall be Quazite “PC” series, or Engineer approved equal.


2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES & CONTROLS

A. Lighting fixtures and controls shall be furnished as described in the fixture schedule and as indicated on Drawing 1-E1.02 Lighting Schedule and Details. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Pendant fixtures shall have swivel type box covers and threaded conduit pendants unless otherwise specified. Lighting fixtures shall be provided with disconnects in accordance with NEC requirements. Lighting fixtures and controls shall be provided as scheduled, no equal, unless otherwise noted in fixture schedule.

2.8 LIGHTING PANELS

A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

1. Each lighting panel shall be a fully rated dead front, 120/208 volt, three phase panelboard with circuit breakers, manufactured by Eaton, no exception, in accordance with the Drawings and the following:

B. CABINET

1. The panel shall have a surface-mounted enclosure with a NEMA designation appropriate for the location where it will be installed. The enclosure shall have a hinged trim (cover). Breaker operating handles shall be accessible through a latched, lockable, door. At the completion of the project, a neatly printed or typed directory listing the panel and circuit identities shall be mounted inside the door.

2. Panel shall be factory painted ANSI 61 gray.

C. CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, bolt on, individually front replaceable, and shall indicate "On", "Off", and "Tripped". Breakers indicated as multiple pole shall be common trip. Breakers shall have interrupting ratings not less than 22,000 amperes. Handle clips to prevent casual operation of breakers shall be provided for 10 percent (at least two (2)) of the breakers and applied to the circuits, as directed. Breakers and provisions for future breakers shall be provided in the quantities, number of poles, and ampere ratings indicated on the Drawings.

2. Circuit breakers for existing MDP shall be as specified on Drawing 1-E5.00.

D. BUSES

1. The panel shall have main and neutral buses insulated from the cabinet, and a ground bus. Buses shall be copper, with ampere ratings and main lugs or breaker as indicated. The ground bus shall be similar to a neutral bus and shall have a good ground connection to the cabinet, a removable bond to the neutral bus, clamp type lugs for the ground cable in each supply conduit, and connections for a ground cable in each load conduit.

2.9 LIGHTING PANEL LP-6

A. Lighting Panel 6 shall be an Eaton Mini Power Center with 7.5KVA transformer as specified on drawing 1-E5.00, or equal.

2.10 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. Integral SPD’s shall be manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens Energy & Automation, or Square D, no exception allowed. External SPD’s shall be manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens Energy & Automation, Square D, or Current Technology ABB, and Phoenix Contact no exceptions allowed.


B. SCOPE

1. Surge protective devices (SPD) shall be provided as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Each unit shall be designed for parallel connection to the wiring system and shall utilize non-linear voltage-dependent metal oxide varistors (MOV) in parallel.

2. Each SPD shall be furnished and installed for the electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. All new lighting and power panels shall be furnished with an integral SPD.

3. The table below lists the specific SPD ratings for new power panels.

Power Panel Name Location Voltage/Phase Exposure Level

LP-3 Office/Storage Building 120/208V 3-Ph Medium

C. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE STANDARDS

1. The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following standards:

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45

ANSI/IEEE C62.1 and C62.11

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA LS1 Guidelines)

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 70 [NEC], 75, and 780)

Underwriters Laboratories UL 1449 Third Edition and 1283

2. The unit shall be UL 1449 Third Edition Listed as a Type 2 Surge Protective Device and UL 1283 Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter.

D. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Operating Temperature. 0°F to +140°F.

2. Relative Humidity. Reliable operation with 5 percent to 95 percent, non-condensing.

E. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Unit Operating Voltage. The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV). The SPD shall be designed to withstand a MCOV of not less than 115 percent of nominal RMS voltage.

3. Operating Frequency. Operating frequency range shall be 47 to 63 Hertz.

4. Protection Modes. Four-wire configured systems shall provide: Line-to-Neutral (L N), Line-to-Ground (L G), and Neutral-to-Ground (N G), and Line-to-Line (L L) protection. Three-wire configured systems shall provide: Line-to-Line (L L) protection and Line-to-Ground (L G) protection.

5. Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity. The rated single pulse surge current capacity, in amps, for each mode of protection of the unit shall be as required and shall be no less than listed in the following table:

L-N L-G N-G L-L

High Exposure Level 120 kA 120 kA 120 kA 120 kA

Medium-High Exposure Level 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA

Medium Exposure Level 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA 80 kA


6. UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR). The maximum VPR per mode for the device (inclusive of disconnect) shall be as required and shall not exceed the following:

Voltage L-N L-G N-G L-L

120/208 3-Phase 800 V 800 V 800 V 1200 V

480 3-Phase, 4W 1200 V 1200 V 1200 V 2000 V

7. Noise Attenuation. The unit shall be capable of a minimum -30 dB attenuation at 100 kHz when tested per the 50 ohm insertion loss method as defined by MIL STD 220A.

8. Nominal Discharge Current. Each SPD shall have a nominal discharge current rating of 20 kA.

9. Overcurrent Protection. At high and medium-high exposure levels, the SPD shall incorporate internal fusing capable of interrupting, at minimum, up to 200 kA symmetrical fault current with 600 volts ac applied.

a. At medium and low exposure levels, the SPD shall incorporate internal fusing capable of interrupting, at minimum, up to 65kA symmetrical fault current with 600 volts ac applied.

b. The device shall be capable of allowing passage of the rated maximum surge current for every mode without fuse operation.

10. Unit Status Indicators. The unit shall include long-life, externally visible phase indicators that monitor the on-line status of the unit. When furnished integral to the panelboard, the status indicators shall be viewable through a clear window within the panelboard door, or similar provision made to ensure visibility with the door closed.

F. INSTALLATION

1. Each SPD shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. If possible for the integral units, provide direct bus connections.

G. OPTIONS

1. Dual Form "C" Dry Contacts. The SPD shall be provided with a set of form "C" dry contacts (normally open and normally closed) to facilitate connection to the Plant Control System (PCS) or other remote monitoring system. The contacts shall be normally open or normally closed and shall change state upon any alarm condition.

2.11 CONTROL STATIONS

A. Control stations shall be provided as indicated on the one line diagrams or schematics or as required by the equipment furnished. Pilot devices shall be 30.5 mm heavy duty, oil tight construction, and shall perform the functions indicated. Pilot lights shall be full voltage type with LED lamps with push-to-test. Indoor control stations shall have NEMA Type 12 enclosures. Control stations outdoors or indicated to be weatherproof shall have NEMA Type 4X stainless steel enclosures with protective caps on the control devices.

2.12 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Unless otherwise specified, each disconnect switch shall be 3 pole, non-fusible, 600 volts, with a continuous current rating as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Switches located indoors shall have NEMA 12 type enclosure or as required by the locations where they will be installed. Switches located outdoors shall have NEMA Type 4X stainless steel enclosures.


2. Switches shall have high conductivity copper, visible blades; non-teasible, positive, quick make, quick break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. Each switch shall have a handle whose position is easily recognizable and which can be locked in the "Off" position with three (3) padlocks. The "On" and "Off" positions shall be clearly marked.

3. All switches shall be UL listed and horsepower rated, and shall meet the latest edition of NEMA KS1. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from being opened while the operating handle is in the "On" position.

2.13 LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY POWER TRANSFORMERS

A. Separately mounted transformers shall be provided in the phases, kVA, and voltages indicated on the Drawings. Transformers shall be self air cooled, dry type, floor mounted, and enclosed for wiring in conduit. Transformers installed outdoors shall be weatherproof. Transformers shall have at least two (2) full capacity voltage taps. Transformers shall meet NEMA TP1 guidelines for energy efficiency.

2.14 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS

A. Photoelectric controls shall be weatherproof, swivel adjustable, with built-in time delay to prevent accidental turnoff by momentary brightness. The photocell shall be rated 1,800 VA, 120 volts ac, and shall be field adjustable from 1 ft/c turn-on to 15 ft/c turn-off.

2.15 RADIANT HEATER CONTROL PANEL

A. Radiant heater control panel shall be a 30” x 22”, NEMA 4X enclosure with integral disconnect as shown on 1-E5.51.

B. Timers shall be Defiant, 15 Amp, 4-Hour countdown timer, or equal.

C. SCR controller shall be 18DZ-2-50, manufactured by Payne Engineering, or equal.

D. Pilot Lights shall have 120 V pilot lights. Pilot Lights shall be a “red” lens for “ON” status indication. Pilot lights shall be LED, push-to-test. Incandescent 120V pilot light type is not allowed.

E. Relays shall have 120 volt, 60 Hz coils rated for continuous duty in 40 C ambient and 10 ampere, 120 volt ac contacts.

2.16 ALARM HORN AND BEACON

A. The alarm horns and beacons shall be provided and located as indicated on the Drawings. The alarm shall be an electronic horn, 12-30VDC, Gray, with optional Amber Steady/Flashing Beacon. Alarm/Beacon shall be Allen-Bradley model # 855HM-CGMD30DL5, no substitutions.

2.17 CORD REELS

A. Cord reels shown on contract drawings shall be industrial, all steel construction. Cord reels shall have 45 feet of portable SJEO cord with a NEMA 5-20R plug. Cord reels shall be rated for 20Amp, 125VAC. Cord reels shall be Hubbel HBL45123C20, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING

A. All material, equipment, and components specified herein shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in accordance with these specifications, Section 26 05 83 Electrical Equipment Installation, and manufacturer’s written instructions.


Refer to the National Electrical Contractors Association’s (NECA) National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS) for Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting (NECA-1) as a minimum baseline of quality and workmanship for installing electrical products and systems that defines what is meant by “neat and workmanlike” as required by the National Electrical Code Article 110.12. Specified requirements supersede NECA practices.

B. Electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic, unless otherwise detailed or dimensioned. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with the work.

C. Minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment made prior to installation shall be made at no cost to the City.

D. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all indoor floor-mounted electrical equipment and control cabinets shall be installed on concrete equipment pads four (4) inches in height.

E. Adequate bracing shall be provided for seismic forces. The bracing shall be designed to meet requirements for equipment installed in a facility with Seismic Class, Design Category and Risk Category per structural drawing notes.

F. Where required in NECA 90 or by Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements, testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment.

3.2 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for updating the existing short circuit study and protective-device coordination study update of relays, fuses, circuit breakers, and all other protective devices and shall submit a coordination report as specified herein. The study shall include the entire distribution system, – 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz – circuit protective device on the load end, to the nearest protective device on the power company's line side. The City will provide the existing short circuit study upon award of contract.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall ensure that all relays and circuit breakers are set according to the study results.

C. The study shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. Color-coded printouts of coordination curves prepared with calculation software.

2. A tabulation of all protective relay and circuit breaker trip settings and recommended sizes and types of medium-voltage fuses.

3. Motor starting profiles for all 50 horsepower and larger motors.

4. Transformer damage curves and protection, evaluated in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.109.

5. Calculated short-circuit values at all nodes in the distribution system included within the scope of the coordination study.

D. Engineering firm will update existing project study using SKM Power*Tools software version 7.0.3.0 or newer. City will provide engineering firm a copy of the electronic files.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the following:

1. The coordination curves for relays, fuses, and circuit breakers.

2. Transformer damage curves.


3. Motor data.

4. Other applicable information for all new and existing electrical equipment.

F. Contractor shall coordinate with the City to obtain the required protective device curves and shall be responsible for all the field work associated with obtaining the necessary data on existing relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and transformers to be included in the coordination study.

G. The coordination report shall be bound in a standard 8 1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binder and shall be submitted in accordance with the Contractor Submittals listed above.

H. The engineering firm shall implement the protective device coordination study settings on new equipment and submit a final amended report of the Record As-Built electrical equipment protective device settings subsequent to start-up and testing.

3.3 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Contractor shall update the existing Arc Flash Hazard Analysis and submit an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis for each new piece of electrical equipment in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910, NEC, NFPA 70E, and IEEE 1584 and shall submit an updated Arc Flash Hazard Analysis report as specified herein.

B. The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in association with, or as a continuation of, the short circuit study and protective-device coordination study.

C. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis calculations shall lead to a selection of a level of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that is a balance between the calculated incident energy exposure and the work activity being performed, while meeting the following concerns:

1. Provide adequate protection.

2. Avoid the need for more protection than is warranted.

D. Results of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be used to identify the flash-protection boundary and the incident energy at assigned working distances throughout any position or level in the overall electrical generation, transmission, distribution, or utilization system.

E. The analysis shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. A tabulation of the symmetrical RMS bolted fault current available and X/R ratio at each piece of electrical equipment.

2. A tabulation of the arc fault current available at each piece of electrical equipment.

3. A list containing the incident energy and the flash-protection boundary for all electrical equipment.

4. A list containing each piece of electrical equipment, its corresponding incident energy, hazard rating, and the required Personal Protective Equipment.

F. An Engineering and Testing Services firm acceptable to the City shall conduct the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.

G. ARC FLASH ANALYSIS SOFTWARE

1. The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed using the latest version of SKM Power*Tools for Windows software, without exception. After the final version of the study and analysis are completed and accepted, Contractor shall provide two (2) copies of the SKM electronic file to the City.


H. ARC FLASH HAZARD REPORT

1. Contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete and accurate arc flash analysis information in the Arc Flash Hazard Report. The report shall be submitted to the City for review before the final report is prepared. Contractor shall ensure that calculated values for flash-protection boundary, working distance, incident energy, and required Personal Protective Equipment is submitted and provide substantiation that the information will be prominently displayed on electrical equipment.

2. The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2 by 11 inch, three-ring binder and shall be submitted in accordance with this section. Final selection of required Personal Protective Equipment shall be subject to review and acceptance by the City.

I. ARC FLASH LABELING

1. After approval of the Arc Flash Hazard Report by the City, Contractor shall furnish and install arc flash warning labels on the applicable electrical equipment. All electrical equipment shall be provided with the appropriate ANSI compliant arc flash labeling. Labels shall include the flash protection boundary distance, incident energy, and minimum required Personal Protective Equipment.

3.4 CABLE INSTALLATION

Cable installation shall be per Section 26 05 19. Where circuit schedules in the drawings provide materials quantity estimates, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify total materials quantities based on their routings and plan takeoffs.

3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall be responsible for routing all conduits. This shall include all conduits indicated on the one-lines, riser diagrams, and home-runs shown on the plan Drawings.

Conduits shall be routed as defined in these Specifications. Where conduit routing is shown on plans, it shall be considered a general guideline and shall be field verified to avoid interferences. Where raceway schedules on the drawings provide materials quantity estimates, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify total materials quantities based on their routings and plan takeoffs.

B. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, conduit installation and identification shall be completed according to the following procedures.

C. INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR CONDUIT

1. This section covers the installation of conduit inside structures, above and below grade, and in exposed outdoor locations. In general, conduit inside structures shall be concealed. Large conduit and conduit stubs may be exposed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. No conduit shall be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the Drawings.

2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Contractor shall be responsible for routing the conduit to meet the following installation requirements:

a. Conduit installed in all exposed indoor locations shall be rigid steel. Exposed conduit shall be rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts.

b. Conduit installed in floor slabs and walls in non hazardous locations shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.


c. Final connections to dry type transformers, to motors without flexible cords, and to other equipment with rotating or moving parts shall be liquidtight flexible metal conduit with watertight connectors installed without sharp bends and in the minimum lengths required for the application, but not longer than 6 feet unless otherwise acceptable to the City.

d. Terminations and connections of rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit shall be taper threaded. Conduits shall be reamed free of burrs and shall be terminated with conduit bushings. Use Grounding Myers hubs for all outdoor and wet locations. Hub shall have insulated throat with bonding lock nut or ground screw and be manufactured by Appleton, O-Z Gedney, or Crouse-Hinds.

e. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces.

f. Two (2) or more conduits in the same general routing shall be parallel, with symmetrical bends.

g. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues.

h. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall have supports and provisions for expansion as required by NEC Article 352.

i. Metallic conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures, whether junction boxes, pull boxes, or other types, those connections shall be securely fastened by locknuts inside and outside.

j. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be secured to sheet metal device boxes using a male terminal adapter with a locknut inside or by using a box adapter inserted through the knockout and cemented into a coupling.

k. Conduits in walls or slabs, which have reinforcement in both faces, shall be installed between the reinforcing steel. In slabs with only a single layer of reinforcing steel, conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement. Conduits larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness shall be concrete encased under the slab.

l. Conduits that cross structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall be fitted with concrete-tight and watertight expansion/deflection couplings, suitable for use with metallic conduits and rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduits. The couplings shall be Appleton Type DF, Crouse Hinds Type XD, or O Z Type DX.

m. Conduit shall be clear of structural openings and indicated future openings.

n. Conduits through roofs or metal walls shall be flashed and sealed watertight.

o. Conduit installed through any openings cut into non-fire rated concrete or masonry structure elements shall be neatly grouted. Conduit penetrations of fire rated structure elements shall be sealed in a manner that maintains the fire rating as indicated on the Drawings.

p. Conduits shall be capped during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water.

q. Exposed conduit stubs for future use shall be terminated with galvanized pipe caps.

r. Concealed conduit for future use shall be terminated in equipment or fitted with couplings plugged flush with structural surfaces.

s. Where the Drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired hereunder, concealed portions of conduits for future equipment shall be provided.

t. Horizontal conduit shall be installed to allow at least 7 feet of headroom, except along structures, piping, and equipment or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained.


u. Conduit shall not be routed across the surface of a floor, roof, or walkway unless approved by the City.

v. All conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated with acceptable fittings that will not affect the NEMA rating of the enclosure.

w. Nonmetallic conduit, which turns out of concrete slabs or walls, shall be connected to a 90 degree elbow of rigid steel conduit before it emerges. Conduits shall have rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from slabs or walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall. Corrosion protection wrap shall be used where the conduit emerges from the concrete.

x. Power conductors to and from variable frequency drives shall be installed in steel conduit.

y. All conduits shall enter outdoor exposed enclosures from the bottom; top and side entry is not allowed.

D. UNDERGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION

1. All excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to the respective sections of these Specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements:

a. All underground conduits shall be concrete encased where indicated on the Drawings.

b. Conduit shall be Schedule 80 PVC in roadways and 40 PVC in all other areas. All PVC joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

c. Underground conduits indicated not to be concrete encased shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

d. Underground conduit bend radius shall be at least 2 feet at vertical risers and at least 3 feet elsewhere.

e. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have at least 2 feet of earth cover, except where indicated otherwise.

f. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in place, or concreted into boxouts, with water stops on all sides of the boxout.

g. Underground nonmetallic conduits, which turn out of concrete or earth in outdoor locations, shall be connected to 90 degree elbows of rigid steel conduit before they emerge.

h. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls, which have one (1) side in contact with earth, shall be sealed watertight with special rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

i. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings to manholes.

j. Communications cables shall not be installed in raceways, conduits, boxes, manholes, or handholes containing other types of circuits.

k. Intercommunication and instrument cables shall be separated the maximum possible distance from all power wiring in pull boxes, manholes, and handholes.


E. SEALING OF CONDUITS

1. After cable has been installed and connected, conduit shall be blown out to remove all water then ends shall be sealed by forcing non-hardening sealing compound into the conduits to a depth at least equal to the conduit diameter. This method shall be used for sealing all conduits at handholes, manholes, and building entrance junction boxes, and for 1 inch and larger conduit connections to equipment.

2. Conduits entering hazardous (classified) areas and submersible or explosion proof enclosures shall have Appleton "Type ESU" or Crouse-Hinds "EYS" sealing fittings with sealing compound.

F. REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS

1. Existing conduits may be reused as indicated on the drawings and subject to the approval of the City and compliance with the following requirements:

a. A wire brush shall be pulled through the conduit to remove any loose debris.

b. A mandrel shall be pulled through the conduit to remove sharp edges and burrs.

3.6 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, cable tray installation shall be done according to the following procedures.

B. INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY

1. This section covers the installation of cable tray inside structures.

a. After all cutting, punching, reaming, welding, drilling, capping, and cleaning have been completed, all trays shall be degreased and free of any foreign matter that may cause damage to cables.

C. TRAY SUPPORTS

1. Tray supports shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the contract drawings. Support material shall comply with the following requirements.

a. Clamps, fastening hardware, and pins shall be 316 stainless steel materials.

b. The exact location and dimensions of supports and hangers shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and per manufacturer recommendations. The support system shall be designed so that it does not interfere with present or future installation, expansion or maintenance of dimensioned equipment, existing pipe, pipe insulation, walls, building steel, HVAC duct, etc. Hanger rods shall not pass between the rails or rungs of any tray.

c. Except where supported by wall brackets, cable trays shall be supported by hanger rods, cross members, and hold-down clamps.

d. Cable trays shall be grounded with copper cable connections to the ground bus bar and in accordance with ANSI/TIA-607-C.

3.7 WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION

A. Metallic and nonmetallic conduit boxes and fittings shall be installed in the following locations:

B. CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS

1. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings shall be installed in concrete walls, ceilings, and floors; in the outdoor faces of masonry walls; and in all locations where weatherproof device covers are required.


These boxes and fittings shall also be installed in exposed rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit systems.

2. Galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes shall be installed in the indoor faces of masonry walls, in interior partition walls, and in joist supported ceilings.

3. Rigid PVC device boxes shall be installed in exposed nonmetallic conduit systems.

4. Telephone and communications conduit shall be provided with separate junction boxes and pull fittings.

C. DEVICE PLATES

1. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard-sized plates do not fully cover the wall opening.

D. WALL SWITCHES

1. Wall switches shall be mounted 3 feet – 6 inches above floor or grade.

2. After circuits are energized, all wall switches shall be tested for proper operation.

E. RECEPTACLES

1. Convenience outlets shall be 18 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise required.

2. Convenience outlets outdoors, and around the collector and rooms where equipment may be hosed down; shall be 4 feet above floor or grade.

3. Welding receptacles shall be surface-mounted 4 feet above the floor.

4. Conduit and wire for convenience outlet installation is not shown on the Drawings and shall be sized, furnished, and installed by Contractor. Conductors shall be minimum #12 AWG and conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch for convenience outlet installation.

F. SPECIAL OUTLETS

1. Horns and strobe lights for audio/visual alarms shall be mounted a minimum of 8 feet above finished floor and shall be positioned to provide maximum penetration of the surrounding area.

3.8 EQUIPMENT COORDINATION AND INSTALLATION

A. EQUIPMENT COORDINATION

1. The Contractor shall coordinate the equipment supplied from various manufacturers and vendors. This includes but is not limited to:

a. Obtaining specific information on equipment ratings and sizes and verifying that electrical components supplied meet, or match the requirements such as voltage, phase, frequency, starter types, etc.

b. Contractor shall provide equipment that will fit within the space allocated on the Drawings and meet NEC clearances.

c. Providing power and control equipment, wiring, and raceways to meet the requirements of the mechanical equipment supplied.

Any discrepancies between the electrical equipment and other equipment shall be brought to the immediate attention of the City.

B. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

1. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, the following procedures shall be used in performing electrical work.


a. All equipment, boxes, and gutters shall be installed level and plumb. Boxes, equipment enclosures, metal raceways, and similar items mounted on water or earth bearing walls shall be separated from the wall by at least 1/4 inch thick corrosion resistant spacers. Where boxes, enclosures, and raceways are installed at locations where walls are not suitable or available for mounting, concrete equipment pads, framing material, and associated hardware shall be provided.

b. Equipment with movable components, such as drawout equipment carriages, circuit breakers, hinged doors, and disconnect switches shall operate free and easy without binding or distortion.

c. Freestanding outdoor equipment shall be permanently sealed at the base, and all openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed with concrete grout to keep out rodents and insects the size of wasps and mud daubers. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with silicone sealant, Dow Corning "795" or General Electric "SCS1200".

C. EQUIPMENT CLEANING

1. All deposits of oil, grease, mud, dirt or debris shall be cleaned from the electrical equipment following installation and field wiring. Loose debris shall be vacummed from electrical equipment and a detergent water based solution, or other liquid cleaners not harmful to material or equipment finishes, shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer to remove remaining deposits.

2. Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall touch up any scratches on equipment with manufacturer touch-up paint following equipment manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

3.9 GROUNDING

A. See section 26 05 26 Grounding for detailed grounding requirements.

3.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. The Drawings indicate the general locations and arrangements of the lighting fixtures. Fixtures in rows shall be aligned both vertically and horizontally unless otherwise specified. Fixtures shall be clear of pipes, mechanical equipment, structural openings, indicated future equipment and structural openings, and other obstructions.

B. Conduit and wire for lighting fixture installation is not shown on the Drawings and shall be sized, furnished and installed by Contractor. Circuits to emergency lighting units, exit signs, and fixtures indicated to be night lights shall not be switched. Circuits to lighting fixtures indicated to have emergency battery packs shall include an additional un-switched hot conductor. Conductors shall be minimum #12 AWG and conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch for lighting fixture installation.

3.11 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Modifications to existing equipment shall be completed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. All existing facilities shall be kept in service during construction. Temporary power or relocation of existing power and control wiring, equipment, and devices shall be provided as required during construction. Coordination and timing of outages shall be as specified in other sections of these Specifications. Electrical power interruptions will only be allowed where agreed upon in advance with the City, and scheduling at times of low demand may be required.


B. DEMOLITION

1. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all cable and all exposed conduit for power and control signals of equipment indicated to be removed shall be demolished. Conduit supports and electrical equipment mounting hardware shall be removed, and holes or damage remaining shall be grouted or sealed flush. Conduit partially concealed shall be removed where exposed, and plugged with expanding grout flush with the floor or wall. Repairs shall be refinished to match the existing surrounding surfaces. Demolished equipment shall be discarded or salvaged as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in other sections of these Specifications.

3.12 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Testing and commissioning of this section will be included and documented as part of Pre Startup Checks as defined in Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements.

B. CABLE TESTING

1. Insulation Resistance Testing (Megger Test) – All main power and motor feeds 480VAC and above shall have their insulation resistance measured. Record resistance for Line- Line and Line-Ground on Insulation Megger test report form and submit with Cable List.

2. Cable/Conductor Integrity Tests - All cable/conductor integrity tests shall be documented on a copy of the Cable List, designated for such use. All discrepancies shall be resolved before proceeding with testing.

a. Verify and document cable/conductor as-found, on-spool, is satisfactory for installation, i.e. no shorts between conductors and shields (as applicable) and no open conductors. If satisfactory, date and initial.

b. After cable/conductor is pulled into its final location, but prior to securing, verify cable/conductor is satisfactory for termination, i.e. no shorts between conductors and shields (as applicable) and no open conductors. If satisfactory, date and initial.

c. All cables/conductors verified satisfactory for termination, shall be secured and terminated as directed within the Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.

3. Point-to-Point Tests - After required cable/conductor integrity testing is completed, and installation and wiring connections are completed, the Contractor shall perform a complete point-to-point check of all conductors including control and instrumentation wiring by comparing the physical terminations to the wiring diagrams and verifying that each external connection is correctly wired and labeled. Tracking of point-to-point tests shall be done using highlighter pen to indicate the verified circuits on the wiring diagrams. These highlighted drawings shall be kept as part of the Pre Startup Tests. Checkout shall be completed before any Equipment Functional tests begin, including those associated to the Plant Control System (PCS). All wiring errors found shall be corrected prior to the beginning of local network configuration of networked devices.

4. Cable Lengths - Following installation of each cable, Contractor shall record the installed length of the cable in feet in the Cable List for as-built purposes. The cable list shall be kept on site and updated in accordance to Pre Startup test plan requirements. Cable list lengths shall be used for the Coordination Study and submitted to the City as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

C. RECEPTACLE TESTING

1. After circuits are energized, each receptacle shall be tested for correct polarity and each GFCI receptacle shall be tested for proper operation.


D. MOTOR TESTING

1. All motor rotation shall be confirmed per, and documented in, individual equipment pre startup checks. Contractor shall support testing of motors specified under other sections of this specification.

2. Motors shall have their insulation resistance measured before they are connected. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery as well as when they are connected. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable.

E. LIGHTING TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

1. Contractor shall provide a factory-certified service engineer for on-site programming, commissioning, and testing of lighting systems and controls.

2. After all lighting circuits are energized, each light fixture shall be confirmed as operational, and all lighting controls verified to operate.

3. Training on programming lighting controls shall be provided on-site and by a qualified field service engineer.

END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


This Section specifies conductors and cables rated 600 volts or less used for power, lighting, receptacle, and control circuits. Contractor shall supply conductors and cables for Contractor, vendor, and City supplied equipment.





SECTION 26 05 11 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL



A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued.

ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

IEEE 1202 IEEE Standard for Flame Testing of Cables for Use in Cable Tray in Industrial and Commercial Occupancies

ICEA S-95-658 Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy

ICEA S-66-524 Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy

ICEA S-58-679 Control, Instrumentation and Thermocouple Extension Conductor Identification

NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

UL 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 1277 Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members

UL 62 Flexible Cords and Cables




B. ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS



2. The Contractor shall provide review comments attached to the submittal identifying compliance or non-compliance with section, confirming that he has verified that submittals meet specified requirements.

3. Contractor shall furnish a submittal for all types of cable and conductors to be provided. The submittal shall include the cable manufacturer and type, and sufficient data to indicate that the cable and conductors meet the specified requirements.

4. In addition to the complete specifications and descriptive literature, a sample of the largest size of each type of cable shall be submitted for review before installation. Each sample shall include legible and complete surface printing of the cable identification.

C. REPORTS

1. Cable Test Data Reports

a. Cable Test Data Report for each cable given DC Voltage test submitted to the City in accordance with the requirements of Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements as part of Pre-Startup Checks.

b. Cable/Conductor Integrity Test Report, shall document each cable/conductor terminated, be compiled using the Circuit Schedule, and be submitted to the City in accordance with the requirements of Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements as part of Pre-Startup Checks.

c. Cable Point to Point Test Report submitted to the City in accordance with the requirements of Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements as part of Pre-Startup Checks.

2. Cable Length Report

a. Cable Length Report shall document the Installed length of each cable in feet, be complied using the Circuit Schedule and be submitted to the City in accordance with the requirements of Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements as part of Pre-Startup Checks.


1.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. All conductors in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be identified, color coded, and labeled in accordance with Section 26 05 11.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. UNSCHEDULED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES:

1. Where not specified on the Drawings, conductors and cables shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the particular equipment served with the minimum size as specified herein.

2. Unscheduled 120V panel circuit conductors shall be sized by the Contractor in accordance with the breakers specified and the NEC to limit voltage drop to 3 percent. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings to determine circuit lengths and the distribution panel schedule(s) for expected loads.

3. Minimum size of lighting and receptacle circuit conductors shall be 12 AWG.

4. Minimum size of control circuit conductors shall be 14 AWG.

5. Power, control, lighting, and receptacle circuit conductors shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC "600V POWER CABLE”, unless otherwise specified.

B. SCHEDULED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES:

Scheduled Conductors and Cables shall be type and size indicated on Circuit Schedule (Drawing 1-E1.04. Contractor shall verify loads and conductor size to ensure compliance with NEC.

2.2 CONNECTORS, TERMINATORS AND SPLICES

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International

3. Hubbell/Anderson

4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC

5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division

6. Thomas and Betts Corp.

7. Tyco Electronics

B. DESCRIPTION

Connectors shall be tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application. Connectors shall be tin-plated high conductivity copper. Wire nuts for a splice are prohibited.

Connectors for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger shall be compression tool installed one-hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole or four-hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors are not acceptable.

Terminators (or sealing fittings) shall be used where indicated on the Drawings, or as required for a workmanlike installation, to support and effectively seal the entrance of exposed cable into an enclosure. Terminators shall include a compound chamber and support means and be listed for the application.


All circuits shall be continuous though all junction boxes, wireways, pull boxes, etc. until the circuit conductors are terminated at suitable terminal strips within motor control centers, control cabinets and panels, distribution panels, local control stations, etc. In-line splices and taps shall be used only by written consent of the Project Engineer.

Power conductor splices shall be compression type, made with a compression tool die approved for the purpose, as made by Thomas and Betts Corp., or equal. Splices shall be covered with electrical products designed for the application, insulated, and covered with a heat-shrinkable sleeve or boot, as specified elsewhere.

Motor connection kits shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and high dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and contamination. Motor connections may use the Tyco Electronics removable boot product line. Motor connection kits shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations. Connection kits shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances.

2.3 CABLE

A. All types of cable shall conform to the CABLESPEC sheets at the end of this section and as described herein.

B. 600 VOLT POWER CABLE

1. Cable in power, control, indication, and alarm circuits operating at 600 volts or less, except where, multiconductor control, and instrument cables are required, shall comply with CABLESPEC sheet “600V POWER CABLE”.

C. 600 VOLT INSTRUMENT CABLE

1. Cable for electronic circuits to instrumentation, metering, and other signaling and control equipment shall be two conductor instrument cable, twisted for magnetic noise rejection and protected from electrostatic noise by a total coverage shield. Types of instrument cables shall comply with CABLESPEC sheet “600V INSTRUMENT CABLE”.

D. MULTICONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE

1. When indicated on the Drawings, cable in control, indication and alarm circuits shall be multi-conductor. Cable shall comply with CABLESPEC sheet “600V MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE”. Cable shall be shielded.

E. VFD POWER CABLE

1. Power cable to equipment controlled by a variable frequency drive operating at 600 volts or less, shall be 2,000 volt and shall comply with CABLESPEC sheet “VFD POWER CABLE”.

F. TRAY CABLE

1. In electrical trays as raceways, cable shall comply with CABLESPEC sheet “TRAY CABLE” or “600V POWER CABLE”.

G. FESTOON CABLE

1. Power cable to traveling hoists shall comply with CABLESPEC sheet “FESTOON CABLE”. Festoon cable shall be equipped with a minimum of 3 spare conductors.

2.4 CORD AND CABLE SUPPORT GRIPS

Cord grips shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings, or as required for a workmanlike installation, to attach flexible cord to equipment enclosures.


Cord grips shall consist of a threaded aluminum body and compression nut with a neoprene bushing and stainless steel wire mesh for strain relief. Cord grip shall provide a watertight seal at enclosure interface and sized to accommodate the flexible cord.

Cable support grips shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings for support of flexible cable. Support grips shall be heavy duty, double eye, double weave, stainless steel, closed wire mesh sized to accommodate the cable as manufactured by Hubbell Wiring Devices division, or approved equal. Support grip breaking strength shall be rated with a safety factor ten times maximum working load.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

1. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, cable shall be installed according to the following procedures, taking care to protect the cable and to avoid kinking the conductors, cutting or puncturing the jacket, contamination by oil or grease, or any other damage. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices, communication and signal circuits as indicated on the one-line diagrams shall be installed continuous and may not be spliced unless approved by the City. Where raceway and circuit schedules on the drawings provide materials quantity estimates, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify total materials quantities based on their routings and plan takeoffs.

2. Pulling wire and cable into conduit or trays shall be completed without damaging or putting undue stress on the insulation or jacket. Manufacturer recommended and UL Listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and cable. Grease is not acceptable.

3. Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before cable is installed. Where wire or cable exits a raceway or tray, a means of wire or cable support shall be provided.

3.2 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE

Conductors in panels and electrical equipment shall be bundled and laced at intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties. Cable ties shall be tensioned and cut off by using a tool specifically designed for the purpose such as a Panduit GS2B. Other methods of cutting cable ties are unacceptable.

Conductors crossing hinges shall be bundled into groups not exceeding 10 to 15 conductors and protected using nylon spiral flexible covers to protect conductors. Provide oversized plastic panel wiring duct within panels.

Slack shall be provided in junction and pull boxes, handholes and manholes. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls. Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the enclosure. Provide dedicated electrical wireways and insulated cable holders mounted on unistrut in manholes and handholes.

Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following:

1. Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with de-rating requirements of the NEC. Lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power or control conductors. Signal conductors shall be in separate conduits from power conductors. Motor feeder circuits shall be in separate conduits including small fan circuit unless combination fan-light fixture.

2. Power conductors derived from uninterruptible power supply systems shall not be installed in raceways with conductors of other systems. Install in separate raceways.


3.3 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B (values are referenced in Informative Annex I of the 2017 edition of the NEC).

B. Splices shall be made only at final device locations in accordance with device manufacturer’s requirements or in junction boxes as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise approved by Project Engineer.

C. Splices and terminations are subject to inspection by the Project Engineer prior to and after insulating.

D. In-line splices and tees, where approved by the Project Engineer, shall be made with tubular compression connectors and insulated as specified for motor terminations. Splices and tees in underground handholes or pull boxes shall be insulated using Scotch-cast epoxy resin or Raychem splicing kits.

E. Terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices furnished with pigtail leads shall be made using self-insulating tubular compression connectors within the termination box.

F. Motor terminations at 460-volt motors shall be made by bolt-connecting the lugged connectors.

G. Solid wire shall not be used.

H. Sharing neutrals for power circuits is unacceptable.

I. Conductor and cable markers shall be provided at splice points.

J. Spare cable ends shall be taped, coiled, and identified.

3.4 PORTABLE CORD

Portable cord feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords, pumps, cranes, hoists, and portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to take the tension from the cable termination. Connection of portable cords to permanent wiring shall be accomplished with the use of terminals. In-line taps and splices shall be used only where specified.

3.5 TESTING

The Contractor shall test all conductors and cable in accordance with Section 26 05 11.

3.6 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC)

Conductor and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are specified on individual cable specification sheets (CABLESPECS). Scheduled and unscheduled conductors and cables shall be installed in accordance with the CABLESPECS.

The following CABLESPEC sheets are included in this section:

1. 600V POWER CABLE

2. 600V INSTRUMENT CABLE

3. 600V MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE

4. VFD POWER CABLE

5. TRAY CABLE

6. FESTOON CABLE


CABLESPEC: 600V POWER CABLE

Cable System Identification: Lighting/Power/Control Cable, XHHW-2

Description: Single conductor cross-linked polyethylene power cable (Tray Rated). Sizes: 14 AWG through 750 kcmil

Voltage: 600V

Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with ASTM B8

Insulation: NEC Type XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry and wet, cross-linked polyethylene (XLP) in accordance with ICEA S-66-524 and UL 44

Jacket: None

Flame Resistance: UL 44

Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Southwire, General Cable, Allied Cable, or approved equal

Uses Permitted: Power, control, lighting and outlet circuits

Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.

Factory Testing: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658


CABLESPEC: 600V INSTRUMENT CABLE

Cable System Identification: 600V,Single Pair, Shielded Instrument Cable

Description: Single Pair, Shielded Instrument Cable conductor cross-linked polyethylene power cable.

Voltage: 600V

Conductor Material: 16 AWG, 7- Strand, Concentric-lay, uncoated copper, Max operating temperature 90°C dry, 75°C wet.

Insulation: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15mils avg thickness; 13 mils minimum thickness, UL 62, Type TFN

Jacket: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils min thickness, UL 62. Cable Assembly: Black, Flame-Retardant Polyvinyl Chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core.

Shield: Cable assembly, combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20 AWG minimum size, tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors.


Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Southwire, Belden, Annixter, or approved equal

Uses Permitted: Analog signals, 4-20mA,

Conductor Identification: 1 – Black 2 – White


Factory Testing: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFN. Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277


CABLESPEC: 600V MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE

Cable System Identification: 600 Volt Multiconductor Control Cable

Description: Single conductor cross-linked polyethylene power cable. Sizes: 12 AWG & 14 AWG

Voltage: 600V

Conductor Material: 7 or 19 Strands, Concentric-Lay, Uncoated Copper. Max operating temperature 90°C dry, 75°C wet

Insulation: Polyvinyl Chloride, not less than 15 mils avg thickness; 13 mils min thickness, UL 83, Type THHN and THWN

Jacket: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils min thickness, UL 83. Cable Assembly: Black, Flame-Retardant Polyvinyl Chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core.

Flame Resistance: UL 83, UL 1277


Uses Permitted: Control circuits

Conductor Identification: ICEA S-58-679 Method 1, Table E-1 (K-1)


sting: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 83 for Type THHN-THWN. Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the flame test requirements of UL 1277 for TC power and control tray cable


CABLESPEC: VFD POWER CABLE

Cable System Identification: 2000V VFD Power Cable

Description: 3 conductor cross-linked polyethylene power cable. Sizes: 14 AWG through 750 kcmil

Voltage: 2000V

Conductor Material: Stranded, uncoated copper. Max operating temperature 90°C

Ground: Copper conductor sized per NEC with green insulation.

Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene, ICEA S-66-524

Jacket: Cable Assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core.



Uses Permitted: Variable Frequency Drives to Motor Power Cable

Conductor Identification: ICEA S-58-679 Method 4


Testing: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL1277 and IEEE Standard 1202 ribbon burner flame test.


CABLESPEC: TRAY CABLE

Cable System Identification: 3 Conductor with Ground Power Tray Cable

Description: 3 conductor cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene power cable. Sizes: 12 AWG through 4/0 AWG

Voltage: 600V

Conductor Material: Concentric lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90°C

Ground: Copper conductor sized per NEC.

Insulation: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-95-658, Paragraph 3.6.

Jacket: Cable assembly; black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core.



Uses Permitted: Power circuits


Testing: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658, UL1277 and IEEE Standard 1202 ribbon burner flame test.


CABLESPEC: FESTOON CABLE

Cable System Identification: Flat Festoon Cable (PVC)

Description: 7 conductor, 12 AWG, Flat Festoon power cable, Yellow.

Voltage: 600V

Conductor Material: Extra flexible stranding, soft drawn uncoated copper per ASTM B-3 & UL 62

Insulation: Polyvinyl Chloride, not less than 30 mils avg thickness; UL 62, Flame and Oil-Resistant

Jacket: Polyvinyl Chloride, Yellow, Flame and Oil-Resistant, not less than 30 mils avg thickness.


Manufacturer(s): TPC Wire & Cable, Allied Cable, Nassau Wire & Cable, or approved equal

Uses Permitted: Power circuits for traveling cranes

Conductor Identification: 1 – Black, 2 – Red, 3 – Blue, 4 – Orange, 5 – Yellow, 6 – Brown, 7 – Red w/ Black Stripe


Testing: Cable shall meet UL VW-1/CSA FT1 Flame Test requirements

END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers the grounding of all new and modified grounding electrode conductors, equipment grounding conductors, fittings, accessories and hardware to permanently and effectively ground the neutral points of transformers, computer equipment, electrical equipment frames, conduit, cable trays, lightning arresters and all non-current-carrying metal parts, including structural steel and fences.








A. American standards and codes are referenced to cover the minimum level of quality and function. The latest edition and addenda of the following publications shall apply:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

4. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Advisory Council (EEMAC)

5. IEEE 80 – Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

6. IEEE 81 – Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System

7. IEEE 81.2 – Guide for Measurement of Impedance and Safety Characteristics of Large, Extended or Interconnected Grounding Systems

8. IEEE 142 – Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

9. IEEE 665 – Guide for Generating Station Grounding

10. IEEE 837 – Guide for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding

11. IEEE 1050 – Guide for Instrumentation and Control Equipment Grounding in Generating Stations

12. IEEE 1100 – Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment

13. IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

14. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

15. NFPA 780 – Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems








3. Information covering all materials used shall be submitted for review. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the relevant material or equipment. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out. Manufacturers’ catalog sheets shall be submitted for the following items:

1. Terminal lugs and clamps

2. Copper ground cable

3. Ground rods

4. Ground connection hardware


A. All materials shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Materials shall be stored indoors or otherwise covered and weather protected.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Cadweld® heavy-duty or approved equal for exothermic welds

B. Burndy “Hyground” fittings or approved equals compression welds

C. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Substitutions must fully comply with specified requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All grounding materials required shall be furnished new and undamaged, and in accordance with the following requirements.


B. RODS

1. Minimum 3/4 inch, 10-foot copper-clad standard type. The copper cladding shall be electrolytically bonded to the steel rod or bonded by a molten welding process. Cold rolled copper cladding is not acceptable.

C. CABLE, BARE

1. Soft drawn copper, Class B stranding, ASTM B8.

D. CABLE, INSULATED

1. Soft drawn copper, Class B stranding with green colored XLPE insulation, Type RW90.

E. EXOTHERMIC WELDS

1. Molds, cartridges, materials, and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer of the molds for the items to be welded using Cadweld® heavy-duty or Engineer approved equal. The same manufacturer shall furnish molds and powder.

F. COMPRESSION CONNECTORS

1. Tools and dies for irreversible compression system and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer. Burndy “Hyground” fittings or approved equals. The same manufacturer shall be used for tools, dies, and connectors.

G. All clamps, connectors, bolts, washers, nuts, and other hardware used with the grounding system shall be silicon bronze or stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. The grounding system shall be installed in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and per the contract drawings.

B. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

1. The enclosing cases, mounting frames, etc., of all switches, circuit breakers, control panels, motors, lighting fixtures, receptacles, and any other electrically operated or electrical equipment, as well as all metal conduit, cable trays, and other raceways, shall be effectively and permanently grounded with a separate copper grounding conductor of cross-section as required by IEEE and NESC and as indicated on the drawings.

C. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

1. The grounding conductor shall be of capacity sufficient to ensure continuity and continued effectiveness of the ground connections to carry fault currents.

2. Grounding conductors shall be as short and straight as possible, protected from mechanical injury and without splice or joint.

3. The equipment grounding conductor shall be run from a ground established at the source of supply to the equipment to be grounded, with the circuit conductors.

4. All grounding conductors shall be Class B, stranded, soft drawn copper, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

5. Cable tray or conduit shall not be used as the sole grounding means.

6. Grounding conductors shall be sized per the requirements of NEC Article 250.


3.2 GROUND GRID

A. OFFICE/STORAGE BUILDING GROUND GRID

1. The overall grounding arrangement shall be per Drawing 1-E6.40.

2. The main ground grid shall be #4/0 AWG minimum, stranded, soft drawn, bare copper cable. All electrical equipment and metallic structures shall be tied to the grounding network. Ground taps to building steel and major electrical equipment, including generators, transformers and switchgear, shall be #2/0 AWG minimum or as indicated on the drawings. Taps for structures such as stairways, framing, and minor electrical equipment shall be #2 AWG minimum or as otherwise designated on the plan drawings.

D. GROUND RODS

1. The location of ground rods is shown on the drawings.

E. LAYING OF GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

1. Grounding conductors shall be laid slack below grade at a depth of 18 inches unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

2. Ground cables in direct burial applications shall be laid down with sufficient slack to prevent damage from stretching during the back filling process.

3. Embedded ground cables shall be installed in such a way that movement of structures will not stretch or break the cables where the cables cross contraction joints.

F. GROUNDING STINGERS

1. Grounding conductors (stingers) required for building structure and equipment shall be tapped off the ground mat and stubbed up through the concrete floor slab. Conductor length above the slab shall be 10 feet minimum.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. All grounding connections shall be made in accordance with NEC Article 250.

B. Ground cable splices and joints, ground rod connections, and equipment bonding connections shall meet the requirements of IEEE 837, and shall be exothermic weld connections or irreversible high-compression connections, Cadweld "Exothermic" or Burndy "Hyground". Mechanical connectors will not be acceptable. Cable connections to bus bars shall be made with high-compression two-hole lugs.

C. BELOW GRADE

1. All ground connections below grade shall be made with exothermic welds (e.g. Cadweld) or compression type lugs (e.g. Burndy) installed with manufacturer approved dye and crimp tool with corrosion inhibitor.

D. CONNECTIONS TO STEEL

1. All connections to steel shall be made with compression type lug (e.g. Burndy) or exothermically welded (e.g. Cadweld). All compression or exothermic welds shall be made per manufacturer’s recommendations. Bolted connections shall be cleaned prior to installation.

E. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

1. Connections to equipment shall be bolted. Bolted connections shall be cleaned prior to installation. Grounding conductors shall be connected employing compression lugs and dye type crimpers. All mechanical fasteners used for grounding shall be compatible for the use with copper. Aluminum shall not be used.


F. SIZING OF GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

1. Connections shall be sized per the NEC. The minimum conductor size for connections to the ground grid shall be #2 AWG.

G. CONNECTION AT SOURCE

1. Ground conductors in power cable or ground wire in conduits shall be connected directly to the source equipment ground by mechanical bolted joint, and to motor frame or equipment enclosure and/or equipment ground bar.

H. CIRCUITS FROM AN MCC

1. Ground conductors in all power cables, or the green ground wire in conduits leaving motor starters, shall be connected to the ground system for each respective starter. Ground conductors in motor control centers, panels or other service equipment's incoming line cables shall be grounded.

I. CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS

1. Motor frames shall be drilled and tapped to install a Servit Post (e.g. Burndy) within the terminal box enclosure for connection of equipment grounding wires. The terminal box mounting screws shall not be used for this purpose. All motors shall be bonded to plant grounding system via the power feeder ground conductor.

J. SYSTEM NEUTRAL

1. Neutrals shall be grounded only at the source unless required otherwise by the NEC. The neutrals of service transformers shall be connected to the grounding system as shown by typical details on the drawings. On instrument circuits with a common neutral for several current or voltage transformers, care shall be taken to ground the neutral only once.

K. FUSES

1. Fuses shall not be used in grounded (neutral) conductors.

L. EQUIPMENT FRAMES

1. Frames of transformers, motor control centers, and other electrical apparatus shall be mechanically connected to the grounding system. Where indicated, equipment frames shall have multiple grounds. The equipment ground conductor in all circuits shall be connected to the frame or ground lug in the load centers and not the neutral bus. Equipment ground shall not be connected to a system neutral.

M. METALLIC RACEWAYS/TRAY

1. Cable tray and metal conduit systems shall be grounded with copper cable connections to the ground grid or to building steel.

N. MANHOLES

1. Manholes shall have NEMA 4-hole ground plates embedded at the top of each wall, with #4/0 AWG pigtails attached for external connection to the ground conductor routed along each duct bank.

O. DUCT BANK

1. The duct bank grounding shall be connected to the facility ground grid where indicated, to the grounds of all interconnecting raceways, and to grounding provisions in the manholes and junction boxes. Each duct bank shall include two embedded #4/0 AWG ground conductors.


P. CABLE SHIELDS

1. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, cable shields shall be grounded at one location only.

2. Power cable shield grounding shall be only at the source end unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

3. Instrument circuit shields shall be grounded to an isolated ground bar at the control panel end of the circuit.

Q. ABOVE GRADE CONNECTIONS

1. The acceptable method of above grade connections of ground cable is compression fittings with bolted connections and tools.

R. CONNECTION HARDWARE

1. Silicon bronze shall generally be used for current-carrying parts. Stainless steel shall generally be used otherwise.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION AND SIZING

A. SIZING

1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be sized per the NEC and as shown on the Drawings for circuits contained therein. The minimum size for equipment grounding conductors shall be #12 AWG. In no case may the grounding conductor size be smaller than required by the NEC.

B. COLOR IDENTIFICATION

1. The equipment grounding conductors, if insulated, shall be covered by green or green/yellow combination insulation.

C. NEUTRAL

1. For all power wiring, the white colored neutral may never be used as a grounding conductor or for any other purpose other than as a neutral.


A. INSPECTIONS

1. Contractor shall inspect existing connections at the CFFF prior to making new connections. Contractor shall regularly inspect crimp tool dies to ensure the dies are replaced when they exceed their usable life span.

B. GENERAL TESTS

1. The Contractor shall perform ground system integrity tests of all newly installed major equipment grounds, loops and rods before and after connection to the existing grounding system. Continuity test shall be performed between the ground grid and all major equipment frames and system neutrals. The test shall be the two-point method per IEEE 81. Signed test report results shall be provided to the City for all testing conducted by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 05 83 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers the installation of electrical equipment in the related section listed below.






SECTION 26 05 11 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 24 23 – 600V CLASS MOTOR CONTROL CENTER



A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the NEC - National Electrical Code, the NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, and the following standards where applicable:

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

NEIS National Electrical Installation Standards

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. Contractor shall provide the City written notice at least fourteen (14) days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services furnished by others.

1.5 GENERAL

A. Equipment specified to be installed under this section shall be erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the City.

B. The electrical equipment identified as being provided by the City will be furnished complete for installation by Contractor.

C. COORDINATION

1. When manufacturer's field services are provided by the equipment manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment manufacturer. Contractor shall give the City written notice at least fourteen (14) days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services furnished by others.

2. Contractor shall review equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria.



A. DELIVERY

1. When sills are required for electrical equipment, they shall be shipped ahead of the scheduled equipment delivery to permit installation before concrete is placed.

B. STORAGE

1. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected by Contractor in accordance with Section 01600 Material and Equipment, and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Equipment shall be protected by Contractor against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on earth or grass surfaces or come into contact with earth or grass. Contractor shall keep the equipment clean and dry at all times. Openings shall be plugged or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) during temporary storage.

C. HANDLING

1. Electrical equipment shall be moved by lifting, jacking, or skidding on rollers as described in the manufacturer's instructions. Special lifting harness or apparatus shall be used when required. Lifting and jacking points shall be used when identified on the equipment. Contractor shall have required unloading equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING

A. All installation work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. All material, equipment, and components specified to be installed according to this section shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA– NEIS Specification System. Where required in NECA 90, Commissioning Building Electrical Systems procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment.

C. Electrical equipment cubicles and vertical sections shall be installed plumb and level. Drawout equipment carriages, circuit breakers, and other removable components shall operate free and easy without binding or distortion.

D. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all indoor floor-mounted electrical equipment and control cabinets shall be installed on concrete equipment pads four (4) inches in height.

E. Motor control centers with integral floor sills shall be secured to concrete floors or equipment pads with anchor bolts.

F. Adequate bracing shall be provided for seismic forces. The bracing shall be designed to meet requirements for equipment installed in a facility with Seismic Class, Design Category and Risk Category per structural drawing notes.

6. All deposits of oil, grease, mud, dirt or debris shall be cleaned from the electrical equipment following installation and field wiring. A detergent water based solution, or other liquid cleaners not harmful to material or equipment finishes, shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 24 23 – 600 VOLT CLASS MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers the installation and equipment for an expansion MCC section to an existing motor control center (MCC). Motor control centers shall meet the following requirements, and the design conditions and features specified herein.

B. EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS

1. Motor control centers shall be designated and shall be located as follows:

Tag number(s) MCC-2 Section 10

Motor control center designation(s)

CFFF Feeder and Future Loads






SECTION 26 05 11 – ELECTRICAL


SECTION 26 29 24 –VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

SECTION 40 61 11 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM


A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with:

NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.

NEMA ICS 2.3 Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers.

NEMA ICS 18 Motor Control Centers.

UL 845 Standard for Safety Motor Control Centers.

A. Surge protective devices (SPD) shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following standards:

ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

C62.45-1992 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

C62.11 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits (>1 kV).

NFPA 70 National Electric Code.

MIL STD 220C Department of Defense Test Method Standard Method of Insertion Loss Measurement.


UL 1449 Standard for Safety Surge Protective Devices - Third Edition (Listed as a Type 2 Surge Protective Device).

1283 Standard for Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters, (Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter).

C. Equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL or a nationally recognized third-party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing and labelling shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. In the event, no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing; an independent test shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense. Before testing, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure that will be used in evaluating the equipment.


A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA





4. Multiple submittals for this section will be allowed provided that a marked up copy of the specification section is included with each submittal.

5. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the motor control center shall be submitted. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

a. Elevation, plans, and weight.

b. Unit wiring diagrams showing devices, connections, and terminal designations.

c. Interconnection diagrams.

d. Control schematic diagrams.


e. Circuit breaker coordination curves for all breakers including, the main breaker(s), the largest circuit breaker utilized in a combination starter and the smallest circuit breaker provided as a part of the motor control center assembly.

f. Surge protective device submittals shall include drawings (including unit dimensions, weights, component and connection locations, mounting provisions, and wiring diagrams), equipment manuals that detail the installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the specified unit(s), and manufacturer’s descriptive bulletins and product sheet.

g. Confirmation of compliance with the seismic requirements for equipment installed in a facility with Seismic Class, Design Category and Risk Category per structural drawing notes. See structural sheets G3.0, G3.1, G3.2.

h. Bill of materials

i. Anchoring details

C. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

1. Manufacturer shall submit to the City for approval their standard factory acceptance test procedure. This procedure shall be submitted prior to start of manufacture of the equipment.

2. Notification of Factory Testing a minimum fourteen (14) days prior to tests with option for attendance by the City.

3. Manufacturer shall submit factory acceptance test reports to the City before the equipment is shipped.

D. INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

1. Manufacturer shall submit to the City for approval their standard field installation test procedure. As a minimum procedure shall ensure equipment is tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA–NEIS Specification System, and follows in NECA 90, “Commissioning Building Electrical Systems” procedures prior to energizing equipment as applicable. The procedure shall be submitted to meet Commissioning at testing schedule requirements specified in Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements.

2. Manufacturer’s written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed.

E. FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Final versions of all shop drawings shall be submitted in native file format (i.e. AutoCAD).

F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS









1.5 GENERAL

A. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless approved by the City.

B. DIMENSIONAL RESTRICTIONS

1. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers, and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The supplier shall review the Contract Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer.

C. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

1. Equipment supplier shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.

2. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with applicable governing standards. Individual parts shall be manufactured to UL and NEMA standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except when required by tests.

D. NAMEPLATES

1. Nameplates with unit description and designation of each control or indicating device shall be provided on all hinged doors. Nameplates shall be black and white laminated phenolic material of suitable size, and shall be engraved with 3/8 inch high letters for compartment identity 3/16 inch letters for other information. The engraving shall extend through the black exterior lamination to the white center.

2. Each control device and each control wire terminal block connection inside the units shall be identified with permanent nameplates or painted legends to match the identification on the manufacturing’s wiring diagram.

E. WARRANTY

1. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum Five (5) Year Limited Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the surge protective device.

F. SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS

This equipment will be connected to a power system with characteristics as specified below:

Voltage rating: 480 V

Frequency: 60 Hz

Type: Wye, 3-phase, 4-wire with solidly grounded neutral


1.6 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged, as specified herein, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Spare parts shall be delivered to The City as directed. Spare parts shall be provided as follows:

Spare Parts Quantity

Fuses 100% replacement set

Indicating lamps 100% replacement set


A. Shipping, Handling and Storage shall be in accordance manufacturer’s recommendations and with Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.

B. Motor control centers shall be equipped to be handled by a crane. Where cranes are not available, control centers shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. The Motor Control Center equipment shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, without exception.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Substitutions shall not be allowed.

2.2 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC-2 SECTION 10)

MCC-2 section 10 shall be an addition to an existing MCC, herein identified as MCC-2, and shall conform to the schematics, layouts, and wiring diagrams in the contract drawings in addition to the following specifications.

A. EXISTING MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC-2) INFORMATION

1. MCC-2 is an existing 9 section (6 front, 3 back) Motor Control Center located in the CFNSC Electrical Building.

Motor Control Center Details:

Power System Type: Wye, 3-phase, 4-wire w/ grounded neutral

Voltage: 480 Volts / 60 Hertz

Available Fault Current: (Pending Short Circuit Study)

Master Nameplate: 1 Line(s)

Unit Nameplate Type: Phenolic - White letters on black

Wiring Type: B-T Control and Power Terminal Blocks

Wiring Diagram Location: Central location

Serial Number of Existing MCC-2: 6502385674/500

B. INCOMING LINE DETAILS

MCC Connection Type: Addition to Existing MCC-2 Add to Existing Location: Left Side Of Existing MCC-2


C. BUS DETAILS

Main Bus Rating: 800A Main Bus Material: Copper / Tin Plated Main Bus Bracing: 42kA (rms symmetrical) Horizontal Ground Bus Size: ¼” X 1” Horizontal Ground Bus Plating: Tin plated Copper Horizontal Ground Bus Location: Top Vertical Ground Bus Type: Plug-in Copper Ground Lug Size: None Supplied Outgoing Equipment Ground Lug: Yes

D. ENCLOSURE DETAILS

Enclosure Type: 1G - with Gasketed Doors and Bottom Plates Section Depth: Front Mounted, 15" Deep Section Height: 90" High Stab Opening Protection: Manual Shutters Isolation Barriers: Yes Wireway Tie Bar: Yes Space Heater Voltage: 120V Space Heater Thermostat: 1 Per Section External Mounting Channel: Yes Total Shipping Block(s): 1 Total Section(s): 1 Total Unit(s): 6

E. SECTION MODIFICATIONS

Section Number: 10 Section Width: 25" with 9" wireway 600 Amp Vertical Bus: Yes Section 10 Modifications (Quantity/Mods)

(1) Space Heater Disconnect, single pole Bul. 1492 circuit breaker in the space heater circuit.

F. UNIT INFORMATION

Description Unit Features

Unit Loc.10A Del Prog: FT1 Unit ID: 1 FCB - 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB) Rating 400A

Catalog Number: 2193FT-DKC-50TKM-81A500-754 Total Space Factor = 2 Circuit Breaker: 65kA at 480V (400) with Frame Rating

of 400A (K6H Frame) Frame-Mounted (fixed) Unit, 400A Trip Lugs Supplied: -81, 500 kcmil Size Wire, 1 Cables Per

Phase


Options Shunt Trip for tripping Circuit Breaker from remote 120V, 60Hz source (-754) Engineered Spec(s)/Modification(s) (1) 140G Ground Fault, Electronic LSIG, Frame Sizes H, J, K Note - 700-HR52TA17 TIMING RELAY FOR 42TP1 (1) Engineered Modification and/or Custom Diagram

Unit Loc.10E Del Prog: SCII Unit ID: 2 DOOR - Blank Unit Door

Catalog Number: 2100-BK10 Total Space Factor = 1

Unit Loc.10G Del Prog: SCII Unit ID: 2 DOOR - Blank Unit Door


Unit Loc.10J Del Prog: SCII Unit ID: 2 DOOR - Blank Unit Door


Unit Loc.10L Del Prog: SCII Unit ID: 2 DOOR - Blank Unit Door


Unit Loc.B10 Del Prog: SCII Unit ID: 3 ENSW - Stratix 5700 06-Port

Catalog Number: 2100-ESW06K-BHWLAA Total Space Factor = 0 Lite Stratix 5700 Firmware Both Ethernet Adapters and Power Adapters (w/Unit Mtg)

Ethernet Information: Device Type IP Address Subnet Mask 2100-ESW City Shall Provide 255.255.255.0 Ethernet Switch Port Capacity:

Uplink Switch group

Section Consumed

Switch Ports

Available Switch Ports

Consumed Ethernet Adapters

Consumed Ethernet

Adapter Ports

Available Ethernet Adapter Ports

1 1 4 0 0 0

G. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Each 25 inch wide standard section shall have all necessary hardware and busing for modular plug-in units to be added and moved around.

2. All unused space shall be covered by hinged blank doors and equipped to accept future units. Removable rear plates shall be sectionalized so that it is unnecessary to handle any plate larger than the section width or one-half the section height.

3. Removable circuit breaker and motor starter units shall be provided with a mechanical interlock to prevent insertion or withdrawal when in the "on" position.

4. All internal wires shall be labeled at each termination. Terminals shall also be labeled.


5. Feeder circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type and shall be manually operated, with quick-make, quick-break, trip-free toggle mechanism. Bimetallic thermal elements shall withstand sustained overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and without affecting calibration. Thermal elements shall trip the breaker at 125 percent of trip rating. The instantaneous elements of 225 ampere frame and larger breakers shall be adjustable and shall be set at 800 percent of trip rating.

6. Feeder circuit breakers 225 amperes and larger shall be furnished with a solid-state trip unit complete with built-in current transformers. The ampere rating of the trip unit shall be rated as indicated on the Drawings and sized for 100 percent rating. The trip unit shall have adjustable settings for continuous amperes, and short-time pickup. The trip unit shall be provided with additional short delay trip time adjustment for better system coordination.

7. All iron and steel surfaces, except stainless steel and machined surfaces, shall be plated or shop painted with the manufacturer's standard coating.

8. Field painting, other than touchup painting, shall not be required. A sufficient quantity of additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished to permit field touchup of damaged coatings.

9. The heaters shall be controlled by a thermostat set to cut out when the temperature rises to 70°F and to cut in when the temperature falls below 70°F and shall have capacity to maintain the section's interior temperature above dew point. Heaters shall be rated 120 volts ac, 200 Watts.

10. MCC-2 Section 10 shall be installed on a 3.54 inch housekeeping pad and be level with existing MCC-2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation will be in accordance with the Section 26 05 83 Electrical Equipment Installation.

3.2 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS

1. Manufacturer shall provide the City a copy of their factory acceptance test procedure. The procedure should include as a minimum rack in out, trip test, primary current injection, high potential and other tests for Motor Control Centers in conformance with NEMA ICS 2.3 and UL listing.

2. The complete control center shall be tested at the factory. All circuits, including power and control, shall be given dielectric tests in accordance with NEMA ICS 2. Certified copies of the test results shall be submitted to the City before the equipment is shipped.

3. Manufacturer shall notify the City a minimum fourteen (14) days in advance of scheduled shop tests, and provide option for the City to attend.


A. INSTALLATION CHECK

1. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation.


2. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer.

3. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; Manufacturer’s representative report shall document that all starters have operated satisfactorily under full load conditions, including spares.

B. INSTALLATION SUPERVISION

1. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the equipment installation.

2. Manufacturers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing Contractor's erection or installation procedures. The equipment manufacturer will be provided with written notification minimum fourteen (14) business days prior to the need for such services.

END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers all low voltage motor controllers and associated equipment.


1. Motor Controllers shall be designated and shall be located as follows:

Tag number(s) HRP-1 HRP-2 VCP-1

Description Holding Reuse Pump 1 Holding Reuse Pump 2 Vacuum Pump 1

Location Control Panel CP-7 Control Panel CP-7 Control Panel CP-7

Type FVNR w/ E300 FVNR w/ E300 FVNR w/ E300

Motor 10 HP 10 HP 20 HP

Tag number(s) HRB-1 HRB-2 SRP-1

Description Holding Reuse Blower 1 Holding Reuse Blower 2 Sampling Pump Reuse 1

Location Control Panel CP-7 Control Panel CP-7 Separately Mounted

Type FVNR w/ E300 FVNR w/ E300 FVNR W/ Electronic OL

Motor ¾ HP ¾ HP 1 HP

Tag number(s) HTTS-1 HTTS-2

Description Holding Tank Traveling Screen 1

Holding Tank Traveling Screen 2

Location Separately Mounted Separately Mounted

Type FVNR W/ Electronic OL FVNR W/ Electronic OL

Motor ½ HP ½ HP






SECTION 22 14 25 – CENTRIFUGAL END SUNCTION PUMPS



SECTION 40 78 00 – PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS




A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI, UL, and IEEE, and shall be designed for installation in accordance with the NEC.

ANSI, American National Standards Institute.

NEC-NFPA70, National Electrical Code (NEC)

NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

UL 489 UL Standard For Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches And Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 508 UL Standard For Safety Industrial Control Equipment

B. The equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL or a nationally recognized third-party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of Contractor. In the event no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test shall be conducted at Contractor’s expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure to the City.

When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority to undergo inspection and testing at the manufacturer's place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price. Before the inspection is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the inspection procedure to be used.

Jurisdiction for this project is the City of Tacoma. Contractor shall verify that equipment provided is in conformance with the listing guidelines per City of Tacoma requirements.





If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The number in the margin shall refer a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The City shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications.

Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.






1. Information covering all materials and equipment shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Section 01300 – Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment as follows:

a. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the specification paragraph for which the equipment applies.

b. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out.

c. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and materials descriptive literature with the Drawings or Specifications.

D. SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA

1. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the work performed by the Contractor, shall be submitted in accordance with the Section 01300 Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following with additional requirements as provided by equipment type below as applicable:

a. Drawings and data.

b. Nameplate legends.

c. Bill of Materials.

d. Anchoring details.

e. Samples.

E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS









1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. The manufacturer shall provide spare parts for each type and size of motor controller supplied. The spare parts shall include at least one (1) complete set of all plug-in components for each size and type of motor controller, and shall include the following:

1. Power fuses.

2. Control fuses.

3. Indicating lights, pushbuttons, control devices.

4. Communications Modules

5. Other field-replaceable component parts, e.g. intake air filters, cooling fans, or fan assemblies.

B. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged, as specified herein, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the City as directed.


A. Shipping, Handling and Storage shall be in accordance manufacturers recommendations and with the Material and Equipment Product Requirements section.

1.7 GENERAL

A. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the City.

B. COORDINATION

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the collection of motor nameplate data from the motor suppliers and providing to the manufacturer of the motor controllers. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure compatibility between motor controllers and motors.

C. DIMENSIONAL RESTRICTIONS

Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The Contractor shall review the Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by the City.

D. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

1. Equipment Manufacturer shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.

2. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with applicable governing standards. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.


E. NAMEPLATES

1. Nameplates with the description and designation of each control or indicating device shall be provided. Unless specified otherwise, each enclosure shall be provided with a nameplate bearing the unit designation as indicated above. Nameplates shall be black and white laminated phenolic material of suitable size, and shall be engraved with 3/8 inch high letters for the drive designation and 3/16 inch letters for other information. The engraving shall extend through the black exterior lamination to the white center.

2. Each control device and each control wire terminal block connection inside the enclosure shall be identified with permanent nameplates or painted legends to match the identification on the manufacturer's wiring diagram.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. As listed in sub-paragraphs herein.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 SEPARATELY MOUNTED COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER

Starters shall be 3 phase, 60 Hz contactors with overloads, a 120 volts ac coil, a dry type control transformer, and a molded-case circuit breaker. Control transformers shall be mounted with the removable starters and shall have capacity for all simultaneous loads. Control transformers shall have both primary leads fused, one secondary lead fused, and one secondary lead grounded.

A. ENCLOSURE

1. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 rated for wet areas.

a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out.

b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. B. OPERATING HANDLE

1. With the door closed the handle mechanism allows complete ON/OFF control of the unit disconnect and clear indication of the disconnect status.

2. Circuit breaker and MCP operators includes a separate TRIPPED position.

3. Mechanical interlock to prevent to prevent the opening of the door when the disconnect is in the ON position with a defeater mechanism for use by authorized personnel.

4. Mechanical interlock to prevent the placement of the disconnect in the ON position with the door open with a defeater mechanism for use by authorized personnel.

5. Padlockable in the OFF position.

C. CONTACTOR

1. Contactors shall be NEMA rated and have an 8 hour current rating in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Contactors of reversing or multispeed starters shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked.

2. Double-break silver alloy contacts.

3. An auxiliary contact kit with one NO and one NC sets of contacts.


D. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER

1. 120V secondary.

2. Fused on primary and secondary side.

3. Sized for 140 percent of required load.

E. MOTOR OVERLOAD

1. Overload shall be electronic overload type with manual reset, Allen-Bradley E1, or equal. Overload shall be sized for the connected motor.

a. Interlock and auxiliary contacts, wired to terminal blocks:

b. Holding circuit contact, normally open.

F. CONTROLS

1. Hand-Off-Auto Switch: Where indicated on drawings, motor controllers shall have a 3 position, maintained, switch for Hand/Off/Auto control. Switches shall include the number and type of contacts shown on drawings and shall include a minimum of one spare contact per position.

2. Pilot Lights: Where indicated on drawings, motor controllers shall have 120 V pilot lights. Pilot Lights shall have either a “red” lens for “Run” status indication, or a “green” lens for “Stop” status indication. Pilot lights shall be LED, push-to-test. Incandescent 120V pilot light type is not allowed.

3. Reset: All overloads shall have a front mounted Reset pushbutton to reset overloads to running condition.

4. Control switches and pilot lights shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oil tight construction. Pilot lights shall be full voltage, push-to-test type with LED lamps.

5. Devices shall be accessible with the door closed.

G. ADDITIONAL

1. Contractor shall match control transformers, overloads, heaters, and minimum sizes of starters to equipment furnished, which may differ from the estimated values indicated on the Drawings. Overload relay elements shall be sized to reflect reduced motor current caused by load-side power factor correction capacitors.

2.3 FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING STARTERS IN CP-7

Starters shall be 3 phase, 60 Hz contactors with electronic overloads.

A. ENCLOSURE

1. Enclosures are covered in Section 40 67 11 - Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances.

B. MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR

1. Motor circuit protectors shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M, without exception.

2. Contractor shall ensure motor circuit protector is sized appropriately for the connected load.

C. CONTACTOR

1. Contactors shall be NEMA rated and have an 8 hour current rating in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Contactors of reversing or multispeed starters shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked.

2. Double-break silver alloy contacts.


3. An auxiliary contact kit with one NO and one NC sets of contacts.

D. MOTOR OVERLOAD

1. Heater-less overload protection shall be provided by three current sensors monitored by a microprocessor. The overload device shall also include phase loss and unbalance protection, trip class selection, Class II ground fault protection, and manual reset. The overload capabilities shall be as follows:

a. The overload shall monitor current, voltage, and ground faults.

b. Overloads shall mount on DIN separately from the contactor.

c. Network communications shall be accomplished through installation of a communication module. Allen-Bradley Part # 193-ECM-ETR, without exception.

d. All E300 Control modules shall be Allen-Bradley part# 193-EIO-63-24D, without exception.

e. EtherNet/IP with Device Level Ring (DLR) support;

f. The overload shall be an Allen-Bradley E300, without exception, and as follows:

1. NEMA Size 1 and below: 193-ESM-VIG-30-T

2. NEMA Size 2: 193-ESM-VIG-60-T

g. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying above part numbers prior to submitting.

E. CONTROLS

1. Hand-Off-Auto Switch: Where indicated on drawings, motor controllers shall have a 3 position, maintained, switch for Hand/Off/Auto control. Switches shall include the number and type of contacts shown on drawings and shall include a minimum of one spare contact per position.

2. Pilot Lights: Where indicated on drawings, motor controllers shall have 120 V pilot lights. Pilot Lights shall have either a “red” lens for “Run” status indication, a “green” lens for “Stop” status indication, or a “Amber” lens for “Fault” status indication. Pilot lights shall be LED, push-to-test. Incandescent 120V pilot light type is not allowed.

3. Reset: All overloads shall have a front mounted Reset pushbutton to reset overloads to running condition.

4. Control switches and pilot lights shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oil tight construction. Pilot lights shall be full voltage, push-to-test type with LED lamps.

5. Control relays shall be per section 40 78 00 - Panel Mounted Instruments.

F. ADDITIONAL

1. Contractor shall match control transformers, overloads, heaters, and minimum sizes of starters to equipment furnished, which may differ from the estimated values indicated on the Drawings. Overload relay elements shall be sized to reflect reduced motor current caused by load-side power factor correction capacitors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation will be in accordance with the Section 26 05 11 General Electrical and 40 61 11 instrumentation and Control Requirements.

3.2 TESTING

A. Perform factory and installation tests in accordance with applicable NEC, NEMA and UL requirements.


B. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

1. Factory acceptance testing shall be per section 40 61 11.


A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation.

B. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer.

3.4 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Training shall be per section 40 61 11 and related sections.

END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers pulse width modulated (PWM) type Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) for the equipment and locations as specified. VFDs shall meet the design conditions and features specified herein.


1. VFD’s shall be designated and shall be located as follows:

Tag number(s) SSP-1 - VFD SSP-2 - VFD

VFD designation Spring Supply Pump 1 Spring Supply Pump 2

Location of VFD’s Control Panel CP-8 Control Panel CP-8

Control Variable Speed Variable Speed

Motor 7.5 HP 7.5 HP









A. The variable frequency drive shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI, UL, and IEEE, and shall be designed for installation in accordance with the NEC.

IEEE C62.41 IEEE Recommended Practice On Surge Voltages In Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

IEEE 519 Recommended Practices And Requirements For Harmonic Control In Electrical Power Systems

IEEE C57.110 Recommended Practice For Establishing Liquid-Filled And Dry- Type Power And Distribution Transformer Capability When Supplying Non-Sinusoidal Load Currents

NEMA MG1 American National Standard Motors And Generators

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

UL 489 UL Standard For Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches And Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 508 UL Standard For Safety Industrial Control Equipment

UL 508C UL Standard For Safety Power Conversion Equipment


B. The equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL or a nationally recognized third-party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of Contractor. In the event no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test shall be conducted at Contractor’s expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure to the City.


A. Submit in accordance with section 01300, Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures and section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control.

B. COORDINATION STUDY DATA

1. A coordination study of the power distribution system will be conducted in accordance with section 26 05 11 General Electrical Requirements. The initial equipment drawing submittal shall include the circuit breaker coordination curves for the main breaker(s).

C. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

1. Factory Acceptance test shall be in as specified in section 40 61 11.

D. INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION AND TEST

1. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and tested.

E. FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Final versions of all shop drawings shall be submitted in native file format (i.e. AutoCAD).

F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS


a. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual for each size of variable frequency drive.

b. Manufacturer's standard manuals for each size and type of bypass contactor, transformer, line reactor, and filter.

c. Schematics, wiring diagrams, and panel drawings in conformance with construction record.

d. Model numbers and up-to-date cost data for spare parts.

e. Troubleshooting procedures, with a cross-reference between symptoms and corrective recommendations.

f. Connection data to permit removal and installation of recommended smallest field-replaceable parts.

g. Information on testing of power supplies and printed circuit boards and an explanation of the drive diagnostics.




G. EXTENDED WARRANTY

1. Contractor shall supply copy of an equipment warranty covering items against defects for a period of two years valid from the date of VFD installation and test certification,

1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. The drive manufacturer shall provide spare parts for each type and size of drive supplied. The spare parts shall include at least one (1) complete set of all plug-in components for each size and type of drive, and shall include the following:

1. Power fuses.

2. Control fuses.

3. Indicating lights, pushbuttons, control devices.

4. Rectifier power semiconductors.

5. Inverter power semiconductors.

6. One (1) of each type printed circuit board and gate firing board.

7. Communications Modules

8. I/O Modules

9. HMI Display Modules

10. Other field-replaceable component parts, e.g. intake air filters, cooling fan motors or fan assemblies.

B. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged, as specified herein, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the City as directed.


A. Shipping, Handling and Storage shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and with the Material and Equipment Product Requirements section.

1.7 GENERAL

A. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the City.

B. GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS

1. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated as specified in this section and as shown on the schematics and one line diagrams on the Drawings.

2. One (1) variable frequency drive, complete with all required control components, shall be furnished for each motor.

3. VFD(s) shall be designed, manufactured, supplied, and warranted as a complete system by the VFD manufacturer. Fabrication and assembly of the drive system not directly controlled by the VFD manufacturer will not be acceptable.

C. COORDINATION

1. The design of the variable frequency drive shall be coordinated with the driven equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the collection of data and the design effort to limit harmonics to the levels specified.

2. The manufacturer of the driven equipment shall be responsible for furnishing all required data to match variable frequency drive to driven equipment.


Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating variable frequency drive equipment amongst the driven equipment suppliers to ensure all drives are a product of the same manufacturer.

D. DIMENSIONAL RESTRICTIONS

Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The Contractor shall review the Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by the City.

E. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

1. Equipment Manufacturer shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.

2. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with applicable governing standards. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.

F. NAMEPLATES

1. Nameplates with the description and designation of each control or indicating device shall be provided. Unless specified otherwise, each drive enclosure shall be provided with a nameplate bearing the unit designation as indicated above. Nameplates shall be black and white laminated phenolic material of suitable size, and shall be engraved with 3/8 inch high letters for the drive designation and 3/16 inch] letters for other information. The engraving shall extend through the black exterior lamination to the white center.

2. Each control device and each control wire terminal block connection inside the enclosure shall be identified with permanent nameplates or painted legends to match the identification on the manufacturer's wiring diagram.

G. DESCRIPTION

1. The VFD shall produce an adjustable ac voltage/frequency output and shall be equipped with an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz despite incoming voltage variations.

2. Drives for motors rated below 100 horsepower, shall be of the pulse-width modulated type and shall consist of a full-wave diode or gated-open SCR bridge. The rectifier shall convert incoming fixed voltage and fixed frequency to a fixed dc voltage. The pulse-width modulation technology shall be of the space vector type, implemented in a microprocessor that generates a sine-coded output voltage.

3. The drive inverter output shall be generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) which shall be controlled by six identical base driver circuits. The drive shall not induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst case RMS motor line current measured at rated speed, torque, and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for pure sine wave operation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. All drives shall be pulse-width modulated type, as manufactured by Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 525 Series or Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series without exception. Design and drawings are based on the Powerflex 525 Drives.


B. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. No substitutions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. MOUNTING

1. Drives shall be panel mounted in CP-8. General location is shown on contract drawings. Panel manufacturer shall be responsible for final location and shall ensure all manufacture installation instructions and clearances are followed.

B. FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY

1. Input line reactors, fuses, circuit breakers, and filters, where required, shall be mounted within the same enclosure as the drive, without exception. Isolation/voltage matching transformers, where required, may be enclosed separately from the remaining drive equipment.

2. The variable frequency drive system shall be designed to fit in the space indicated on the Drawings.

C. WIRING

1. Internal cabinet wiring shall be neatly installed in wireways or with wire ties where wireways are not practical. Where wireway is used, they are to be mounted to the panel surface with a continuous run of 3M brand, or equal, industrial two-sided adhesive strip. For 12 AWG wire sizes and smaller, and in bundles of six or less, wire tie-down square mounting straps shall be permitted. Tie-down mounts shall be installed at 8” increments or less. All mounting surfaces shall be pre-cleaned with isopropyl alcohol to ensure proper adhesion over the life of the equipment.

2. Terminal blocks shall be non-brittle, interlocking, track-mounted type, complete with a marking strip, covers, and pressure connectors. Screw terminals will not be acceptable. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits, plus one ground for each shielded cable.

In freestanding panels, 8 inches of clearance shall be provided between terminals and the panel base for conduit and wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with the identification on the submittal drawings. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, clearly labeled, and located for ease of maintenance.

3. All grounding wires shall be attached to the sheet metal enclosure with a ring tongue terminal. The surface of the sheet metal shall be prepared to ensure good conductivity and corrosion protection.

4. Wires shall not be kinked or spliced and shall be color coded or marked on both ends. The markings or color coding shall agree with the submittal drawings.

5. With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be stranded copper, insulated for at least 600 volts, with a moisture-resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for at least 90�C.

D. ENCLOSURES

1. Enclosures shall be per section 40 67 11 Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances

E. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

1. All printed circuit boards shall be sprayed on both sides with a conformal coating.


The conformal coating shall be a part of the VFD manufacturing process and shall be selectively applied to the circuit board connections only. Heat sinks and resistors on the circuit board shall not be coated.

2. All plug-in type boards shall be mechanically held at the circuit board connector. Compression fit only at the connector will not be acceptable.

F. SHOP PAINTING

1. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined surfaces and stainless steel, shall be shop cleaned in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations, and finished with the drive manufacturer's standard coating.

2. Dry film thickness of the finish coat shall be at least 4 mils. Field painting, other than touch up, will not be required. A sufficient quantity of additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished for field touch up of damaged coatings.

2.3 ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS

A. AC LINE REACTORS

1. Each six-pulse VFD, where isolation/voltage matching transformers are not used, shall be supplied with an input ac line reactor.

2. AC line reactors shall be designed to address performance issues of NEMA MG1 20.55 and to provide proper transient protection of the VFD input power devices.

3. AC line reactors shall be factory mounted and wired within the VFD enclosure. AC line reactors shall be K-rated per IEEE C57.110 and shall be TCI Model KLR, or equal.

B. OUTPUT DV/DT FILTERS

1. Output dV/dT filters shall be provided when motor leads exceed 150 feet in length.

2.4 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. PERFORMANCE

1. The variable frequency drive controller shall be of sufficient capacity and shall produce a quality output waveform for stepless motor control from 10 to 100 percent of base speed. The variable frequency drive shall be suitable for loads and shall have voltage ratings as follows:

Unit Designations Spring Supply Pump 1 SSP-1 Spring Supply Pump 2 SSP-2

Load type Variable Speed Variable Speed

Input voltage 480 volt, 3 phase 480 volt, 3 phase

Motor Size 7.5 HP 7.5 HP

2. The variable frequency drive shall be suitable for operation at an elevation below 3,300 ft., and shall meet the following ratings and parameters:

Input frequency 60 Hz

Input voltage and frequency variation

+10 percent voltage variation, ±2 Hz; imbalance, 2 percent maximum.

Continued operation with additional momentary 25 percent voltage dip of 0.5 second duration from nominal input voltage level.


Minimum drive efficiency 95 percent at 100 percent speed, 90 percent at 60 percent speed.

Ambient temperature 0 to 40ºC.

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 percent non-condensing.

Displacement Power Factor 95 percent or higher throughout the entire operating speed range, measured at drive input terminals.

Drive service factor 1.0.

Overcurrent capability 110% Overload capability for up to 60 s, 150% for up to 3 s

Volts/Hz ratio Voltage varies as the square of frequency over the entire range of the unit for variable torque drives, linear over the entire range of the unit for constant torque drives; except under voltage boost condition.

Acceleration/deceleration time Adjustable over a range that meets the requirements of the drive equipment.

Output speed regulation 0.5 percent.

Output frequency stability 0.5 percent of nominal.

B. ADJUSTMENTS

1. The following drive adjustments shall be provided:

a. Maximum speed.

b. Minimum speed.

c. Linear acceleration time.

d. Linear deceleration time.

e. Volts/Hz ratio; linear, squared, and automatic settings.

f. Voltage boost.

g. Process follower gain, offset, and bias.

h. Torque limit.

i. Critical frequency avoidance with adjustable bandwidth.

C. FAULT PROTECTION

1. Design of the power circuit shall include provisions for protection against fault conditions as follows:

a. Input Protection

1) The drive assembly shall be UL 508C listed. A UL Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted to confirm product compliance with UL 508C and to indicate the short circuit current rating. The short circuit current rating shall meet or exceed the available short circuit current indicated on the Drawings.

2) Solid state instantaneous overcurrent trip set at 180 percent.

3) Adjustable overvoltage and undervoltage protection with automatic restart.

4) Phase loss and reverse phase trip with manual restart.


b. Internal Protection

1) AC line, phase-to-phase transient voltage surge suppression utilizing metal oxide varistors. Drive shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62.41.

2) Power device snubbers.

3) Power devices rated 2.5 times line voltage.

4) Instantaneous overcurrent.

5) Static overspeed (overfrequency) protection.

6) DC bus overvoltage trip.

7) Components and labeling that comply with UL 508 requirements. Drives shall be equipped with an automatic discharge circuit to deplete the charge on the DC capacitor bank to less than 50 volts within 60 seconds after main input power is removed. Labels indicating derivative voltage sources and required wait time for servicing after power removal shall be placed on all applicable enclosures.

8) Individual transistor overtemperature and overcurrent protection.

9) Control logic circuit malfunction indication.

c. Output Protection.

1) Inverse-time motor overload protection adjustable from 10 percent to 100 percent.

2) Overvoltage protection.

3) Overfrequency protection.

4) Short circuit protection (three phase, phase to phase, and ground fault protection).

5) Protection against opening or shorting of motor leads.

6) Static overspeed protection.

7) Stall protection on overload with inverse time overcurrent trip, adjustable current limit from 10 percent to 120 percent.

2.5 CONTROLS

A. FEATURES

1. Each drive shall include the following features in addition to those indicated on the Drawings:

a. A door mounted membrane keypad with integral two (2) line, 24 character minimum LCD display that is capable of controlling the VFD and setting drive parameters. The keypad module shall be programmed with factory set drive parameters in nonvolatile EEPROM or FLASH memory and shall be resettable in the field through the keypad. Allen-Bradley part# 22-HIM-C25 with cables and accessories for mounting.

b. Control switches and pilot lights shall be provided as indicated on the schematic diagrams. Manual-automatic and start-stop controls included as features of the drive keypad shall be password protected or disabled to prevent override of control switches and safety interlocks shown on the schematic diagrams.

c. Control switches and pilot lights shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oil tight construction. Pilot lights shall be full voltage, push-to-test type with LED lamps.

d. Microprocessor-based regulator. Nonvolatile memory modules shall have a useful life of at least twenty (20) years without requiring battery or module replacement.


e. Manual speed adjustment.

f. Speed indication - calibrated in percent rpm.

g. Control circuits of not more than 24vdc supplied by internal control power supply per division 40 section.

h. 7 digital inputs minimum, 6 must be programmable for control and feedback to PLC.

i. 2 analog inputs, 4 – 20mA for feedback to PLC.

j. 2 digital outputs form A, 1 digital output form B or control of relays and indicating lights.

k. Automatic controller shutdown on overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, motor overtemperature and other drive fault conditions. Controller shutdown shall be manually reset type. Terminals shall be provided for control wiring from motor temperature switches, or a motor protection relay located in the drive enclosure.

l. Diagnostic indicators that pinpoint failure and fault conditions. Indicators shall be manually reset to restore operation after abnormal shutdown.

m. Drive fault and run status contacts for remote indication, rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac.

n. Speed droop feature, which reduces the speed of the drive on transient overloads. The drive shall return to set speed after the transient is removed. If the acceleration or deceleration rates are too rapid for the moment of inertia of the load, the drive shall automatically compensate to prevent drive trip.

o. Individual adjustable speed profile settings for start, stop, entry, slope, and minimum and maximum speed points.

p. Coast, controlled ramp, or dc injection selectable modes of stopping.

q. Adjustable PWM carrier frequency. The inverter output section shall be provided with adjustable PWM carrier frequency from 500 Hz to at least 8 kHz.

r. Noise level of installed equipment shall not exceed 85 dB, as measured by an appropriate calibrated instrument. The required sound level limit shall be met at a minimum of four (4) locations, each not more than 3 feet above the floor and not more than 10 feet from the equipment. This requirement shall apply to all drives, motors, filters, reactors, and transformers supplied with the drive.

B. DIAGNOSTICS

1. Diagnostic indicators on the face of the drive shall display the type of fault responsible for drive shutdown, warning, or failure. If two (2) or more faults occur simultaneously, the diagnostic segment shall record or indicate each condition. The drive shall be capable of storing six (6) events.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation will be in accordance with the Section 26 05 11 General Electrical Requirements.

3.2 TESTING

A. All power switching components shall be pre-run under anticipated operating temperature and load conditions. Any alternative testing procedures shall be submitted and pre-approved before proceeding.


B. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

1. Factory acceptance testing shall be per section 40 61 11.


A. Employ and pay for services of the equipment manufacturer's field service representative to:

1. Inspect equipment covered by these specifications.

2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks.

3. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks; provide a checklist of all inspections.

4. Manufacturer’s representative shall support and confirm Ethernet communications connection to the Plant Control System (PCS) in accordance with Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System. This shall include setting the VFD’s IP address provided by the city.

3.4 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Training shall be per section 40 61 11 and related sections.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 27 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 27 10 00 - BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The telecommunications cabling and pathway system horizontal cabling, horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data (including LAN) for the Office/Storage Building and is exclusive of the Plant Control System (PCS) covered in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control.

B. The City will provide all equipment identified as being provided by TPU on contract drawings. In addition, the City will perform all work patching fiber cables between the Office/Storage Building and the CFFF Electrical Room. The contractor shall be responsible for pulling and terminating fiber at the designated patch panels.






SECTION 26 05 11 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING


SECTION 40 66 11 – NETWORK SYSTEMS

SECTION 40 66 33 – METALLIC AND FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS CABLE AND CONNECTORS

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

NECA/BICSI 568 (2006) Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2017; AMD 1 2013; Errata 2013; AMD 2 2013) National Electrical Code

3. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)

EIA/TIA 49s Detail Specification for 62.5 m Core Diameter/125 m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Mujltimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers.

TIA-568-C.0 (2009; Add 1 2010; Add 2 2012) Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard


TIA-568-C.2 (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards

TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-606 (2012b) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 1286 (2008; Reprint Sep 2013) Office Furnishings

UL 1863 (2004; Reprint Nov 2012) Communication Circuit Accessories

UL 467 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations

UL 969 (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems



B. SHOP DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA

1. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, industry, and technical society publication references.

2. Telecommunications drawings per Paragraph 1.5 - Quality Assurance of this Section.

3. Include cut sheets and manfufacturer data of all equipment submitted under this specification.

C. ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS







D. TEST REPORTS

1. Contractor shall notify the City a minimum 14 days prior to need for City testing of the building cabling system.

2. The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive test plan for all systems installed under this contract for review by the City. This shall be submitted one month prior to their initiating final testing of any data cable system. This plan can be format in a manner convenient to the Contractor, but must contain itemization of systems to be tested as described in these specifications, estimated dates and duration’s, staff to be applied and their responsibility, qualifications, certifications and experience, and a summary of testing equipment to be used. The plan shall show, at a minimum, test configurations, calibration procedures, impedances, and measurement equipment

3. The Contractor shall furnish a written report certifying installation is in compliance with City’s requirements.

E. QUALIFICATIONS

1. The contractor installing the telecommunications facilities and equipment herein specified shall be an experienced TELECOMUNICATIONS CONTRACTOR. He shall demonstrate:

a. A minimum of five (5) years of continuous operation performing similar of work

b. Personnel are trained and certified in the installation of telecommunications facilities equipment.

c. BICSI Registered/Certified Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) on staff.

d. Supervisor or lead technician on the project has a current registered BICSI RCDD and/or Registered BICSI Technician Certification


A. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Provide drawings in accordance with TIA-606. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance with TIA-606. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the CFFF electrical room to the telecommunications outlets. The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:

a. T2 - Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable Identification (ID’S). These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas.

b. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling. Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population.


B. STANDARD PRODUCTS

1. Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two (2) years prior to bid opening. The two (2) year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the two (2) year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTUERS

A. As listed in subsequent sections

B. SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Components shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY

A. Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA-569 and as specified in Section Electrical. Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

A. Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70, and as specified in Section Metallic and Fiber Optic Communications Cable and Connectors. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA-606 and UL 969.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES IN COMM CLOSET IN OFFICE/STORAGE BUILDING

A. Provide all hardware and equipment for the Office/Storage building Comm Closet as shown on contract drawing 1-I6.00.


B. BACKBOARDS

1. Provide void-free, interior grade A-C plywood 3/4 inch thick 4 by 8 feet. Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process. Fire stamp shall be clearly visible. Backboard shall cover the entire north and west wall of the communication closet.

C. PATCH PANELS

1. Provide patch panel ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the panel plus 25 percent spare as specified in Section Panels, Consoles, and appurtenances.

2. The contractor shall provide optical fiber and copper patch cords for patch panels in the Office/Storage building Comm Closet only.

2.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

A. OUTLET/CONNECTOR COPPER

1. Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 Category 6e requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired T568B. UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for 200 mating cycles.

B. COVER PLATES

1. Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1; flush or oversized design constructed of 302 stainless material. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

C. OUTLET BOXES FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

1. Provide the following:

a. Standard type 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.

b. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telecommunications outlets 4 by 2 1/8 by 2 1/8 inches deep.

c. Depth of boxes, large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii.

2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA-607, and NFPA 70. Components shall be identified as required by TIA-606. Provide ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding bus bars as specified in Section Grounding.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PHONE/DATA INSTALLATION

A. Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with NECA/BICSI 568, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-569, NFPA 70, and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network.


Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section Electrical. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with Section Metallic and Fiber Optic Communications Cable to avoid electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment. Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

B. CABLING

1. Cabling shall be installed and tested in accordance with Section Metallic and Fiber Optic Communications Cable and Connectors.

C. PATHWAY INSTALLATIONS

1. Provide in accordance with TIA-569 and NFPA 70. Provide building pathway as specified in Section Electrical. All cable shall be installed in conduits.

D. CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

1. Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 05 11 Electrical.

F. WORK AREA OUTLETS

1. Terminations: Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring configuration as specified. Telephone outlets shall be 18 inches above the floor unless otherwise required. Telephone outlets outdoors and in garages; in basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be hosed down; shall be 4 feet above floor or grade.

2. Cover Plates: As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

3. Cables: Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.

4. Pull Cords: Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed.

G. GROUNDING AND BONDING

1. Provide in accordance with TIA-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 05 26 Grounding.

3.2 LABELING

A. LABELS

1. Provide labeling in accordance with TIA-606. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using mechanical device.

B. CABLE

1. Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.

C. TERMINATION HARDWARE

1. Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.


3.3 TESTING

A. Provide tests in accordance with Section 40 66 33 Metallic and Fiber Optic Communications Cable and connectors.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 31 00 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section specifies material and installation requirements for fire alarm control panels, signal initiating devices, notification appliances, and miscellaneous devices for the Office/Storage Building. The office/storage building fire alarm system shall be integrated with the existing CFFF Sampling building fire alarm system.

B. The existing Fire Alarm Control Panel in the CFFF Sampling building shall be relocated as shown on contract drawings and shall conform to the requirments in this specification and related sections.









A. REFERENCED STANDARDS

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

ADAAG Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

FM FM Global:

FM All applicable standards.

FM All components FM approved.

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC):

NFPA Article 760 Fire Alarm Systems.

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.

NICET National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

UL 38 Standard for Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems.

UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems.

UL 268A Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.

UL 464 Standard for Audible Signaling Appliances.

UL 497B Standard for Protectors for Data Communication and Fire Alarm Circuits.

UL 521 Standard for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

UL 864 Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.


UL 1971 Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.

ICC International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code and associated standards, 2009 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

B. DESIGN CRITERIA

1. Provide a complete fire alarm system for the office/storage building as described in the Contract Documents and according to criteria of the Authority(ies) Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), NFPA, and building code.

a. The fire alarm system shall be designed by a NICET Level 3 or 4 fire alarm technician.

b. If required by state regulations, a professional engineer shall seal drawings submitted to the AHJ.

c. Where system requirements described in the Contract Documents exceed those of the AHJ and/or NFPA, meet the requirements of both.

2. The Contract Drawings indicate a preliminary layout of the type, location and quantity of devices based on NFPA.

a. The designer is responsible for understanding the construction of the building to take in consideration ceiling heights, ceiling construction (flat or not flat), and other features of the building that will effect the layout of devices.

3. Complete fire detection and alarm system design wiring diagrams, interface wiring diagrams, and operational details by system manufacturer or authorized technical representative.

4. Submit documents after design has been approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

5. Fire Alarm system design shall include interface requirements to interface with the existing CFFF Sampling Building FACP.

C. SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS

1. Offer an annual maintenance contract including complete service and equipment costs for maintenance of complete system.

2. Ten (10) years experience minimum serving fire alarm systems.

3. Provide for 24 HR emergency service.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. For the purposes of providing materials and installing electrical work the following definitions shall be used.

1. Outdoor Area: Exterior locations where the equipment is normally exposed to the weather and including below grade structures, such as vaults, manholes, handholes and in-ground pump stations.

2. Architecturally Finished Area: Offices, laboratories, conference rooms, restrooms, corridors and other similar occupied spaces.

3. Non-architecturally Finished Area: Pump, chemical, mechanical, electrical rooms and other similar process type rooms.

4. Hazardous areas: Class I, II or III areas as defined in NFPA 70.


5. Shop Fabricated: Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a UL test procedure has not been established.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. New fire alarm system in Office/Storage building shall be an addressable style system and shall report to the existing conventional fire alarm control panel in the CFFF Sampling building. Existing fire alarm control panel in CFFF Sampling building is a Silent Knight model 5207. See photos at the end of this section for existing FACP condition. Contractor shall be responsible for full fire alarm design of the Office/Storage building and integrating into the existing fire alarm system in the CFFF Sampling building.

B. PROVIDE COMPONENTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FOLLOWING:

1. New Fire alarm control panel for the Office/Storage Building.

2. Remote fire alarm annunciator (FAA).

3. Analog addressable heat sensors.

4. Analog addressable smoke sensors.

5. Combination fire alarm horns with strobe.

6. General alarm strobes.

7. Analog addressable manual pull station.

8. Fire alarm system wire, with all wiring in conduit.

9. Analog addressable duct smoke sensors.

10. Fan control relays associated with the HVAC control system.

11. All equipment necessary for integration with Silent Knight 5207 FACP.

C. BASIC PERFORMANCE

1. Signal Line Circuits (SLC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style 4).

2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y).

3. Each SLC shall be limited to only 80 percent of its total capacity at the time of initial installation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit in accordance with section 01300 - Submittals and Shop Drawings.

2. Product technical data:

a. Provide Submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section.

b. Battery calculations.

c. Voltage drop calculations.

d. Description of system operation.

e. Name of local service organization.

f. Entire system approved by AHJ.

3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:


a. Plan drawing(s) showing type and locations of all fire alarm devices.

1) Indicate salient features of each device (e.g., weatherproof, strobe candela rating).

b. Wiring diagrams and riser diagrams.

B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


a. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.

b. Schematics, wiring diagrams, and drawings in conformance with construction record.

c. Model numbers and up-to-date cost data for spare parts.


C. MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS

1. Field test reports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable.

1. Fire alarm system and components shall be compatible with Silent Knight FACP 5207 without exception.

B. ALL EQUIPMENT

1. UL listed as a product of a single manufacturer under appropriate category.

2. Equipment shall not be modified or installed to alter or void UL label or listing.

3. FM approved.

4. Approved by Fire Marshal, when required by state or local codes.

2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. The FACP shall perform operations as described in Fire Alarm System Operation.

B. The FA system shall have 100 point minimum initiating device capacity with the capability to add additional 100 point minimum initiating device control modules.

C. Construction shall be modular with solid-state, microprocessor-based electronics.

1. An 80-character LCD display shall indicate alarms, supervisory service conditions and any troubles.

D. Keyboards or keypads shall not be required to operate system during fire alarm conditions.

E. Provide necessary switches, relays, indicator lamps, wiring terminals, etc., to provide complete operation supervising, control, and testing facilities for entire system.

F. FACP shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences as required.

1. System shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by local codes.


2. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within FACP.

G. System shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance and testing purposes.

H. System shall be capable of logging and storing 300 events in an alarm log and 300 events in a trouble log.

1. These events shall be stored in a battery protected random access memory.

2. Each recorded event shall include time and date of that event's occurrence.

3. System shall have capability of recalling alarms, trouble conditions, acknowledgments, silencing and reset activities in chronological order for purpose of recreating an event history.

I. FACP shall be listed under UL 864.

J. FACP shall be in an enclosed metal cabinet with glass door specifically designed for public areas.

1. Mounting: Surface.

K. Each addressable device shall be represented individually in FACP.

1. Indicate TROUBLE by a discreet LCD readout for each supervised circuit.

2. Indicate ALARM by a discreet LCD readout for each alarm initiating addressable device.

3. Include individual supervisory and alarm relays in each circuit arranged so that ground or open condition in any circuit or group of circuits, will not affect proper operation of any other device.

L. FACP shall include the capability to report alarm and trouble conditions via a telephone line to a third party alarm reporting services.

M. FACP shall include a system testing capability to help ensure that zoning and supervision have been maintained throughout system.

1. Actuation of the enable walk test program at FACP shall activate "Walk-Test" mode of system which shall cause the following to occur:

a. City connection circuit shall be disconnected.

b. Control relay functions shall be bypassed.

c. FACP shall indicate a trouble condition.

d. Alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause audible signals to activate for 2 seconds.

e. FACP shall automatically reset itself after code is complete.

f. Any momentary opening of alarm initiating or alarm indicating circuit wiring shall cause audible signals to sound continuously for 4 seconds to indicate trouble condition.

g. System shall have 7 distinctive walk test groups such that only a portion of system need be disabled during testing and an alarm in any other area will be processed normally.

N. General Alarm Circuits: Positive non-interfering type so that a second device can be annunciated simultaneously, or closely following first zone.


O. POWER SUPPLY

1. 120 Vac dedicated circuit from panelboard to integral 24 Vdc regulated power supply in FACP and battery charger.

a. The power supply shall provide all panel and peripheral device power needs.

2. If the FACP cannot provide power for the required number of notification appliances a power extender shall be used.

a. An additional 120 Vac dedicated circuit from a panelboard shall be used to power the power extenders power supply and battery charger.

P. BATTERY

1. Low maintenance sealed type, for fire alarm use with automatic battery charger.

2. Batteries shall be capable of operating maximum normal load of system for 24 HRS and then capable of operating system for 5 minutes in alarm condition.

3. Size batteries for the total maximum number of devices that can be connected to the FACP not the install number of devices.

4. The notification appliance power extender shall have the same battery requirements as the FACP.

2.3 FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (FAA)

A. Annunciator provides remote annunciation using a two-line 40 character, back-lit, alphanumeric, LCD readout.

1. The readout shall display, in descriptive English language; system status, alarm type, supervisory conditions, troubles, and location.

B. LED's and a tone-alert audible indication is provided for alarm, supervisory on trouble conditions.

1. Each condition has an acknowledge push-button switch that silences the tone-alert but leaves the LED on until all conditions are returned to normal.

C. FAA shall be an enclosed metal cabinet designed for public areas:

1. Mounting: Flush.

2.4 SIGNAL INITIATING DEVICES

A. ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS

1. Pull-type with handle which shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual identification of activated station.

a. Key reset after operation.

b. Non-coded.

c. Single action.

2. High impact red Lexan with operating directions in white letters.

a. Semi-flush mounted in architecturally finished areas.

b. Surface mounted in non-architecturally finished areas.

c. Surface mounted with clear Lexan weatherproof protective shield in areas designated as wet or in areas indicated in the schedules herein.

d. Explosion proof enclosure or intrinsically safe circuit in hazardous rated areas.


3. Stations shall be keyed alike with FACP.

4. Standards: UL 38.

B. ADDRESSABLE SENSOR BASE

1. Plug-in arrangement:

a. Sensor and associated encapsulated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection.

b. The plug connection requires no springs for secure mounting and contact maintenance.

c. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.

d. Sensor construction shall have a mounting base with a twist-lock detecting head that is lockable.

e. The locking feature must be field removable when not required.

f. Removal of the sensor head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the Control Unit.

5. Addressability: Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver in the mounting base having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.

6. Provide auxiliary relays in base to provide local control of equipment as described under system operation.

a. Provide separate 24 volt supply to sensors with auxiliary relays to guarantee that sufficient power will be available to operate relays.

C. ANALOG ADDRESSABLE HEAT SENSORS

1. Fixed temperature type or combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature type.

2. Rated at 135 DegF for ordinary areas where normal ceiling temperatures do not exceed 100 DegF, or rated 190 DegF for up to 150 DegF ceiling temperatures.

3. Self-restoring: Sensors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

4. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.

5. Quantity and spacing:

a. Smooth ceilings: In accordance with UL rating.

b. Non-smooth ceilings: In accordance with State Fire marshal's requirements.

c. High hazard areas: As indicated.

6. Layout is based on 30 FT spacing for fixed-type and 50 FT spacing for combination type for smooth ceiling.


D. ANALOG ADDRESSABLE SMOKE SENSORS

1. Photoelectric type, dual chamber products of combustion sensors.

2. An infrared sensor light with matching silicon cell receiver and actuated by the presence of visible products of combustion.

3. Self-restoring: Sensors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.


4. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.


E. AIR DUCT SMOKE SENSOR

1. Duct smoke sensors shall utilize analog addressable photoelectric type sensor as specified herein.

2. Duct housing mounted directly to outside of duct with a sampling tube extended across duct to sample air movement.

3. Duct housing couplings slotted to insure proper alignment of sampling and exhaust tubes.

a. Tube lengths as required per duct width.

4. Sensor housing shall have an alarm LED visible through front cover.

5. Remote red LED alarm indicator on ceiling adjacent to sensors above ceilings.

6. Standards: UL 268A.

2.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. ADDRESSABLE RELAY/CONTROL MODULES

1. Allows FACP to control a remotely located Form "C" contact (e.g., HVAC fans, dampers, fire shutters, elevator capture).

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. ALARM HORNS

1. Electric-vibrating polarized type, operating on 24 Vdc, with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille.

2. Horns produce a sound pressure level of 85 dB, measured at 10 FT.

3. Housing: Red with white "FIRE" lettering.

a. Semi-flush or flush mounted in architecturally finished areas.

b. Surface-mounted in non-architecturally finished areas.

4. Horns shall be weatherproof in areas designated as wet.

5. Horns shall be explosion proof in areas designated as hazardous.

B. ALARM STROBES

1. White tamper resistant lexan lens with 24 Vdc xenon strobe.

2. Provide Candela rating as required per ADAAG and synchronize of multiple strobes when required.

3. Housing: Red with white "FIRE" lettering.

a. Semi-flush or flush mounted in architecturally finished areas.

b. Surface-mounted in non-architecturally finished areas.

4. Strobes shall be weatherproof in areas designated as wet or in areas indicated in the schedules herein.

5. Strobes shall be explosion proof in areas designated as hazardous.


C. COMBINATION AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICES

1. Shall be mounted in an integral unit and shall have the same features as the individual units specified herein.

D. STANDARDS: UL 464, UL 1971

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. ISOLATED LOOP CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION)

1. Hybrid solid state high performance suppression system.

a. Do not use gas tubes, spark gaps or other suppression system components which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads.

2. Line-to-line response time of less than one (1) nanosecond capable of accepting a 2000 amps (8 x 20 usec pulse) at 28 V.

3. Line-to-ground response time of less than 1 nanosecond capable of accepting a 2000 amps (8 x 20 usec pulse) to earth.

4. Shield-to-ground shall be capable of accepting a 5000 amps (10 x 50 usec pulse) to earth.

5. Standard: UL 497B.

2.8 WIRING

A. CONDUIT

1. 1/2 IN minimum.

2. See Specification Section 26 05 11.

B. CONDUCTORS

1. Insulation type per NFPA 70, Article 760.

2. 120 Vac and power supply connections: 12 GA, minimum.

3. Low-voltage general alarm circuits: 14 GA, minimum.

4. Low-voltage signal initiating circuits: 18 GA, minimum.

5. Annunciator and data communication circuits: As required by manufacturer, UL listed.

6. Use larger wire sizes when recommended by equipment manufacturer and per voltage drop calculations.

C. Outlet Boxes: See Specification Section 26 05 11.

2.9 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Activation of any signal initiating device, except tamper switches, shall cause the following:

1. General audible horns and/or bells to sound, visual strobes to strobe and automatic control devices to operate.

2. Alarm information shall be displayed at the FACP LCD displays.

B. All fire alarm signals are automatically locked in at FACP and remote LCD displayed annunciators until originating device is returned to normal and FACP is manually reset.

1. Audible alarm signals shall be silence-able from FACP allowing for re-initiation following a subsequent alarm.


a. Silencing of alarm signals shall not impair ability of system to continue to perform as specified.

C. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT FAN CONTROL

1. De-energize indicated air-handling equipment and interlocked exhaust fans, upon operation of any alarm initiating device via relay/control module {and all smoke dampers shall close}.

2. See Section 23 09 00 for mechanical equipment sequence of operation and coordinate all fan controls.

3. Fans shall not restart until FACP is manually reset.

D. ACTIVATION OF ANY SYSTEM TROUBLE SHALL INITIATE THE FOLLOWING

1. Common audible trouble signal shall sound and common trouble light shall illuminate at FACP and any remote annunciators.

2. FACP shall indicate specific device.

E. AUDIBLE TROUBLE SIGNAL SHALL BE SILENCEABLE BY FACP

1. Visual trouble indication remains until trouble condition is corrected.

a. A subsequent trouble condition received after manually silencing shall cause audible trouble signal to resound.

b. Restoration of system to normal causes audible trouble signal until silencing switch is returned to normal position.

2. Trouble signal will be initiated under following conditions:

a. Open on an initiation or alarm indicating circuit.

b. Open in wiring to remote LCD annunciator(s).

c. Ground fault condition.

d. Auxiliary manual control switch out of normal position.

e. Loss of 120 volt operating power to FACP, transponders, or remote LCD annunciators.

f. Low or no battery voltage condition.

g. Main sprinkler valve is closed.

h. Post indicator valve is closed.

i. Any sprinkler or standpipe OS&Y valve is closed.

F. Install isolated loop circuit protectors on all fire alarm data communication circuits, SLC and NAC wiring, including shields, which extends beyond the a building by either aerial or underground methods.

1. The isolated loop circuit protector shall be located as close as practicable to the point at which the circuits leave or enter a building.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all fire alarm equipment and wiring in accordance with local and national codes and NFPA 72.

B. Install all wiring in raceways:


1. Install raceways and boxes in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 11.

2. The inside of all boxes are to be painted red.

C. Install all components as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams, instructions and recommendations.

D. Make all fire alarm wiring continuous from terminal to terminal or from terminal to device pigtail lead.

1. Circuit splices not permitted.

2. Wiring joints, only when required at device pigtail leads shall utilize Scotchlok insulate conical spring connector.

E. Color code all wiring by type of device

1. Coordinate colors with Tacoma Power.

F. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in contract shall be closely coordinated with appropriate subcontractors.

1. Coordinate 8 IN minimum square access door with rubber gasket in duct approximately 2 FT upstream from smoke sensor for testing and servicing with Division 21.

G. Cover all smoke detectors with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness.

H. DEVICE MOUNTING SCHEDULE

1. Dimensions are to center of item unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mounting heights as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

a. Manual pull stations: 48 IN.

b. Notification appliances: 80 IN.

c. Control panels and remote annunciators: 72 IN to top.

3.2 TESTING

A. Obtain services of a factory trained representative of system manufacturer to supervise installation and its progress, supervise final connections to equipment and provide testing to assure that system is in proper operating condition, and is in compliance with all applicable regulations.

B. Test system to satisfaction of Engineer and state and local fire authorities in accordance with NFPA 72, state and local codes and manufacturer's requirements.

3.3 INSTRUCTION

A. Manufacturer shall provide an authorized representative to instruct and train Fire Department personnel and Tacoma Power’s personnel in operation of system.


Figure 1: Existing Silent Knight 5207 at CFFF Sampling Building – Exterior (To Be Relocated by Contractor)


Figure 2: Existing Silent Knight 5207 at CFFF Sampling Building – Inside Label


Figure 3: Existing Silent Knight 5207 at CFFF Sampling Building – Wiring

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL


The work to be performed under this section includes the following:

A. Clear and Strip Site

B. Site Grading

1. Excavation

2. Fill

3. Subgrade Compaction

C. Trenching


SECTION 02 41 00 – DEMOLITION

SECTION 31 25 00 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

Prior to performing any clearing or earthwork operations the contractor shall:

A. Verify site conditions, survey benchmarks and elevations for the work area as indicated.

B. Locate, identify, mark and protect all utilities that are to remain undamaged.

C. Protect features or structures which are outside the clearing limits are to remain undamaged.

D. Install required erosion, sedimentation control measures, and safety barriers as required per Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control.

E. Contractor shall use all means necessary to maintain the stability and safety of excavation during construction.


A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. MATERIAL TEST REPORTS

1. Provide material test reports from a laboratory for each materials type and source for each material. The submittal shall include:

a. Moisture, density and gradation test reports and curves.

C. TEMPORARY SHORING

1. Provide design drawings and computations from a licensed professional engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIAL

A. Bank Run Trench Backfill Materials – Washington Department of Transportation 2016 Standard Specification Section 9-03.19.


B. Crushed Surfacing – Washington Department of Transportation 2016 Standard Specification Section 9-03.9(3).

C. Gravel for Drywells - Washington Department of Transportation 2016 Standard Specification Section 9-03.12(5).

D. Quarry Spalls – Washington Department of Transportation 2016 Standard Specification Section 9-13.1(5).

E. RIGID CONDUIT BEDDING

1. Bedding for galvanized and other rigid conduit shall be clean sand/gravel mixture, free from organic material, conforming to WSDOT Standard Specification Section 9-03.12(3), Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding, conforming to the following grading:

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

1-1/2-inches 100

1-inch-square 75-100

U.S. No. 4 20-80

U.S. No. 40 3-24

U.S. No. 200 10.0 maximum

Sand Equivalent 35.0 minimum

If, in the opinion of the City, native material is free from wood, waste, organic material, and other extraneous or objectionable materials, but otherwise does not conform to the specifications for grading and sand equivalent, it may be used for pipe bedding for rigid pipes, provided the native granular material has a maximum dimension of 1-1/2-inches.

F. PVC CONDUIT BEDDING

1. Bedding material for PVC conduits shall be clean sand/gravel mixture, free from organic material, conforming to WSDOT Standard Specification Section 9-03.13, Backfill for Sand Drains, conforming to the following grading:

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

1/2-inch-square 90-100

U.S. No. 4 57-100

U.S. No. 10 40-100

U.S. No. 50 3-30

U.S. No. 100 0-4

U.S. No. 200 0-3.0

2.2 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE

A. Underground marking tape shall consist of inert polyethylene plastic, 4-mil thickness, which is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in the soil, with a metallic foil core to provide the most positive detection with pipeline locators.

B. The tape shall be color-coded and shall be imprinted continuously over its entire length in permanent black ink.

The message shall convey the type of line buried below and shall also have the word “CAUTION” prominently shown. Color-coding of the tape shall be as follows:

Utility Tape Color Water/Drainage Blue


Electrical Red Communication Orange

C. The width of the tape shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the depth of installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEAR AND STRIP

A. All erosion and sediment control measures as shown on the attached plans and specifications, as listed in the proposal, Pollution and Erosion Control Plan (PECP), Quality Control Inspection Program (QCIP), and all permits shall be installed prior to beginning any earthwork activities. If any conflicts arise in the above listed documents, the most stringent shall apply.

B. The contractor shall remove all debris and decayable material, such as trees, shrubs, topsoil, brush, weeds and grass from the site within the clearing limits prior to beginning any grading operations to an approximate depth of 8-inches.

C. Remove stumps and roots larger than 1-1/2-inch in diameter to not less than 18-inches below finish grade. All holes resulting from stump removal shall be backfilled and compacted to provide a neat workmanship appearance and suitable structural base where required by subsequent construction.

D. All work shall be done in accordance with Section 2.01 of the WSDOT Standard Specification.

E. Transport and legally dispose of cleared material at an off-site location. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with material disposal.

F. Open burning of cleared materials will not be allowed.

G. Conduct clearing operations in a manner that will preserve and protect vegetation beyond the clearing limits.

3.2 SITE GRADING

Site grading shall involve excavating, filling and subgrade compaction required to establish the final subgrade as shown on the plans, and as summarized and amended below.

A. EXCAVATION

1. Erosion and Sediment Control

a. The Contractor shall install erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with the plans and Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control.

b. In-situ elevations (surface and subsurface) represented on the drawings are based upon best available information. The Contractor shall verify and confirm elevations prior to the start of excavation and as subsurface conditions are exposed. Any discrepancies shall be immediately communicated with the City.

2. General Excavation

a. The Contractor shall excavate to the specified lines, grades and dimensions in order to access and construct the finished product as shown on the plans. Such lines, grade and dimensions will be referred to hereafter as the excavation limits and are proposed on the excavation plans within the drawings.

The excavation plans were created to display the excavation required to create and access the various construction benches; however, the Contractor’s methods may vary.


b. Excavation may include the removal and disposal of debris, buried timber, waste concrete, rubble, etc.

c. Rock excavation may also be required, which is covered in and Section 31 23 16 - Blasting.

d. Changes in grades from those shown on the drawings may be necessary. If in the opinion of the City, it is necessary to adjust, correct, relocate or in any way change the line and grade, such changes shall be made by the Contractor in accordance with the Specification.

3. Disposal of Excavations

a. The Contractor shall transport the excavated material off-site and dispose of in a legal manner.

B. FILL

1. General Fill Placement

a. Ensure areas to be filled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are not in frozen condition.

b. Do not fill over ponded surface water or existing subgrade surfaces which are yielding, disturbed or softened.

c. Placing of fill shall be suspended when the climatic conditions will not allow proper placement and compaction of fill.

d. Fill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations shown on Drawings.

e. Place properly moisture conditioned fill material in loose horizontal layers which do not exceed 8-inches in thickness. Spread each layer evenly and mix thoroughly during spreading to ensure uniformity of material in each layer.

f. Compact each layer of non-structural fill to not less than 90% (below 2-feet) of maximum dry density, in accordance with ASTM D-1557, after it has been placed, mixed and spread.

g. Bring fills to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. If settlement occurs, bring to correct levels with same materials.

C. SUBGRADE COMPACTION

1. Using the modified Proctor test (ASTM D-1557) as a standard, the subgrade for the following onsite applications shall be compacted to the following minimum densities (unless otherwise noted on the plans):

Application Minimum Compaction

Foundation Slabs 92%

Asphalt Paving 92%

2. The proof compaction is to compact the subgrade soils to detect possible localized zones of loose or soft soils.

3. Compaction equipment shall be of suitable type and adequate to obtain the densities specified, and shall provide satisfactory breakdown of materials to form a dense fill.

4. Proof compaction shall be carefully monitored, and any areas exhibiting significant deflection, pumping, or heaving that cannot readily be compacted shall be scarified, properly moisture conditioned, and recompacted, or be overexcavated and backfilled with compacted fill material.


5. Keep the surface of the foundation free of standing water and free of loose material, foreign objects and rocks greater than 6 inches in maximum dimension.

6. No materials shall be placed until the foundation has been suitably prepared and approved by the City. Prevent damage to the foundation surface prior to placement of fill.

7. Bedding and backfill shall be compacted to the satisfaction of the City. Moisture conditioning of bedding and backfill materials may be required to achieve the desired compaction and is a part of the Work.

8. Finished surfaces shall be smooth, compacted and free of irregularities. Finished grades shall be as specified by the slopes and contours shown on the Drawings.

9. After completion of construction below the elevation of the final grade, and prior to backfilling, remove all concrete forms and clean the excavation of debris.

10. Do not place backfill until the subgrade portions of the structure have been inspected by the City. Do not deposit backfill material against new concrete structures until the concrete has developed its design strength.

11. Unless otherwise specified, raise embankments to form an approximately horizontal plane extending traversely to the final slopes. Slope the embankment at all times during construction so that water will drain readily off the embankment.

12. Ensure areas to be filled are free from debris, snow, ice and water (where possible) and that ground surfaces are not in a frozen condition.

13. Do not fill over existing subgrade surfaces which are yielding, disturbed, or softened.

14. Placing of fill shall be suspended when the climatic conditions will not allow proper placement and compaction of fill.

15. Fill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations shown on the Drawings.

16. If the compacted surface of any layer of material is too smooth to bond properly with the succeeding layer, scarify the surface. If required, sprinkle the surface or otherwise add moisture before the succeeding lift is placed. Any surface crust formed on a layer of fill material that has been dumped and spread shall be broken up by harrowing and, if required, the full depth of the affected layer shall be moisture conditioned immediately prior to compaction.

17. Backfilling against cantilever walls shall not be permitted until the concrete has reached its full strength.

18. Accomplish compaction of native and imported fill by using power-operated tampers, rollers, or vibratory equipment. Perform compaction within 36-inches of walls with hand-operated vibratory compactors.

19. Slope grade away from buildings a minimum of 2%, unless noted otherwise. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. Slope grades to drain.

D. TRENCHING

1. All trenches shall be sufficiently true to line and grade to permit accurate alignment of pipe. The trench shall be as nearly rectangular in section with reasonable sheeting and bracing as the ground requires and shall clear the side of the pipe sufficiently to permit proper installation of the pipe and bedding of the pipe and to provide the required compaction and backfill.

2. Boulders or rocks greater than 6-inches in diameter shall be entirely removed or cut to full trench width and 12-inches below grade.


3. Where pipe is to be laid on fill, all topsoil and debris shall be removed from the existing ground and the fill made of suitable material thoroughly compacted to pipe grade by methods approved by the City Engineer.

4. If the trench bottom is deemed unsuitable by the engineer for supporting the pipe, the unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of and crushed rock shall be placed for pipe bedding as directed by the engineer.

5. The contractor shall provide all necessary bridges for the proper handling of traffic over the trench where required.

6. The contractor shall provide adequate cross drainage or dewatering and prevent flooding of the trench.

7. The contractor shall furnish a trench excavation safety system at all locations where required by Washington State Law and as approved by the City Engineer. This section applies to utility line installation only in excess of 4-feet in depth in accordance with WISHA requirements.

The contractor may use other protection measures which meet the open pit requirements of Section 2-09.3(3)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications.

Any additional provisions required for installation of utilities in excess of 4-feet in depth is not incidental to the bid item and shall be paid for under Bid Item 3 – Trench Wall Support.

8. The trench excavation safety system shall be installed in accordance with Washington Industrial Safety Health Administration requirements and shall provide adequate working room.

9. If the contractor chooses to slope this trench outside the payment limits in lieu of installing shoring, he shall backfill and pay for all backfill, etc., beyond the limit lines.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 05 19 – GEOSYNTHETICS FOR EARTH WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


Work shall include all items necessary for the placement of geotextile fabric and PVC liner as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction.

B. Manufacturer’s Reference Manuals


A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. PRODUCT DATA

1. Provide manufacturer’s product data for materials to be used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. PVC LINER

1. PVC 40 as produced by Colorado Lining International.

2. PVC adhesive shall be as recommended by liner manufacturer.

B. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

1. Typar 3501 as produced by Geosynthetics LLC.

C. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Substitutions must fully comply with the specification and be equivalent to the products specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 HANDLING

A. DELIVERY

1. Deliver each roll with sufficient information attached to identify manufacturer and product name or number.

B. STORAGE

1. Handle products in manner that maintains undamaged condition.

2. Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with suitable wrapping for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure. Store geotextile in a way that protects it from elements. If stored outdoors, elevate and protect geotextile with waterproof cover.


3.2 LAYING GEOSYNTHETICS

A. SUBGRADE

1. Lay sheets of geosynthetics on smooth subgrade that has no rocks, sticks or other debris larger than 0.4-inch in diameter. Surface deformations shall not exceed 1-inch. Rake or compact subgrade in order to achieve the smooth surface.

2. Standing water, mud, and snow shall be removed prior to placing PVC liner.

B. LAY DOWN OF SHEETS

1. Lay and maintain geosynthetic smooth and free of tension, folds, wrinkles, or creases as recommended by the geosynthetic manufacturer.

2. PVC liner shall be installed when the ambient sheet and air temperature is between 40 and 105 degrees F.

C. ORIENTATION ON SLOPES

1. Orient geosynthetic with long dimension of each sheet parallel to direction of slope.

2. Geosynthetic may be oriented with long dimension of sheet transverse to direction of slope only if sheet width, without seams, is sufficient to cover entire slope and extend at least 18-inches beyond toe of slope.

3.3 JOINTS AND SEAMS

A. UNSEAMED

1. Unseamed joints in pervious geotextile geosynthetic sheets shall have a minimum overlap of 18-inches.

B. SEAMED

1. Seamed joints in impervious PVC liner geosynthetic sheets shall have a minimum overlap of 4-inches.

2. Seams of PVC liner shall be joined using hot wedge fusion welding, hot air fusion welding, chemical fusion welding, or with adhesive.

3. Procedures and adhesives used for seams of PVC liner shall be as recommended by the PVC liner manufacturer.

4. Adhesives seams of PVC liner shall at a minimum include roughening and cleaning the adjoining liner faces, applying adhesive to both joining faces, applying pressure to the faces for the duration and magnitude recommended by the PVC liner manufacturer. All excess adhesive shall be removed immediately after joining the liner.

5. Adhesives seams of PVC liner shall at a minimum include roughening and cleaning the adjoining liner faces, applying adhesive to both joining faces, applying pressure to the faces for the duration and magnitude recommended by the PVC liner manufacturer. All excess adhesive shall be removed immediately after joining the liner.

3.4 TESTING AND REPAIRS

A. TESTING

1. Field seams of the PVC liner shall be nondestructively tested over the full length as the work progresses with air lance testing in accordance with ASTM D 4437.

2. Field seams of the PVC liner shall be nondestructively tested over the full length as the work progresses.


B. REPAIRS

1. All defective liner areas and failed seams shall be repaired and retested.

2. All tears, punctures, and material defects in the liner shall be repaired by installing a patch over the defective area. Surfaces of the liner to be patched shall be cleaned before the repair. All patches shall be of the same material and extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond the edges of the defect area. All patches shall have rounded corners and shall be seamed to the liner.

3. Failed seams shall be repaired by installing a cap strip over the entire length of failed seam. The cap strip shall be the same liner material and shall extend beyond the failed seam a minimum of 6-inches in all directions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 25 00 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


The work to be performed under this section includes the procurement and installation of the following erosion and sediment control features including temporary and permanent seeding as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

A. Silt Fences

B. CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE AND ROAD MAINTENANCE

This section also includes a discussion on the following erosion and sediment control practices:

1. Waste Concrete and Spoil Disposal Site

2. Vehicle and Equipment Staging

3. Monitoring and Maintenance

4. Oil and Hazardous Substance Storage, Spill Prevention, and Clean-up

5. Grading and Stabilization of Spoil Sites

6. In addition to the requirements of this section, the contractor shall also fully comply with the Construction Stormwater General Permit, the Pollution and Erosion Control Plan (PECP), and the January 15, 2002 401 Water Quality Certificate for Cowlitz Hydroelectric Project #01SEASR-3367. Where any conflicts arise between this section the PECP or the permits, the most stringent shall apply.


A. SECTION 01500 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

B. SECTION 31 00 00- EARTH WORK


A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300- Submittal and Shop Drawings.

B. PECP SUBMITTALS

1. Provide all submittals listed within the Pollution and Erosion Control Plan (PECP).

C. Materials provide product literature on all materials used for temporary erosion control and seeding. This shall include filter fencing, wattles, rock, geosynthetic fabrics, seed mixtures, and fertilizers.

D. Submit Water Quality Protection Plan (WQPP) in accordance with Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, Paragraph 1.9 – Pollution Control.

1.4 REFERENCE REPORTS

See also the following reports and permits that contain more detailed information as to the erosion and sediment control requirements:

A. Pollution and Erosion Control Plan (PECP)

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PRODUCTS

The Contractor is responsible to select, furnish and install all materials and equipment used for erosion and sedimentation control and pollution prevention in accordance with the attached plans and specifications.


B. SEED MIXTURES AND MULCH

1. Mulch shall be wood fiber applied at a rate of 1500 to 2000 pounds per acre or straw applied at a depth of 2 to 3 inches.

2. Temporary Erosion Control Seed Mix shall be:

Percent Weight Percent Purity Percent Germination

Chewings or Blue Grass 40 98 90

Perennial Rye 50 98 90

Redtop or Colonial Bentgrass

5 92 85

White Dutch Clover 5 98 90

3. Areas requiring permanent seeding shall be Meadow Mix:

Percent Weight Percent Purity Percent Germination

Redtop or Oregon Bentgrass

20 92 85

Red Fescue 70 98 90

White Dutch Clover 10 98 90

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All work required in this section, including all erosion and sediment control facilities, shall be installed prior to any ground disturbing activity requiring the use of the facilities.

B. The contractor shall perform all work necessary to comply with the requirements of permits furnished by the City and any contractor-furnished permits governing this work.

C. On-site erosion control measures shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Any problems occurring before final acceptance of the project by the city shall be corrected by the contractor. The arrangements of facilities to be constructed are shown in drawings 1-G3.00, 1-G3.01, and 1-G3.02 and 1-G3.03, and further described in the PECP.

D. Should the temporary erosion control and sedimentation control measure as shown on this drawing not prove adequate to control erosion and sedimentation, the contractor shall install additional facilities as necessary to protect sensitive areas and natural water courses.

E. All erosion control activities must comply with AKART.

F. In order for the erosion control facilities to function properly, they must be maintained nd sediment removed on a regular basis.

1. Erosion control facilities shall not be allowed to fall into disrepair. All erosion control facilities shall be inspected, at a minimum, according to the following schedule:

a. Dry Season: once a week b. Wet Season: daily, and after every storm event that produces runoff

2. Needed repairs shall be made within 24 hours or immediately if possible. If necessary, the City Engineer will instruct the Contractor to provide additional facilities as warranted during field inspections.


3. Examination of all erosion control facilities will be done by the City resident inspector and the Contractor’s designated Pollution Control Inspector CESCL throughout the construction period.

a. Contractor shall ensure the CESCL is on-site or capable of responding to a significant rain event with a reasonable period of time not to exceed 24 hours.

4. See the PECP for further information related to inspection of erosion controls.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL

A. SILT FENCES

1. Install down slope of all exposed areas where storm water runoff may occur.

2. Silt fencing shall be purchased in continuous rolls and cut to avoid the use of joints. When joints are necessary, the filter cloth shall be spliced together only at a support post, with a minimum 6-inch overlap and securely fastened at both ends to overlapping posts.

3. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 6-feet apart and driven securely into the ground.

4. A trench shall be excavated approximately 8-inches wide and 12-inches deep along the line of posts and upslope from the barrier. The bottom flap of filter fabric shall be placed into trench and the trench backfilled with washed gravel.

5. If standard strength filter fabric is used, a wire mesh support fence shall be included between the fabric and the posts.

6. Filter fabric shall not be stapled to existing trees.

7. The filter fabric shall be attached to the posts with heavy-duty staples that are at least 1-inch long, tie wires or hog rings.

8. Silt fencing shall not be removed until the upslope area has been permanently stabilized.

9. All silt fencing shall be inspected immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall events with all required repairs immediately completed.

10. Silt fencing shall be installed parallel to any slope contours.

11. The contributing length of exposed soil to a fence line shall not be greater than 100-feet.

12. Do not install below an outlet pipe or weir.

13. Do not drive over or fill up against the silt fencing.

3.3 WASTE CONCRETE AND SPOIL DISPOSAL SITE

Practices to confine remove and dispose of excess concrete, cement and other mortars or bonding agents:

A. Concrete truck chutes, pumps and internals shall only be washed out in one of the following ways:

1. Pre-established and dedicated infiltration pond sized to provide full containment of wash water.

a. These dedicated ponds shall be located a minimum of 300-feet from any natural water course.

b. The site must be approved by the City engineer and proved to infiltrate with no runoff.

c. Pond must be lined with the appropriate material and area must be reseeded when the pond is removed.

2. Portable concrete washout containment system for operations where an infiltration pond will not be sufficient to contain all washout material.


a. The portable system must be approved by the City Engineer and proved to contain all the washout material.

B. Unused concrete remaining in the truck and/or pump shall be returned to the originating batch plant for recycling.

C. Hand tools including, but not limited to, screeds, shovels, rakes, floats and trowels shall be washed off either into the pre-established infiltration pond or the portable concrete waste container.

D. Any equipment that cannot be easily moved shall only be washed in portable containment systems.

E. Hardened concrete residue from the wash out operation shall be broken up and used as backfill or transported to an approved disposal site.

3.4 VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT STAGING

A. All vehicle staging, cleaning, maintenance, refueling and fuel storage shall be done in an area at least 150-feet from any stream, water body or wetland unless specially requested and approved in writing by the engineer.

B. All vehicles operating within 150-feet of a stream, water body or wetland shall be inspected daily for fluid leaks and all necessary repairs performed within staging area.

3.5 MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

A. The Contractor shall develop and implement an Environmental Monitoring and Maintenance Program based on the PECP, 401 Water Quality Certification, and other permit requirements.

1. The Program will include procedures to examine all erosion control facilities described herein and to monitor and maintain compliance with this Specification, the PECP and permits.

2. The Program will also assess the impacts of construction activities on water quality.

B. Examination of all erosion control facilities described in this construction specification will be done by the City’s resident inspector and the Contractor on a daily basis through the construction period. The contractor shall immediately repair any facilities not in compliance with this specification.

C. In addition to meeting the notification requirements of the Construction Stormwater General Permit, the contractor shall notify the Project Engineer within 24 hours if any of the follow events occur;

1. Stormwater turbidity exceeds 25 NTU’s or transparency is less than 33 cm

2. Stormwater pH is outside of the range of 6.5 to 8.5 (if pH sampling is required as described in the permit)

3. A spill of any chemical at any volume or a petroleum product of 1 quart or greater (any amount of petroleum product that results in a visible sheen discharging off site)

4. A state water quality inspection, including any requested follow-up action and concerns/violations noted during the inspection

3.6 OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE STORAGE, SPILL PREVENTION, AND CLEAN-UP

A. EMERGENCY EROSION CONTROL SUPPLIES

As a minimum, the contractor shall maintain the following materials on-site for emergency erosion control needs.


1. 10% of the total quantity of erosion control material initially used to establish the site.

2. Silt fence and/or straw bales.

3. Oil-Absorbing pads.

4. Floating Oil-Absorbing boom whenever surface water is present.

5. These items are in addition to the contractor’s standard Spill Prevention and Control Plan.

B. LOCATION, TYPE AND QUANTITY OF MATERIALS STORED

1. Fuel, oil, gasoline, lubricants, form oil and other normal construction materials shall be stored at least 150-feet from any stream, water body or wetland unless specially requested and approved in writing by the engineer. Permanent on-site storage will be limited to 50 gallons of machinery oil and ten gallons of solvent.

2. Mobile equipment such as trucks would be re-fueled at the same area. More stationary equipment such as cranes, air compressors, generators, welders, etc. may be re-fueled at the worksite. Small quantities of these materials (for instance, 150 gallons of fuel) would be transported to this work area in tanks and transferred to the fueled tanks on the equipment.

a. For equipment refuled on-site, secondary containment is required.

3. The quantities of stored construction materials would not normally exceed the following:

a. Diesel fuel: 2000 gal.

b. Gasoline: 250 gal.

c. Motor oils and Grease: 200 gal.

d. Form oil: 100 gal.

e. Solvent: 50 gal.

f. Curing compound: 50 gal.

g. Paint material: 50 gal.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION WATER TREATMENT

All construction water discharged during this project (e.g. concrete washout, pumping for work area isolation, vehicle wash water, drilling fluids, dewatering within excavations and water displaced during concrete placement (via tremie) shall be treated prior to release, as required by Department of Ecology permits.

A. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

1. No waters from the Cowlitz River and tributaries, Riffe Lake or Mayfield Lake shall come in contact with concrete outlet structure until concrete curing is complete.

2. All concrete shall be poured in the dry, or within confined waters not being dewatered to natural waterways. All water must be properly treated prior to discharge or transported to the infiltration pond. Any diversion system shall not be removed until after the concrete has cured for seven (7) days.

3.8 SEEDING STABILIZATION MEASURES

A. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY MEASURES

1. All temporary erosion and sediment control facilities shall be removed within 30 days after the final site stabilization is achieved or after the temporary facilities are no longer needed.


B. SEEDING

1. Seed mixture shall be per paragraph 2.1 B.

2. The seed mixture shall be applied at a rate of at least 140 pounds per acre.

3. Seedbeds planted between May 1 and October 31 shall be irrigated and maintained as necessary to foster and protect the root structure.

4. Seedbeds planted between November 1 and April 30 shall be protected with geotextile, erosion control blankets, jute mat or clear plastic coverings until the plants are fully established.

5. Plantings shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, excessively wet or the weather is otherwise non-conducive to satisfactory growth.

6. When hydro-seeding, the seed and fertilizer may be applied in one application provided that the fertilizer is placed into the tank no more than 30 minutes prior to application.

7. Before seeding, install necessary surface control runoff measures such as gradient terraces, interceptor dikes and swales, level spreaders and sediment basins.

8. Following initial surface roughening, the seedbed shall be firm with a fairly fine surface. Perform all grading and surface preparation operations across or at right angles to the slope.

C. MULCH

1. Seed mixture shall be per paragraph 2.1 B.

2. Mulches shall be applied in all areas with a exposed slope greater than 2 feet horizontal to 1 feet vertical.

3. Mulching shall be applied immediately after seeding and in all areas, which cannot be seeded because of inclement weather conditions.

D. PLASTIC SHEETING

1. Clear plastic sheeting shall be installed immediately on areas seeded between November 1 and March 31 and remain until vegetation is firmly established.

2. Clear plastic sheeting shall be secured in the same manner as when used as a temporary erosion control measure.

3. When the plastic covering is used on un-seeded slopes, it shall be kept in place until the next seeding period.

4. Plastic covering sheets shall be buried (up to two feet) at the top of slopes in order to prevent surface water from flowing beneath the sheeting.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL


The work to be performed under this section includes the procurement and installation of the asphalt pavement as shown on the drawings and specified herein.


A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

B. MIX DESIGN

Submit asphalt mix design and related submittals as described in WSDOT Standard Specifications (latest edition).

C. INSTALLATION PLANS

Submit an Installation Plan that provides methods for placing, grading, compacting, and testing asphalt pavement.

D. MATERIAL TEST REPORTS

Submit Material Test Reports for each material type included in the prescribed mix design.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Asphalt concrete pavement-HMA Mix Class 1/2-inch PG 64-22 as defined in the WSDOT Standard Specifications (latest edition).

B. Tack coat as required for overlays or meet lines shall be CSS-1 or engineer approved equal as defined in the WSDOT Standard Specifications (latest edition).

PART 3 EXECUTION

A. Asphaltic paving shall be procured and installed per Section 5-04.3 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications.

B. Verify that subgrade and base are compacted and that gradients and elevations of base are correct.

C. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40°F or surface is wet or frozen.

D. Apply primer to contact surfaces of curbs and adjacent pavement surfaces.

E. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

F. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

G. Protect pavement from mechanical injury until surface temperature is less than 140°F.

H. Paving shall be sloped to drain as shown on the plans and to avoid ponding water throughout.


H. TOLERANCES

1. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4-inch measured with 10-foot straight edge.

2 Scheduled compacted thickness: Within 1/4-inch.

3. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2-inch.

I. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

1. The contractor shall not perform excessive demolition beyond that necessary for the required work and shall not be paid for repair of any excessive or accidental damage done.

2. Subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with the plans.

3. Soil sterilant shall be applied as approved by the City Engineer.

4. Where the asphalt concrete surfacing is to abut existing asphalt, the meet line shall be straight and vertical. The contractor shall cut the edges straight and vertical in those areas directed by the City Engineer.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 40 - INSTRUMENTATION

SECTION 40 61 11 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of new instrumentation and control components that are to be integrated into an existing system designated as the Plant Control System (PCS).

B. The components shall be furnished as specified, complete with all human machine interface (HMI) hardware, input/output and processing hardware, instrumentation, and all devices, accessories, appurtenances, testing, and training necessary for proper operation.

C. Equipment furnished and installed under this and related sections per paragraph 1.2 N-U shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as a complete system, unless exceptions are noted by the City.

D. Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section and related sections. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Commissioning Requirements, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

E. The Drawings indicate locations and general arrangement of equipment and may include installation details and block and one-line diagrams showing connections and interfaces with other equipment.

F. The City shall supply perform all system software integration for the PCS, including HIM and PLC programming. The System Supplier shall work with the City when commissioning the system in accordance with this section and Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements.


Section 01300 Submittal And Shop Drawing Procedures

Section 01400 Quality Control

Section 01600 Material And Equipment

Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements

Section 26 24 23 600V Class Motor Control Centers

Section 26 29 24 Variable Frequency Drives

Section 40 64 00 Programmable Logic Controllers

Section 40 66 11 Network Systems

Section 40 66 33 Metallic And Fiber Optic Communication Cable And Connectors

Section 40 67 11 Panels, Consoles, And Appurtenances

Section 40 71 00 Flow Instruments

Section 40 72 00 Level Instruments

Section 40 73 00 Pressure Instruments



A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification and related sections to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available shall be used, except as they are modified and supplemented herein. In addition to the above codes and standards, Contractor shall comply with all pertinent State and local ordinances, laws, and regulations. In the event of any apparent conflict among codes, standards or this specification, Contractor shall refer the conflict to the City for written resolution.

B. Contractor shall, as part of their work, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and approvals by the authorities having local jurisdiction of such work. This shall include any third-party inspections and testing of panels and equipment.

ANSI, American National Standards Institute.

ANSI C37.90 – Standard for Relays and Relay Systems.

IEEE 472 - Surge withstand standard.

IEEE 519 Harmonic Specifications.

NEC-NFPA70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

NECA 301-2009, Standard for Installing and Testing Fiber Optic Cable.

NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

NEMA ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems.

NEMA IA 2.2-2005 Programmable Controllers Part 2: Equipment Requirements.

NEMA ICS-1-109.60 – 109.66, Meet or exceed electrical noise tests.

C. Standards and codes of the following organizations will also govern, where applicable:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

2. International Society of Instrumentation (ISA)

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

7. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)


A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 - Submittals and Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL




2. The Contractor shall provide review comments attached to the submittal identifying compliance or non-compliance with each section, confirming that he has verified that submittals meet specified requirements.



1. Submittal data shall be grouped and submitted in three separate stages as described below. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. Equipment tag numbers or identifications used on the Drawings shall be referenced where applicable.

2. Equipment and material descriptive literature and drawings shall show the specification paragraph for which the equipment applies.

3. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out.

4. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and material descriptive literature not readily cross referenced with the Drawings or Specifications.

5. Schematics and connection diagrams for all equipment shall be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted.

D. FIRST STAGE SUBMITTAL

1. The first stage submittal shall be submitted with or prior to the second stage submittal. If there are any alternate equipment being proposed other than what is specified, the first stage submittal shall be submitted one month prior to the second stage submittal. The first stage submittal shall include the following items.

a. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or discrepancies between the system proposed by System Supplier and this specification.

b. Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware and software items, clearly marked to show the model number, optional features, and intended service of each device.

c. A brief, concise description of the proposed system, including major hardware and software components and personnel training.

d. A block diagram or schematic drawing showing the principal items of equipment furnished, including model numbers, and their interrelationships.


e. Drawings showing floor and wall space or desktop area requirements for all equipment items, including allowances for door swings and maintenance access.

f. Environmental and power requirements, including heat release information for each equipment item.

g. Standard field termination drawings for all process input/output equipment, showing typical terminations for each type of point available in the system.

h. A copy of the proposed software licenses for all software associated with the system (if applicable).

i. Outline for training classes.

j. Additional Requirements identified in other Division 40 - Instrumentation sections.

E. SECOND STAGE SUBMITTAL

1. Before any equipment is procured or constructed and before factory testing is scheduled, the following data shall be submitted. The first and second stage submittals may be combined only with prior approval from the City.

a. Complete panel fabrication drawings and details of panel wiring, piping, and painting. Panel and subpanel drawings shall be to scale and shall include overall dimensions, metal thickness, door swing, mounting details, weight, and front of panel arrangement to show general appearance, with spacing and mounting height of instruments and control devices.

b. Wiring and installation drawings for all interconnecting wiring between components of the system and between related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams shall show complete circuits and indicate all connections.

If panel terminal designations, inter-device connections, device features and options, or other features are modified during the fabrication or factory testing, revised drawings shall be submitted before shipment of the equipment to the site.

c. Fiber termination diagrams to show all fiber terminations at fiber patch panels and final termination at equipment. Fiber termination diagrams shall show individual fiber type (single or multimode), fiber core/cladding dimensions, fiber colors, circuit identifications, and type of terminator.

d. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve System Supplier from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment.

e. Proposed lesson plans or outlines for all training courses specified herein, including schedule, instructors' qualifications and experience, and recommended prerequisites.

f. Additional Requirements identified in other Division 40 - Instrumentation sections.

F. THIRD STAGE SUBMITTAL (OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS)

1. Complete system documentation, in the form of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, shall be submitted before the commencement of field acceptance testing. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include complete instruction books for each item of equipment and software furnished. Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range of device, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the device model number and other special features. A complete set of "as-built" wiring, fabrication, and interconnection drawings shall be included with the manuals. If field-wiring modifications are made after these drawings are submitted, the affected drawings shall be revised and resubmitted. Additional requirements are identified in other Division 40 - Instrumentation specification sections.



A. Equipment and software furnished under this section and under other related sections listed in Paragraph 1.2 – Related Sections above shall be designed, coordinated, and supplied by a single manufacturer or supplier, hereinafter referred to as the System Supplier. The System Supplier shall be regularly engaged in the business of supplying computer-based monitoring, control, and data acquisition systems with a minimum five (5) years of experience that can be demonstrated upon request by the City. The Contractor shall utilize the services of the System Supplier to coordinate all control system related items, to check-out and calibrate instruments, and to perform all testing, training, and startup activities specified to be provided.

B. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated by System Supplier for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications, under other contracts, and, where applicable, with related existing equipment. All equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, and the manufacturer of the related equipment.

C. System Supplier shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.

D. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field.

Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except for testing.


A. The drawings and specifications indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the Drawings or Specifications are deemed necessary by System Supplier, details of such departures and the reasons shall be submitted to the City for review with or before the first stage submittal. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance.

B. The specifications describe the minimum requirements for hardware and software. Where System Supplier’s standard configuration includes additional items of equipment or software features not specifically described herein, such equipment or features shall be furnished as a part of the system and shall be warranted as specified herein.

C. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The System Supplier shall review the Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications requisite for proper installation subject to acceptance by the City. At least three (3) feet of clear access space shall be provided in front of all instrumentation and control system components.

D. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, and isolation devices shall be furnished as needed for proper performance and protection according to manufacturer recommendations of the equipment.


E. A programming or system-configuring device shall be provided for systems that contain any equipment that requires such a device for routine calibration, maintenance, and troubleshooting. The programming device shall be complete, newly purchased for this project, and shall be in like-new condition when turned over to the City at completion of startup.

F. All devices shall be provided with permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with System Supplier’s equipment drawings and shall be as close as practical to the tag numbers used on the Drawings and device schedules. All field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable.


A. All electronic equipment and instruments shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements, shall be kept dry at all times, and shall not be exposed to adverse ambient conditions.

B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the City.

C. Each shipment shall include an appropriate shipping list that indicates the contents of the package, including the specific instrument tags. The shipping list shall be accessible without exposing the instruments to the atmosphere. The shipping list shall also contain any cautionary notes regarding storage of the instruments, including requirements to protect the instrument from static discharge, desensitizing chemicals (solvents, paints, etc.), or ambient atmospheric conditions.

D. Individual instruments shall be appropriately tagged or labeled to positively identify the device. All identification shall be visible without the need to unpack the instrument from its protective packaging.

E. Instrument shipment and storage requirements shall be coordinated with the City prior to shipment. System Supplier shall provide adequate storage and be ready to accept the shipment before shipping any equipment to the site. Additional shipping and storage requirements shall be as detailed in the individual instrument specifications.

F. Components which are shipped loose due to transportation limitations shall be assembled and disassembled by the manufacturer prior to shipment to assure that all components fit together and are adequately supported.

1.8 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare parts and consumable items are specified in other Division 40 - Instrumentation sections.

B. All spare parts shall be delivered to the City before final acceptance of the system. Packaging of spare parts shall provide protection against dust and moisture and shall be suitable for storage. Circuit boards and other electronic parts shall be enclosed in anti-static material. All packages shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, part number or other identification, date of manufacture, and approximate shelf life.


C. System Supplier may utilize spare parts and supplies during system installation, de-bugging, startup, or training, but shall restore all such materials and supplies to the specified quantities before final acceptance of the systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. As listed in subsequent sections.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS

Substitutions shall comply with specified requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and components, and shall provide all design, assembly, testing, and start-up services required as described herein and in other related sections.


A. All equipment furnished under each Section 40 - Instrumentation is a part of this section and shall be selected by System Supplier for its superior quality and intended performance. Equipment and materials used shall be subject to review.

B. The systems furnished shall be standard products. Where two (2) or more units of the same type of equipment are supplied, they shall be the products of the same manufacturer; however, all components of the systems furnished hereunder need not be the products of one manufacturer unless specified herein.

C. To the extent possible, instruments used for similar types of functions and services shall be of the same brand and model line. Similar components of different instruments shall be the products of the same manufacturer to facilitate maintenance and stocking of repair parts. Whenever possible, identical units shall be furnished.

2.4 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The design of the systems furnished hereunder shall utilize concepts, techniques and features that provide maximum reliability and ease of maintenance and repair. The systems shall include board-level devices such as light emitting diodes or other indicators to facilitate quick diagnosis and repair. Diagnostic software shall be furnished to facilitate system-level troubleshooting.

B. Where redundant hardware is provided, the system shall be capable of performing all specified functions, without reconfiguring hardware or software, with only one (1) device of each category in service.

C. Equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, except where its physical size, arrangement, configuration, or shipping and handling limitations make the shipment of completely assembled units impracticable.

2.5 POWER SUPPLY AND INSTRUMENT SIGNAL

A. Power supply to all control system equipment will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. System Supplier shall be responsible for distribution of power among enclosures, consoles, peripherals, and other components of the system from the power supply receptacles and junction boxes indicated on the Drawings. Power distribution hardware shall include cables and branch circuit overcurrent protection installed in accordance with the Section 26 05 11 - Electrical.


B. Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the instrumentation will be unregulated 120 volts ac. Unless otherwise indicated, all transmitted electronic analog instrument signals shall be 4-20 mA dc and shall be linear with the measured variable.

C. Equipment not indicated to be powered from an uninterruptible power source shall be suitable for being supplied from the facility distribution system and shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations of + 10 percent and harmonics up to the limits of IEEE 519 without affecting operation. System Supplier shall provide voltage conditioning or filtering equipment if necessary to meet the requirements specified.

D. Power supplies for voltages other than those listed above shall be an integral part of the equipment furnished. Internal power supplies shall be regulated, current limiting, and self-protected.

E. All equipment shall meet all surge withstand capability tests as defined in ANSI C37.90 without damage to the equipment.

F. An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall be furnished hereunder to power the equipment indicated on the Drawings or will be furnished under another section. System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the size of the UPS unit with the equipment furnished hereunder, and shall advise the City if a unit of higher capacity is necessary.

2.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The equipment provided for the instrumentation and control system shall be suitable for the service conditions specified in the Division 40 - Instrumentation sections.

B. All equipment shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in performance throughout the environmental extremes specified. Equipment shall be designed to prevent the generation of electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices.

C. All system equipment located in air conditioned rooms shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures from 10°C to 35°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 80 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located in non-air-conditioned indoor areas shall be suitable for an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 50°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 95 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located outdoors shall be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range -20°C to 60°C and a relative humidity of 5 to 100 percent. Heaters and air conditioning/cooling equipment shall be provided where essential to maintain equipment within its manufacturer-recommended operating ranges.

D. All equipment and instruments shall be designed to operate at the site elevation of 570 feet.

E. All system equipment will be installed in areas without anti-static floor construction and without any provisions for control of particulates or corrosive gases other than ordinary office-type HVAC filtering. System Supplier shall furnish any additional air cleaning equipment, anti-static chair pads, or other protective measures necessary for proper operation of the system.

F. All input/output hardware shall meet or exceed, without false operation, all requirements of NEMA ICS-1-109.60, Electrical Noise Tests.

G. The equivalent "A" weighted sound level for any system equipment located in the control room, except printers, shall not exceed 35 dBA. Sound reduction enclosures shall be provided where necessary to comply with these limits.


H. In addition to other environmental protection specified herein, the entire system shall be provided with lightning protection. Lightning protection measures shall include the following:

1. All major components of the system shall have a low resistance ground connection. Grounding system provisions indicated on the Drawings shall be modified as recommended by System Supplier.

2. Surge and lightning suppressors shall be non-faulting, non-interrupting, and shall protect against line-to-line and line-to-ground surges. Devices shall be solid-state metal oxide varistor (MOV) or silicon junction type, with a response time of less than 50 nanoseconds. Surge protective devices shall be applied for the following:

a. All 120 VAC power connections to RTUs, PLCs, DCUs, instruments and control room equipment. Surge arresters shall be Transtector "ACP-100-HW Series", Power Integrity Corporation “ZTA Series”, Phoenix Contact “Mains PlugTrab”, or MCG Surge Protection “400 Series”.

b. All connections to coaxial-based networked equipment (including CCTV, CATV, Ethernet, Arcnet, and satellite) where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Surge arresters shall be Telematic “VP08”, Transtector CCTV-PTZ Series”, Phoenix Contact “CoaxTrab Series”, or Northern Technologies “TCS-CP3 Series”.

c. All analog signal circuits where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Circuits shall be protected at both the transmitter and the control system end of the circuit.

Surge protection devices shall not impede or interfere with the use of smart transmitter calibration/communication. Protection devices located near the transmitter shall be Telematic “TP48.” Protection devices in control panels shall be Transtector “PDS Series or FSP Series”, Telematic “SD Series”, Phoenix Contact “PipeTrab Series”, or Citel “BP1-24.”

d. All metallic pair (twisted and untwisted) conductor local area network and data highway termination points, where any part of the data highway cable is routed outside of the building envelope. Single-port protective devices shall be Phoenix Contact “PlugTrab Series”, Transtector “FSP” Series”, or Telematic “NP Series.”

e. All serial, PLC data highway, and remote I/O network termination points where any part of the circuit is routed outside of the building envelope. Surge protection devices shall be Transtector “DRDC Series” (RS-232); Transtector “FSP Series” (RS-422), Phoenix Contact “PlugTrab Series” or Citel “E280 Series”.

f. All telephone lines at points of connection to the system. Protection devices for dial-up circuits shall be Transtector “TSJ Series”, Telebyte “Model 22PX”, Citel “BP1-T”, or equal. Protection devices for full period circuits shall be Transtector “LMP Series”, Northern Technologies “DLP-S Series”, Phoenix Contact “TeleTrab Series”, or Circuit Components, Inc. “SPR-TM Series.”

2.7 SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION

A. System Supplier shall be responsible for providing all software required as described below.

B. System Supplier shall furnish complete documentation on all software supplied with the systems specified herein, excluding the Plant Control System (PCS) software (RSLogix & GE IFix) which shall be furnished by the City.


Operating systems, compilers, assemblers, VFD configuration software, and utility and diagnostic programs that are standard commercial products of third parties need not be included in the optical media backup. Software documentation shall consist of the following principal items.

1. One (1) backup set of any integrated circuit or solid-state memory-based plug-in firmware used.

2. Two (2) complete back-up copies of system and application software in executable format on optical media compatible with the system furnished.

3. Three (3) sets of user reference manuals for all standard system and application software.

4. One (1) set of user reference manuals for all operating system software.

5. Three (3) sets of printed as-built reference documentation for any special software provided specifically for this contract.

6. For each licensed software product, all documentation provided by the product manufacturer shall be provided. This includes all reference manuals and any other documents that were provided by the manufacturer. One (1) set of this documentation shall be supplied for each and every piece of equipment provided. Multiple pieces of similar equipment or software require multiple copies of this documentation.

C. All software programs supplied as a standard part of System Supplier’s products for this project shall be licensed to the City for use on the system specified herein. Such license shall not restrict the City from using the software on the system provided hereunder or its replacement.

The City shall have the right to make copies of the software for use on the system provided. Specific requirements of System Supplier’s software license are subject to review and approval by the City.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The installation of equipment furnished hereunder shall be by the Contractor or their assigned subcontractors.

B. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the Section 26 05 11 - Electrical.

C. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for some instruments are indicated on the Drawings.

D. All outdoor instrumentation shall be protected from direct sun exposure. Instruments shall be placed in locations to limit south and west sun exposure. Sunshades shall be provided on instruments that are subject to the direct sun exposure. Sunshades shall be located so the opening faces north or east where possible. Sunshades shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

E. All necessary testing equipment for calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System Supplier. System Supplier shall also furnish calibration and maintenance records for all testing and calibration equipment used on the site if requested by the City.


3.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

A. The PCS and PLC programming software shall be furnished and configured by the City. System Supplier shall be responsible for the following configuration support tasks:

1. Furnish and install the necessary operating system software, utilities, and all standard software packages required for the instrumentation, valves, and other devices. Software provided shall be fully configured for use as specified herein and in related sections. This configuration should include but not limited to, security access from the Administrator functionality to the Operator functions, printing functions (including graphics, reports, system documentation parameters, etc.), reporting functions, and historical interface and historical data accessibility.

2. Provide complete startup, checkout, and calibration of all system hardware and I/O specified herein.

3.3 SYSTEMS CHECK OUT

A. System Supplier shall provide the services of a field manager to assist the installation contractor during installation, and to calibrate, test, and advise others of the procedures for installation, adjustment, and operation.

B. System Supplier shall appoint a field services manager who shall be available during all system check-out and startup activities, and who shall be immediately available to Engineer and the City by phone or on site for the duration of this project.

C. After each instrument has been installed, a technical representative of System Supplier shall calibrate each instrument as part of the pre start up testing and shall provide a written calibration report for each instrument, indicating the results and final settings. The adjustments of calibrated instruments shall be sealed or marked, insofar as possible, to discourage tampering. Instrument calibration shall be done before checkout of the system operation. A typical instrument calibration report is attached to the end of this section.

D. After installation and wiring connections are complete, the field supervisor, with additional System Supplier’s personnel shall verify that each external connection to the system is correctly wired and field process components and devices are functioning as intended. System Supplier shall be responsible for completing the following scope of work.

1. Analog Signals. Analog input signals shall be simulated at the transmitting source, and verified to be received at the proper register address in the control system. Analog outputs shall be generated at the control system, and verified to be received with the correct polarity, at the respective receiving device.

2. Discrete Signals. Discrete input and output signals shall be simulated and verified that they are received at the respective receiving device, and at the proper voltage.

3. Devices by Other Suppliers. If interrelated devices furnished by other suppliers, under other contracts, or by the City, such as valve actuators, motor controls, and instruments, do not perform properly at the time of system checkout, the field manager shall use suitable test equipment to introduce simulated signals to and/or measure signals from these devices to locate the sources of trouble or malfunction.

E. The System Supplier shall submit a written report on the results of such tests to the City. Additional documentation shall be furnished as requested by the City to establish responsibility for corrective measures. System Supplier shall verify, in writing, to the City that System Supplier has successfully completed the external connection check before beginning system startup or field acceptance testing.


F. After the field manager has completed the system check and submitted his Systems Check Out report, System Supplier shall supply a factory-trained engineer to provide on-site start up assistance. During the startup period, these personnel shall thoroughly check all equipment, correct any deficiencies, and verify the proper operation of all components. A Minimum of five (5) working days shall be included for this task.

3.4 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. The system shall be acceptance tested at the factory and on site.

B. System Supplier shall prepare a testing procedure to be approved by the City that shall demonstrate that the system conforms to the specifications. The testing procedure shall be submitted at least thirty (30) days in advance of testing. The testing shall be conducted by System Supplier and witnessed by the City.

C. System Supplier shall notify the City in writing at least twenty-one (21) days before the proposed testing date. If the factory acceptance test is concluded unsuccessfully, the test shall be repeated. System Supplier shall reimburse the City for all expenses incurred in connection with attending repeated factory or site testing necessitated by system failure or inadequate preparation.

D. After system assembly and debugging at System Supplier’s facility, the system shall be tested before the system is shipped to the site.

E. The system shall operate continuously for at least 72 hours without faults. This operational test may run concurrently with the demonstration of hardware functions. The test procedure shall also include at a least four-hour period for discretionary tests to be conducted by the City.

F. For systems with software configuration by the City, a preliminary version of such configured software may be used as part of the factory acceptance test.

1. Processors, processor modules, and peripheral devices associated with the system shall be assembled together as they will be installed in the field and shall be tested. The test shall demonstrate proper operation of each hardware device and communications among devices, and shall include verification of selected analog and discrete inputs and outputs.

3.5 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. After installation and checkout by System Supplier’s personnel, the system shall be subjected to an acceptance test.

B. Site acceptance testing shall be scheduled after receipt of the System Check Out Report and System Supplier shall verify that all field signal changes are reflected in the proper address locations in the system database.

C. The site acceptance testing shall follow the same procedure as the factory testing and shall operate without loss of basic functions. In addition, the System Supplier and Contractor shall support Functional and Operational testing as required in Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements.

The Functional demonstration shall confirm that the status, alarm, and process variable signals are valid and are being updated appropriately, and that the discrete and analog output signals from the control system are being correctly transmitted and implemented. Any errors or abnormal occurrences shall be recorded by System Supplier’s field representative for the Test Manager.


System Supplier’s field representative need not be continuously present during the site acceptance testing, but shall be available to respond to the site within one (1) hour of notification. The representative shall inspect the system for faults at least once every twenty-four (24) hours and shall log or record any noted problems. The log shall include a description of the problem, its apparent cause, and any corrective action taken.

1. Failure of Redundant Equipment. Failure of redundant equipment shall not be considered downtime provided that automatic failover occurs as specified and, in the opinion of Engineer, the failure was not caused by deficiency in design or installation. In the event of repeated failure of any hardware component or software module, the acceptance test shall be terminated and re-started.

2. Completion of Test. Successful completion of the site acceptance test, including the operational demonstration per Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements.

3.6 TRAINING

A. System Supplier shall conduct training courses for personnel selected by the City. Training shall be provided. Training shall be conducted by experienced instructors who are familiar with the specific instrumentation supplied.

B. In general, System Supplier’s standard training courses may be used to meet the training objectives specified. Where standard courses do not meet these objectives, additional coursework shall be developed. Clock hour requirements for each level of training are shall be as listed. A "clock hour" is defined as one (1) hour of instruction or supervised training exercise. Training hour requirements are the number of hours of training to be provided for each student. Additional training time shall be provided if considered necessary to meet the training objectives.

1. Training Costs. All costs associated with the training program; excluding travel, lodging, and per diem expenses for the City’s personnel to attend off-site training programs; shall be the responsibility of System Supplier and shall be included in the contract price.

2. Lessons. Training lesson plans and other information for the second stage submittal as defined herein shall be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to the start of training.

C. Training on the calibration, maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair for the instrument devices provided under this project shall be provided. Training shall also be provided for any hand-held or computer-based calibration devices and their associated software. Eight (8) hours of training for six (6) students shall be provided at the City’s facility.

D. System Supplier shall provide additional training to the City’s personnel on topics of the City’s choosing. Supplemental training shall be conducted in one (1) session at the City’s facilities using the hardware and software installed for this project. The training shall consist of eight (8) hours of instruction for six (6) students.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 64 00 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers programmable logic controllers (PLCs), including associated input/output hardware and panel mounted operator interface to control process equipment and serve as the interface to field devices.

B. The Instrumentation and Control System section shall apply to all equipment furnished in this section.

C. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the City.

D. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

E. Supplementing this section, the Drawings indicate the number and types of PLCs, locations of PLCs, and provide diagrams and schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment. All hardware, including power supplies, special cables, and other appurtenant equipment, shall be provided to meet the functional requirements described herein and indicated on the Drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS SECTION 01300 SUBMITTAL AND SHOP DRAWING PROCEDURES

SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 40 61 11 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 40 66 11 NETWORK SYSTEMS

SECTION 40 66 33 METALLIC AND FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION CABLE AND CONNECTORS

SECTION 40 67 11 PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES


A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 - Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures and as detailed in Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING

A. Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System.

1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare parts shall be furnished as follows:

Spare Part Quantity

Power supply modules Two (2) of each type used

I/O modules One (1) of each type used

Communications modules One (1) of each type used


PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. The PLCs shall be a ControlLogix System as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, without exception.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. There shall be no substitutions allowed.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. POWER SUPPLIES

1. Regulated dc power supplies shall be provided in each PLC enclosure for analog inputs, analog outputs, and digital outputs, digital inputs. Power supplies shall be suitable for an input voltage variation of ±10 percent, and the supply output shall be fused or protected against short-circuiting. Output voltage regulation shall be as required by the instrumentation equipment supplied under other Division 40 – Instrumentation sections.

2. The loop power supply shall be isolated as shall sources from analog cards to isolate from processor and digital rack power supply.

3. The power source for all digital inputs from field devices shall be separately fused for each digital input module. Unless otherwise noted, all field devices will be provided with dry contacts that close to provide an input to the PLC.

B. APPURTENANCES

1. The PLC Rack and I/O hardware shall be provided as complete systems, as shown on the block diagram drawings. The PLCs shall include all necessary hardware and software for a complete working system. All special rack or panel mounted power supplies, special interconnecting and programming cables, special grounding hardware, or isolation devices shall be furnished for proper operation of the equipment. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, intrinsically safe relays and current repeaters, surge suppression devices, and isolation devices shall be furnished and installed for proper operation of the equipment.

C. INPUT/OUTPUT HARDWARE

1. Input/output hardware shall be arranged as indicated on the Drawings. Programmable logic controller systems shall support the following types of input/output modules.

24 volt DC digital input and output

4-20mA DC analog input

2. All digital input/output hardware shall include isolation against surges of at least 1,500 volts. All output hardware connected to inductive loads shall be supplied with surge suppression devices and recommended by the PLC manufacturer to prevent damage to output hardware. Input/Output modules will be acceptable if they meet the following requirements:

a. All input/output modules shall utilize easily removable plug-in or hinged field wiring terminals to allow removal of modules without disconnecting individual wires.

b. Outputs for motor driven equipment will typically be powered from the driven equipment. Digital outputs for miscellaneous equipment shall be powered either from the controlled equipment or the PLC enclosure as indicated on the Drawings or as coordinated with the controlled equipment supplier.


Outputs that control process equipment specified under other sections or provided under other contracts shall be fully isolated or shall operate either interposing relays or relay-type digital output modules in the PLC cabinet.

c. Digital input modules shall sense voltages between 20 and 28 volts dc and shall have LED indicators for each point to display the status of the field contact. Each input module shall be suitable for being connected to a separate voltage source and return. Return voltage may be common to the entire input module. Digital input modules shall have multiple inputs. Digital input modules shall be Allen Bradley 1756-IB32 without exception.

d. Digital output modules shall control voltages from 20 and 28 volts dc and shall be rated at least 1 ampere. Outputs shall be individually fused and shall have LED indicators to display output status. Outputs shall withstand a surge of at least 80 amperes for one cycle and shall have an off-state leakage current not to exceed 2.0 mA. Digital output modules shall have multiple outputs. Digital output modules shall be Allen Bradley 1756-OB32 without exception.

e. Analog input modules shall accept linear 4-20 mA dc signals from field transmitters. Analog to digital conversion accuracy shall be at least 12-bit (0 4095 count) resolution. Analog input modules shall have multiple inputs. Each input shall be fully isolated from the other inputs and shall be current sourcing. Analog input modules shall be Allen Bradley 1756-IF6CIS without exception.

f. Analog output modules shall transmit linear 4-20 mA dc signals to field devices. Loop power for all analog outputs shall be provided by regulated power supplies in each input/output enclosure and shall be capable of driving a 0 to 600 ohm load. Digital to analog conversion accuracy shall be at least 12-bit (0 4095 count) resolution. Analog output modules shall have multiple outputs. Each output shall be fully isolated current outputs. Analog output modules shall be Allen Bradley 1756-OF6CI without exception.


A. All programmable logic controller systems shall be products of the same manufacturer and of the same series or product line. Processors, local and remote input/output hardware, communications modules, and specialty modules such as coprocessors and communications modules shall be interchangeable among all I/O panels and systems. PLC modules and hardware by other manufacturers will be acceptable only if the PLC manufacturer does not offer suitable modules and hardware for the same functions.

B. System Supplier shall provide adequate memory for the amount of I/O, control algorithms, and communications in the initial system.

C. Each PLC input/output enclosure shall be provided with at least 20 percent spare inputs and outputs of each type. Spare I/O shall be installed, wired, and interfaced properly to the terminal strip. The spare I/O shall be in addition to any I/O installed and reserved for future process signals as may be indicated on the I/O list. In addition, each PLC input/output enclosure shall be capable of accommodating 20 percent of additional input/output capacity of each type as originally assembled, without the need for additional expansion racks, communication adapters, cables, or PLC power supplies.

D. Each PLC processor and associated I/O shall have a future expandability of at least 50 percent of the provided system.

E. The PLCs shall be distributed and arranged as indicated on the Drawings.

F. PLCs will be installed in environments as specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System.


G. All PLC input/output signals for field connections shall be terminated through panel enclosure terminal strips. Direct connection of field wiring to the I/O module terminals is not acceptable.

H. Interposing relays shall be incorporated on all I/O circuits, where required by the application of isolate foreign power sources, where the continuous output rating of the PLC relay digital or output module is not sufficient to power the connected device or equipment, or where otherwise required by the System Supplier’s equipment. Interposing relays shall be provided for any digital output module output signal that leaves the PLC enclosure. Interposing relays shall be mounted in the PLC enclosure containing the output module that activates the relays. Relays shall be furnished as specified in Section 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instrument.

I. Programmable logic controllers and input/output hardware shall be housed in shop-assembled panels as indicated on the Drawings and as described in Section 40 67 11 Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances. In addition, input/output hardware associated with CP-4 shall be housed in existing panels or panels provided by others.

2.4 COMMUNICATIONS

A. Each programmable controller system shall be furnished complete with communication hardware modules for local input/output hardware, remote input/output hardware, or for host computers.

B. All PLC Rack mounted Ethernet hardware shall be Allen-Bradley 1756-EN2T, no exceptions.

C. Communication hardware shall be compatible with the cable, data highway, fiber optic, or radio communication media. Ethernet components and cable are specified in Section 40 66 11 Network Systems and Section 40 66 33 - Metallic and Fiber Optic Communications Cable and Connectors.

D. Each programmable logic controller shall be individually addressable so that only the selected controller responds when queried. IP addressing shall be used. Designation of a controller's network address may be either a software or hardware function.

E. System Supplier shall provide all necessary communications hardware. Hardware shall be included for, but not be limited to, remote I/O, data highway, host computer, fiber optics, Ethernet and radio.

1. PLC to Remote Communications Hardware. The master PLC shall communicate with the remote PLC rack over a remote I/O communications network. System Supplier shall include all rack mounted, enclosure mounted, or desktop mounted communications modules required for a complete working system.

2. PLC to Host Communications Hardware. Each PLC shall communicate to the host computer over a data highway communications network. System Supplier shall include all rack mounted, enclosure mounted, or desktop mounted communications modules required for a complete working system.

F. COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA

1. System Supplier shall provide all necessary cabling for the PLC remote I/O communications network. Communications cables shall meet the requirements of the manufacturers of the PLCs and communications modules. PLC communications media shall be as specified under Section 40 66 11 Network Systems.


G. MEDIA CONVERTORS

1. Convertors shall be supplied as required to provide conversion between fiber optic cable and copper cable. System Supplier shall coordinate the media converter and termination equipment with the fiber optic and network protocols.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. PLCs installation requirements are specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System except as described herein.

B. Field check, testing, and training shall be as specified in the Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System in coordination with Section 01900 General Commissioning Requirements.

3.2 CONFIGURATION

A. Configuration services are specified in the Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 66 11 - NETWORK SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Networks Systems section covers the furnishing of all hardware and software for network systems for the Instrumentation and Control System. Principal components of the network systems shall be as indicated on the block diagram Drawings and as described below.

B. System Supplier shall furnish all necessary equipment, interconnecting cables, accessories, and appurtenances for proper network operation and to meet the functional requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Configuration of all hardware shall be provided by the System Supplier.

C. Equipment and services provided under the Networks section shall be subject to the general requirements specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System. Supplementing this section, network data, special requirements, and options may be indicated on the Drawings.

1. Control System. Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System shall apply to all systems described herein. All applicable requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section shall apply to equipment and services provided herein.

2. Network Functional Description. The network system shall provide communications between the operator workstations, servers, and PLCs.

D. Division 1 General Requirements shall apply to all equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in Division 1, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

E. Supplementing this section, the Drawings indicate locations and arrangement of hardware and enclosures, provide mounting details, and may show other information regarding the connection and interaction with other equipment.

F. Governing Standards for network systems shall be as specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System.








SECTION 27 10 00 – BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS



SECTION 40 67 11 – PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES



A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.


B. NETWORK DESIGN SUBMITTAL

1. Shall be provided with the First Stage Submittals detailed in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System

2. A complete network topology diagram, detailing all hardware, cabling and the interconnections between all connected equipment. Interconnections to existing installed equipment and City-Supplied equipment shall be included in the diagram.

C. NETWORK OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE SUBMITTAL

1. Shall be provided with the Third Stage Submittals detailed in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System

2. All Network Design documentation shall be provided in the Operation & Maintenance manuals.

1.4 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare parts shall be provided as specified below.

Spare parts Quantity

Switches One (1) of each type

Converters One (1) of each type

Panel Mounted Fiber Patch Panel One (1) of each type

1.5 DELIVERY, SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE

A. Equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, protected, and stored as specified in Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System.

B. Identification of packaging shall be as described in Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH CITY

A. The System Supplier shall coordinate all demolitions, installations and rework on the existing networks with the City. No work shall be performed without the written consent of the City. The System Supplier shall submit a written request to perform work on the existing network, including date, time, scope of work, length of time, and any City’s support that may be required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. As listed in the subsequent sections.

2.2 GENERAL

A. The following paragraphs provide minimum Ethernet network device stipulations.

B. Special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, and isolation devices shall be furnished for proper performance of the equipment.

C. To the extent possible, components used for similar types of functions and services shall be the same brand and model line. Similar components of different network hardware shall be the products of the same manufacturer to facilitate maintenance and stocking of repair parts. Whenever possible, identical units shall be furnished.

D. A programming or system-configuring device, or software required for programming, shall be provided for systems that contain any equipment that requires such a device or software for routine maintenance and troubleshooting.


The programming device shall be complete, newly purchased for this project, and shall be in like-new condition when turned over to City at completion of startup. Programming software shall be licensed to the City.

2.3 ETHERNET NETWORK HARDWARE

A. Ethernet network hardware shall be provided as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. All specified functionality of provided Ethernet network equipment shall adhere to the IEEE 802 standards.

B. Ethernet Hubs will not be accepted for network systems.

C. Ethernet switches shall be provided to connect multiple network segments together, selectively forwarding traffic between the segments.

1. Industrial (Panel-Mounted) Ethernet Switches: Each switch mounted in process areas shall include the following functionality:

a. Ports: Switch shall support the quantity of 10/100BaseTX ports and 100BaseFX fiber ports to meet the functionality indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of 20% spare auto-negotiating 10/100Base-T, RJ-45 ports, and two (2) multimode fiber uplink ports. A minimum of four (4) UTP ports shall be provided.

b. Each switch connection shall automatically sense the network speed of the devices to which it is connected.

c. Capable of ring-based media redundancy with 30 ms recovery time.

d. Path Redundancy: IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

e. Prioritization: IEEE 802.1p QoS Support.

f. Network Segregation: Port VLAN.

g. Management: SNMPv3 and Browser-based management shall be supported.

h. IGMP snooping supported.

i. LED indication of the link activity for each port.

j. Environmental: Suitable for installation in industrial environments. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 60°C. Optional -40 to 60°C rating availability.

k. Redundant 24 VDC power supply inputs.

l. Conformal coating option for use in hazardous environments.

m. Mounting: DIN-rail mounted suitable for panel installation.

n. All necessary memory upgrades, software feature sets, and cables needed for proper operation of these switches shall be furnished with each switch.

o. Switches shall be Cisco Industrial Ethernet Series 2000, Model IE-2000-8TC-L, without exception.

D. Ethernet wiring connectors shall be RJ-45 male modular plug connectors.

1. Standard connectors shall be polycarbonate, clear connectors. Connectors shall conform to RJ-45 and ISO 8877 standards. Contacts shall be gold plated with a 0.5A current rating and a -25º to 60º C temperature rating. Connectors shall accept unshielded Cat-5e or Cat-6, AWG 24, solid conductor cable.

E. The System Supplier shall supply fiber optic media converters for all systems requiring conversion from copper media to fiber optic media. All converters shall be mounted in the network panels. The System Supplier shall coordinate the media converter and termination requirements with the fiber optic cable and network protocols.


1. Fiber optic to copper media converters for all computer networks shall convert twisted pair 10/100BaseT cable transmissions to 10/100BaseFX fiber optic cable transmissions.

2. Converters shall provide auto-sensing detection of network speed and full duplex or half duplex signaling. Converters shall have diagnostic LEDs for network speed and network traffic.

3. Converter copper port shall be 100BaseTX (RJ-45). Converter fiber port shall be compatible with connectors provided with fiber cable jumpers and compatible with fiber cable type and light wavelength.

4. Transmission Speed shall be 100Mbps on both ports. The converter shall be powered from 120 volts ac, or shall be provided with a plug-in transformer to provide the required voltage to the device.

5. Converters shall be as manufactured by Transition Networks, D-Link, Black Box, or Engineer approved equal.

F. Panel mounted fiber optic patch panels shall be Single mode, 12 Strand, LC, male-MPO cassette, AFL FM000090-B without exceptions.

1. Fiber optic patch panels in panels shall mount on DIN utilizing AFL FM003394.

2. Panel mounted fiber patch panel shall utilize field fusion spliced, MPO ends to plug into MPO cassettes, AFL FUSEMPO-SMA-3-F-6 without exceptions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NETWORK INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Additional network installation requirements are specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System. Networks shall be installed and tested in accordance with the following requirements.

3.2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION

A. The City shall fully configure all network devices.

3.3 NETWORK TESTING

A. After each network has been installed, a technical representative of System Supplier shall test the network and shall provide a written report for each test.

B. After each network has been installed, a technical representative of System Supplier shall test the network and shall provide a written report for each test. Specific testing requirements are described in the individual network specification sections.

C. A technical representative of System Supplier shall participate in the checkout of network systems. Systems check requirements shall be as specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System.

D. Unless specified otherwise, all test equipment for the calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System Supplier for the duration of the testing work and this test equipment will remain the property of System Supplier.

1. Ethernet Network Minimum Test Requirements. The following minimum tests are to be performed by the System Supplier:

a. Verify Link Integrity Status LED is lit on both sides of each link

b. Verify proper operation and failover of each redundant component and redundant link.

c. Verify alarming of each link failure.


d. Verify bandwidth Usage

2. Ethernet Network Test Reports. Upon completion and testing of the installed Ethernet network, the System Supplier shall submit test reports to the City in printed form. Test reports are to show all test results performed by the System Supplier for each port and piece of equipment. Date of calibration of the test equipment is also to be provided.

3.4 NETWORK TROUBLESHOOTING

A. It is the System Supplier’s responsibility to provide trouble-free and reliable networks.

B. The System Supplier shall employ any means necessary to ensure operational networks.

C. The System Supplier shall obtain any needed test equipment, including but not limited to time-domain reflectometers, protocol analyzers and network sniffers, to troubleshoot any problems.

D. The System Supplier shall utilize the services of a trained and certified Network Engineer that is regularly involved in troubleshooting network problems, in the event that operational or reliability problems exist.

E. Acceptable certifications include Cisco CCNP, Cisco CCIE, or Network Professional Association Certified Network Professional (CNP).

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 66 33 – METALLIC AND FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION CABLE AND CONNECTORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Network Cable section covers the furnishing and installation of cable systems to provide communications for the Plant Control System as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Accessories and appurtenances shall be provided as specified herein to provide a complete and properly operating system.

C. Equipment and services provided under this section shall be subject to the General Control System Requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control System Section and the Network Systems section. Supplementing this section, network data, special requirements, and options are indicated on the Drawings.

D. The City will provide Fiber and Cable at the CFFF building to bring in outside plant communications, and provide network patch cables for connection to equipment supplied by the City within the CFFF electrical room. All other fiber and network cable to be supplied by the Contractor.








SECTION 27 10 00 – BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS



SECTION 40 67 11 – PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES



A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 - Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. Drawings and Data Submittals shall be made as detailed in the Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System section for first stage submittals.

1. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment.

2. Product data shall include the following in the submittal:

a. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed Ethernet cable, fiber optic cable, and fiber optic cable accessories (pigtails, connectors, etc.)

b. Manufacturer specifications and data that clearly shows that the fiber optic cable meets all requirements specified herein.

c. Sample of the proposed cable.

d. Physical dimension drawings of all fiber optic accessories.


e. Proposed fiber identification sequence and labeling.

f. Provide off-line maintenance aids and on-line diagnostics to check the performance of the communication links and interfaces of devices on the data highway.

g. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL).

h. Provide a list of recommended special tools for fiber installation testing or maintenance.

C. Submittals shall be made as detailed in the Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System section for second stage submittals.

1. Cable test plan in coordination with Section 01 93 13 - General Commissioning Requirements, Pre Startup Tests, for approval by the City.

2. Notification of testing to the City minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to start of the testing.

D. Submittals shall be made as detailed in the Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System section for third stage submittals.

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall have the following items included in addition to those items specified in other sections:

a. Description of all components.

b. Methods of connection.

c. Connection diagram.

d. OTDR trace plots for all fibers.

1.4 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE

A. Equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, protected, and stored in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Due to the specialized nature of installing, splicing, terminating, and testing optical fiber cable, the Contractor shall utilize personnel who are experienced in such practices.

B. The installing Contractor or Subcontractor shall have performed similar installation and testing work on at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity.

C. The personnel assigned to the installation and testing shall also have experience on at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. SUBSTITUTIONS

Substitutions shall comply with specified requirements and be approved by the City.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT GENERAL

A. All Ethernet and fiber optic cable, fiber optic hardware and accessories shall be designed, assembled and connected in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and the Drawings.


2.3 ETHERNET UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE


Cat-6 cable shall be Belden 7883A or Engineer approved equal.

B. Ethernet cables and connectors shall be provided for a complete and working system, and/or as shown on the Drawings.

C. Cable for Ethernet wiring between devices in the same panel shall be UTP Cat-6 cable.

D. JACKET COLOR CODING

Jacket color coding for cables shall be as follows:

1. Standard Cat-6: Yellow

2. Crossover Cables: Yellow

E. CAT-6 CABLE

Cat-6 Cable shall meet the following characteristics:

1. 24 AWG

2. 4 pair solid strand FEP Teflon insulation

3. 100 Ohm impedance

4. 1-250 MHz frequency range

5. Min attenuation 19.9 Db

6. 100 Ohm impedance

7. Min NEXT 44.3dB/100MHz

8. Min PS-NEXT 42.3dB/100MHz

9. Min ELFEXT 27.8dB/100MHz

10. Min PS-ELFEXT 24.8dB/100MHz

11. Min return loss 20.1 dB/100 MHz

12. Max delay skew 45 ns

13. Max propagation delay 540 ns

F. Plenum rated cable shall have FEP insulation jacketing and FEP insulation for conductors. Non plenum rated cable shall have PVC insulation jacketing and polyethylene insulation for conductors.

G. Pre-wired and terminated patch cables with RJ-45 connectors and lever protecting boot shall be furnished for all connections to computers, network equipment, and controller equipment except where physical conditions (i.e. length over 12 feet or conduit size) require unterminated wire to be installed.

H. Patch cables shall be Cat-6 and shall meet the requirements Cat-6 cable specified in this section.

I. All Ethernet cables shall be wired using the T568-C family of standards.

J. Shielded Cat-6 cable shall be provided for connections between panels. Cable shall be routed for installation in tray and conduit.

2.4 FIBER OPTIC CABLE


Fiber optic cable shall be as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems, Belden, Commscope, TE Connectivity, or Engineer approved equal.


B. The fiber optic cable must meet all of the requirements of the following paragraphs.

1. The fiber optic cable must meet the following requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) Section 770.

2. Riser Applications – Applicable Flame Test UL 1666.

3. Finished cables shall conform to the applicable performance requirements of Table 8-6 and 8-7 in the Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA) Standard for Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable (ICEA S-83-596).

4. Every fiber in the cable must be usable and meet required specifications.

5. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification.

6. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad design.

7. All optical fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum load of 100 kpsi.

8. All optical fibers shall be 100 percent attenuation tested. The attenuation shall be measured at 850 nm, and 1300 nm for multimode fibers. The attenuation shall be measured at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fibers. The manufacturer shall store these values for a minimum of five (5) years. These values shall be available upon request.

9. The storage temperature range for the cable on the original shipping reel shall be –40ºC to +70ºC. The operating temperature range shall be –40ºC to +70ºC. Testing shall be in accordance with FOTP-3.

10. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum attenuation for each fiber at 23 +/- 5OC.

11. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at 850 nm/1300 nm (multimode) in any one kilometer length of fiber.

12. Required Fiber Grade: Maximum Fiber Attenuation at 850 nm shall be 3.5 dB/km.

13. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube. The nominal outer diameter of the buffer tube shall be 3.0 mm.

14. The cable shall contain the number of fibers indicated on the drawings (6, 12, or 24) inside of the buffer tube.

15. Each fiber shall be distinguishable from others by means of color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-A, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.”

16. The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks.

17. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall also be color coded with distinct and recognizable colors in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-A, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.”

18. In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors shall be stable during temperature cycling and not subject to fading or smearing onto each other.

Colors shall not cause fibers to stick together.

19. The buffer tubes shall be resistant to kinking.

20. The cable jacket color shall be black.


21. Fibers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed. Fibers shall be placed so that they do not interrupt the consecutive positions of the buffer tubes. In dual layer cables, any fillers shall be placed in the inner layer. Fillers shall be nominally 3.0 nm in outer diameter.

22. The jacket shall be continuous, free from pinholes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections. The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness; jackets extruded under high pressure are not acceptable. The jacket shall be smooth, as consistent with the best commercial practice. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible, protective coating, able to withstand the stresses expected in normal installation and service.

23. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or UL file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol, and sequential length markings every two (2) feet (e.g. “62.5/125 MICRON – TYPE OFNR – (UL) 00001 Feet”). The print color shall be white.

24. All outdoor fiber cable shall be gel filled. All indoor fiber shall be gel-free.

25. Flammability – All cables shall comply with the requirements of the 1996 NEC Article 770. All cables shall pass UL 1666.

C. Multimode fiber shall be either 62.5/125μm core diameter.

D. 62.5 μm core diameter multimode fiber optic cable shall meet the following requirements:

1. The multimode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-1989, “Detail Specification for 62.5 m Core Diameter/125 m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers.”

2. Core diameter: 62.5 + 3.0 micrometers.

3. Cladding diameter: 125.0 + 2.0 micrometers.

4. Core-to-Cladding Offset: < or = 3.0 micrometers.

5. Cladding non-circularity: < or = 2.0%. Defined as: [1-(min. cladding dia. + max. cladding dia.)] X 100.

6. Core non-circularity: < or = 6.0%. Defined as: [1-(min. core dia. + max. core dia.)] X 100.

7. Coating Diameter: 245 + 10 micrometers.

8. Graded index.

9. Numerical Aperture: 0.275 + 0.015.

10. Attenuation Uniformity: There shall be no point discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at either 850 nm or 1300 nm.

11. Minimum Bandwidth Requirement shall be 160/500 MHz-km at 850/1300 nm.

E. All optical permanent fibers shall be terminated with connectors that are type MPO. All fiber patch cables shall be terminated with connectors that are type LC.

1. Epoxy connectors shall be provided to terminate each fiber in the cable. Connector style (LC) shall be coordinated with the patch panels and field devices that will interface directly with the cable.

Connectors shall be compatible with the supplied cable. Connector loss shall be no greater than 0.3 dB. Loss measurement shall be performed at the time of splicing and documentation shall be furnished for each termination. Connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems Connectors, or Engineer approved equal.


F. Fiber optic jumper cables shall be furnished and installed for equipment interfacing and between termination cabinets. The jumpers shall meet the following requirements:

1. The jumpers shall be 62.5/ 125 microns50/ 125 microns, multimode for operation at 1300 nm. They shall be tight-buffered and be protected by Kevlar-type strength material.

2. The jumpers shall be supplied with connectors on each end. Connector types (LC) shall be matched to the equipment provided. Jumpers shall be sized to provide a single connection between the fiber optic hardware being connected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The System Supplier shall be responsible for the coordination of the installation of all cable furnished hereunder. The System Supplier shall be responsible for the termination of all cable furnished hereunder.

B. If the cable becomes damaged during installation, the Contractor shall stop work and notify the City immediately. The City will decide whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a splice at the damaged section. If the City decides to replace the entire reel of cable, the Contractor shall begin the installation at the last designated splice point. The damaged cable between these points shall be removed, coiled, tagged, and given to the City. Installation of new cable to replace damaged cable shall not be a basis of extra payment or contract completion time. In addition to installation of the new cable, the Contractor shall reimburse the City for the entire cost of the replacement reel of cable. This cost will be withheld from the contract price. If the City decides to install a splice at the damaged point, and the cable is damaged a second time, the entire reel of damaged cable (and all subsequent damaged reels) shall be replaced with new reels at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Straight through cables shall be wired using the T568-B pin assignment standard for both connectors as shown in the table below (connector pin numbers are left to right with the clip down). Crossover cables shall be wired using the T568-A pin assignment standard for one connector and the T568B standard for the opposite end as shown in the table below:

Connector Pin 568A Wiring Conductor 568B Wiring Conductor

1 White/Green White/Orange

2 Green Orange

3 White/Orange White/Green

6 Orange Green

4 Blue Blue

5 White/Blue White/Blue

7 White/Brown White/Brown

8 Brown Brown

D. The fiber optic cable manufacturer shall provide installation procedures and technical support concerning the items contained in this specification. Fiber optic cable installation shall meet the following requirements:

1. All fiber optic cable shall be installed, terminated, and tested by the System Supplier or his fiber subcontractor as specified above.

2. In pulling the cable, strain-release, or other tension limiting devices shall be used to limit the pull tension to less than 600 lbs.


3. Minimum bend radius restrictions shall be satisfied both during and after cable installation.

4. Horizontal, unsupported cable runs shall be supported at continuous distances of five (5) feet or less.

5. All conduit and cabinet entrances shall be sealed with RTV or other re-enterable sealant material to prevent ingress of water, dust or other foreign materials.

6. Cable routing within occupied office areas shall conform to Federal, State, and local electrical and fire codes.

7. Any non-terminating (field) splices shall be documented as to the physical location and cable meter mark (prior to stripping). Field splices shall be OTDR-tested and documented prior to final cable acceptance testing.

8. Fiber optic cables shall be installed in accordance with NECA 301-2004, Installing And Testing Fiber Optic Cables.

3.2 CABLE TESTING

A. After the network cabling has been installed, each network cable shall be tested.

B. Unless specified otherwise, all test equipment for the calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System Supplier for the duration of the testing work and this test equipment will remain the property of System Supplier.

1. The System Supplier shall utilize the previously specified test equipment, and additional tools as needed to validate the Ethernet cable installation.

2. All test equipment shall bear current calibration certification from a certified calibration laboratory, as appropriate.

3. Each cable shall be tested for open pairs, shorted pairs, crossed pairs, reversed pairs and split pairs.

4. A check off sheet shall be utilized, shall be signed by the technician testing the cables, and shall be submitted for approval.

5. Any identified faults shall be corrected at no additional cost.

C. Acceptance testing of the data highway (fiber and electronic equipment) shall be conducted as a part of integrated system field testing, as specified elsewhere. Prior to such tests, however, the fiber optic cable shall be tested as specified herein.

1. The System Supplier, or his fiber subcontractor, shall conduct fiber optic cable testing as specified below.

2. All testing following field installation shall be witnessed by the City. The Contractor shall bear the cost for field witnessed testing in accordance with the General Equipment Stipulations.

3. A test plan shall be submitted prior to the proposed test dates.

4. The test plan and procedures shall be mutually agreed to prior to conducting the tests.

5. Each optical fiber of each fiber optic cable shall be OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) tested on the reel at the factory, on the reel upon arrival at the jobsite, and after installation and termination.

6. For each fiber, an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) trace soft/hardcopy is required to be provided to the City.


7. OTDR traces shall be provided for each test (at the factory, on the reel at the job-site, and after installation).

8. A 100 foot launch cable shall be spliced to each fiber for each fiber OTDR test, to ensure accurate results. This end-to-end trace shall be performed from BOTH ends of the fiber. Also for each fiber, an end-to-end power attenuation (insertion loss) test shall be performed.

9. The attenuation test shall use a stabilized optical source and an optical power meter calibrated to the appropriate operating wavelength (1300 nm).

10. For each installed fiber, the power attenuation shall not exceed the following, tested from connector to connector at the respective patch panels:

(0.0035)L + (0.25)N + 3.0 dB

Where L = The length of the fiber optic cable in meters and N = the number of splices in the fiber.

11. Any fiber optic cables containing one (1) or more fibers not meeting this performance will not be accepted by the City, and shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost.

12. Each fiber optic jumper cable shall be tested and must exhibit an end-to-end attenuation of less than 2.0 dB at 1300 nm. Any jumper exceeding this level shall be replaced at no additional cost to the City. Any damaged cable still on the reel shall be returned to the manufacturer for replacement at no additional cost to the City.

13. All fiber cable testing shall be documented on pre-approved test forms. Three (3) copies of all documentation (including OTDR traces) shall be submitted to the City upon successful completion of the testing.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 67 11 - PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Panels, Consoles and Appurtenances section covers the furnishing of panels, consoles, and appurtenances as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with the Drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the City.

C. Division 1 General Requirements shall apply to all equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the Division 1, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

D. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the in the Structural notes per reference section.

E. General dimensions and arrangements and partial bill of materials are indicated on the Drawings. System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the console and enclosure sizes and arrangements to accommodate the equipment provided.


SECTION 01300 SUBMITTAL AND SHOP DRAWING PROCEDURES



SECTION 01900 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 40 64 00 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS


SECTION 40 66 11 NETWORK SYSTEMS

SECTION 40 78 00 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS


A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. Drawings and Data submittals shall be made as detail in the Section 40 61 11 -Instrumentation and Control System section for first stage, second and third stage submittals.

C. Submit confirmation of compliance with the requirements for equipment installed in a facility with Seismic Class, Design Category and Risk Category per structural drawing notes.


A. Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as per The Instrumentation and Control System section.


PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 PANEL DESIGN AND FABRICATION FEATURES


Enclosures shall be manufactured by Pentair or as approved by the City.

B. All Control Panels shall be UL508A certified.

C. All panels furnished shall conform to the stipulations of NEMA ICS-6-1993. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, the following paragraphs describe general fabrication specifications for the PLC cabinets, instrument panels, consoles, enclosures, and subpanels.

1. The power entrance to each panel shall be provided with a surge protection device. Refer to the Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Controls section for surge suppression requirements.

2. Power distribution wiring on the line side of panel fuses shall be minimum #12 AWG. Secondary power distribution wiring shall be minimum #14 AWG. Wiring for ac power distribution, dc power distribution, intrinsically safe, and control circuits shall have different colors and shall agree with the color-coding legend on System Supplier's panel wiring diagrams. With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be stranded copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a moisture resistant and flame retardant covering rated for not less than 90°C.

3. All internal panel wiring shall be type SIS or THHN stranded copper wiring rated not less than 600 volts. Electronic analog circuits shall be twisted and shielded pairs rated not less than 300 volts. Analog circuits shall be separated from ac power circuits. Intrinsically safe circuits shall be physically separated from other circuits in accordance with applicable codes. Wires within the panel shall conform to the minimum size as shown in the table below.

Type Min. Wire Size Color

AC Control 16 AWG Grey

DC Control (24VDC) 16 AWG Blue

DC Control (125VDC) 16 AWG Yellow

Analog Circuits 18 AWG Twisted Pair White

All wiring termination ends must have a feral crimp attachment to allow tighter torque regulation of the termination and to prevent unintentional whiskers from sticking out. All terminations must be tightened to the torque rating according to UL508A Standards.

4. All wiring shall be grouped or cabled and firmly supported inside the panel. Each individual wire in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with identification markers at each point of termination. The wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection and the identification numbers shall match the identification on the supplier's panel wiring drawings.


Wiring shall be bundled in groups and bound with nylon cable ties or routed in Panduit or similar nonmetallic slotted ducts. Ducts shall be readily accessible within the panel, with removable covers, and with space equal to at least 40 percent of the depth of the duct remaining available for future use after completion of installation and field wiring. Sufficient space shall be provided between cable groups or ducts and terminal blocks for easy installation or removal of cables.

5. Wire labels must be provided at each end of the wire termination. The wire label must show both wire destination abbreviations on each termination. For example: For a wire that runs between terminal TA-1 and terminal CB1-2, a wire label would be placed at the connection at TA-1 and at CB1-2 and should read as follows (the order is not important):

TA1

CB1-2

6. Each wire termination requires two identical labels. These labels will allow a person to know where the wire termination points are at each end of the wire. The wire labels should be clearly visible. Cable terminations will be marked similarly. The label for Cable# 3369, conductor #1 to terminal TA-1 should read as follows:

3369-1

TA-1

7. All wire labels must be wipe resistant, polyolefin material that can withstand ambient temperatures from -50ºC to 130ºC.

8. Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for 12 AWG wire, shall be rated 30 amperes at not less than 300 volts and shall be screw clamp type. Terminal blocks shall be fabricated complete with marking strip, covers, and pressure connectors. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification shown on the supplier's submittal drawings. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits, plus one (1) ground for each shielded cable. Not more than two (2) wires shall be terminated on a single terminal. Not less than 8 inches of clearance shall be provided between the terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for conduit and wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, and all fuses or circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance.

9. Power supply to the panels shall be from electrical sources shown on the Drawings, which may be backed by redundant utility feeds, engine generators, or externally mounted uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) specified in other sections.

10. All devices shall be provided with permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with the I/O list and the tag names in other sections and with the supplier's equipment drawings. All field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered labels or tape labels will not be permitted.

11. Nameplates shall be provided on the face of the panel or on the individual device. Panel nameplates shall have legends and approximate dimensions as indicated on the Drawings and shall be made of laminated phenolic material having engraved letters approximately 3/16 inch high extending through the black face into the white layer.


Nameplates shall be secured firmly to the panel. Panel face nameplates do not replace the requirement for device identification tags as specified under the Device Tag Numbering System paragraph. Terminals shall be sized for feral crimp type terminations.

12. Indicating lights shall be colored as shown in the following table unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, in other specification sections, or in the instrument device schedule.

Color Meaning

Red Associated equipment or device is “running,“ “open,” or is in an “unsafe” state or position.

Green Associated equipment or device is “stopped,” “closed,” or is in a “safe” state or position.

Yellow or Amber Associated equipment or device has “failed” or a process alarm condition is present or imminent.

White All other conditions not defined above.

13. Interior and exterior surfaces of all carbon-steel panels shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with rust inhibitive (universal) primer. The panel interior shall be painted white with the manufacturer's standard coating. All pits and blemishes in the exterior surface shall be filled. Exterior surfaces shall be painted with one or more finish coats of the manufacturer's standard coating in ANSI 61 standard gray color. Finish coats shall have a dry film thickness of at least 4 mils. One (1) quart of touch-up paint shall be furnished with the panels.

14. Instruments, power supplies, pilot devices, and appurtenances mounted within or on the face of the panel shall meet the requirements specified in Section 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments, for those items unless noted otherwise herein, on the Drawings or, if applicable, within the referring equipment specification section.

15. Panels shall be factory tested electrically and pneumatically by the panel fabricator before shipment.

2.3 FREESTANDING VERTICAL PANELS

A. The following paragraphs specify the freestanding vertical panels for CP-7 and CP-8:

1. Panel shall be a Stainless Steel Heavy-Duty Free-Stand Enclosure for Flange-Mount disconnects, NEMA 4X.

a. CP-7: Pentair A72XM6618SSN4, or approved equal.

b. CP-8: Pentair A72XM5418SSN4, or approved equal.

2. Panel structure shall be suitably braced and of sufficient strength to support all equipment mounted on or within, to withstand handling and shipment, to remain in proper alignment, and to be rigid and freestanding. Panel shall be manufactured from 12 Gauge Type 304 Stainless steel. Seems shall be continuously welded and ground smooth.

3. The front shall be a hinged door, or doors, with mounted instruments and control devices, fabricated from 12 Gauge Type 304 Stainless steel and suitably braced and supported to maintain alignment. Panels with hinged fronts shall be of sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear projection of flush mounted instruments.

4. Doors shall be essentially full height, having turned back edges and additional bracing to ensure rigidity and prevent sagging. Doors shall be mounted with strong, continuous, piano type hinges.


Positive latches, acting from a common door handle, shall hold doors securely compressed at top, side, and bottom against rubber gaskets. Doors shall be equipped with a mechanical interlock activated by master door that prevents slave doors from being opened first.

5. The front shall be stationary, with mounted instruments and control devices, fabricated from 3/16 inch carbon steel plate. Panel fronts shall be suitably reinforced between mounting cutouts and drilling to support instruments and devices without deformation and shall be free from waves and other imperfections, Panel fronts shall be recessed at the base. Adjoining panel sections shall be accurately shop fitted to assure satisfactory assembly in the field.

6. Panel instruments and control devices shall be arranged in a logical configuration for the plant operators. The centerline of recorders shall be within 3 feet and 5' 9" above the base of the panel for convenient reading and chart replacement. Control switches shall be within six (6) feet and 2 feet – 6 inches above the base of the panel. Indicators may be located within 2 feet – 6 inches and 6 feet – 6 inches above the base of the panels.

7. The bottom shall be open, and components shall be arranged for external wiring conduit and piping to enter from below.

8. Panel drawings show general instrument arrangement only. It shall be the panel manufacturer’s responsibility to locate and arrange instruments and equipment to meet all codes.

9. Illumination of panel interiors shall be provided by ceiling mounted lamp fixtures spaced at approximately 2 feet – 6 inches and near the door. Fixtures shall be nominal 40-watt fluorescent tube type, with a common "On-Off" switch near each end door. Duplex-grounded receptacles shall be provided for service and maintenance tools at spacing not greater than five (5) feet throughout the length of a panel. The lighting and receptacle circuit shall be fused separately from the instrumentation systems.

2.4 WALL-MOUNTED CABINETS

A. Cabinets, which contain the system components indicated on the Drawings, shall be suitable for wall mounting and shall meet the NEMA enclosure rating as indicated on the Drawings or the referring equipment specification section. The enclosures shall be fabricated from USS 14 gage or heavier, carbon steel, stainless steel, or fiberglass. Cabinets shall be equipped with full size gasketed doors with hinges and a chromium-plated or stainless steel three-point latch. A screened vent shall be provided in the enclosures.

B. All wall-mounted cabinets shall meet the requirements of the panel fabrication paragraph of this section.

C. Panels mounted outdoor shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel.

2.5 FLOW METER PANEL (FMP-1)

A. Flow meter panel shall be manufactured by Pentair and shall be as specified on drawing 1-E3.71, no substitutions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Installation requirements are specified in Section 40 61 11 Instrumentation and Control System. In addition, equipment furnished under this section shall conform to the following manufacturing stipulations.


B. All wiring shall be grouped or cabled and firmly supported inside the panel. Wiring shall be bundled in groups and routed in Panduit or similar nonmetallic slotted ducts. Ducts shall be readily accessible within the panel with removable covers and shall have a space of at least 40 percent of the depth of the duct available for future use after installation is complete and all field wiring installed.

Sufficient space shall be provided between cable groups or ducts and terminal blocks for easy installation or removal of cables. AC and DC wires must be placed inside separate wireways.

C. Where signal or loop wiring must be routed to more than one (1) panel or device, the required circuit routing shall be as indicated on the one-line diagrams. The panel fabricator shall provide such additional circuits as may be indicated on the electrical schematic Drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 71 00 – FLOW INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. This section covers the furnishing and installation of the flow meters and accessories required for the Instrumentation and Control System as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Flowmeters

Name Description Flow Range, gpm

FT-10 Loading Hopper Cooling Water 0 - 300

FT-11 Emergency Reuse Water 0 - 300

FT-12 Truck Fill Cooling Water 0 - 300



B. SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL


D. SECTION 40 61 11 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. GENERAL

1. Each device shall be a pre-assembled, packaged unit. Upon delivery to the work site, each device or system shall be ready for installation with only minor piping and electrical connections required by CONTRACTOR.

2. Primary elements shall derive any required power from the transmitter, unless otherwise indicated.

3. The instruments shall be installed to measure, monitor, or display the specified process at the ranges and service conditions indicated on the Drawings or as indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instruments shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule.

4. The flow meter shall be factory calibrated to the standard meter range.


A. SECTION

1. Submit in accordance with section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings

B. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Complete Shop Drawings for the sensors, transmitters, cables, and mounting assemblies.

C. CATALOG LITERATURE

1. Manufacturer’s literature on all components including sensors, transmitter, cables, and mounting assemblies.


D. CALIBRATION CERTIFICATES

1. Certification of calibration for the flow meter shall be included.


A. GENERAL

1. All instruments and devices shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All instruments and devices shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. Each shipment shall contain a listing of protective measures required to maintain sensor operation, including a listing of any common construction or cleaning chemicals that may affect instrument operation.

3. Any devices or instruments damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE



3. Store devices in a fully protected indoor storage structure and place packaged devices at least 6 inches above the floor. Do not stack packaged devices in a manner that exceeds the manufactures recommendations for load on stored items.

4. Store devices in such a way that they are readily inspected.

5. Any devices or instruments damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOWMETER

A. GENERAL

1. The following paragraphs provide minimum device stipulations. The Instrument Device Schedule shall be used to determine any additional instrument options, requirements, or service conditions.

B. FLOWMETER

1. Flowmeter shall be an insertion type turbine flow sensor with remote indicating display.

2. The meter sensor shall be a 3” stainless steel Seametrics TX800 or approved equal.

3. The meter sensor cable shall be sealed for 3 feet of possible submergence.

4. The display shall display flowrate in gallons per minute and total flow in gallons. Display shall be Seametrics FT440 or approved equal.

5. The flowmeter display shall be installed remote from the meter in panel FMP-1 as shown on the drawings.


6. Accuracy: plus or minus 2.5 percent of full range flow (691 gpm).

7. Flow range: 11.5 to 691 gpm

8. Temperature Range: 35 to 60 deg F

9. Line Pressure: 0 to - 50.0 psi

10. Power: 24 VDC for loop power of 4 to 20 milliamp flow proportional signal.

11. Sensor Cable Length: 30 feet

12. Insertion meter shall be supplied with stainless steel fittings and adjacent stainless steel piping for connections as shown on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. GENERAL

1. The installation of equipment furnished hereunder shall be by the CONTRACTOR or their assigned subcontractors.

2. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with Specification Division 26 – Electrical requirements.

3. Instrument Installation. The flow meter transmitter panel shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details are indicated on the Drawings.

4. Field Calibration of Instruments. After the flow meter has been installed, a technical representative of CONTRACTOR shall verify calibration of the flow meter and shall provide a written calibration report indicating the results and final settings. The adjustments of calibrated instruments shall be sealed or marked, insofar as possible, to discourage tampering.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 72 00 – LEVEL INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

5. This section covers the furnishing and installation of the level transmitters, staff gages, float switches and accessories required for the Instrumentation and Control System as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings. The level instruments included are listed in the following tables:

6. Submersible Level Transmitters

Name Description Elevation (or depth as noted) Setting, ft

Calibration Water Surface Elevations

4mA / 20 mA

LT-15 Spring Development Water Level 0.50 (Depth) 0.50 / 10.00 feet

7. Staff Gages

Name Description Low Reading, ft

High Reading, ft

SG-15 Spring Development Water Level 4.00 (El 794.00)

6.00 (El 796.00)

SG-16 Spring Development Weir Head 0.00 1.00

8. Float Switches

Name Description Water Surface Setting

Floating Condition

LSL-10 HRP-1 Sump Low Level Switch 829.0 ft Elevation

Contacts Open

LSL-11 HRP-2 Sump Low Level Switch 829.0 ft Elevation

Contacts Open

LSL-12 Low Spring Development Sump 794.0 ft Elevation

Contacts Closed







1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. GENERAL

9. Each device shall be a pre-assembled, packaged unit. Upon delivery to the work site, each device or system shall be ready for installation with only minor mounting, piping, and electrical connections required by CONTRACTOR.



12. Where possible, each instrument shall be factory calibrated to the calibration ranges indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. Transmitters or similar measurement instruments shall be calibrated using National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) approved bench calibration procedures, when such procedures exist for the instrument type. Calibration data shall be stored digitally in each device, including the instrument tag designation indicated on the Instrument Device Schedule.


A. SECTION


B. SHOP DRAWINGS

14. Complete Shop Drawings for the sensors, cables, and any mounting assemblies if required.


15. Manufacturer’s literature on all components including sensors, cables, and any mounting assemblies if required.


16. Certification of calibration each sensor shall be included.


A. GENERAL


B. SHIPPING



20. Any devices or instruments damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the CONTRACTOR’S expense.


C. STORAGE





25. Any devices or instruments damaged during storage shall be replaced at the CONTRACTOR’S expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. MANUFACTURERS

26. Submerged level transmitters shall be UNIK Series 5000 transmitters by GE

27. Staff gages shall be Stevens Water Monitoring System, Inc – Style A.

28. Submerged float switches shall be Cynergy3 Components Ltd – SLP Suspended Level Probe Model SLP4AP15.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Substitutions must fully comply with specified requirements as approved by the City.

2.2 LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

A. SUBMERGED LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

29. Submerged level transmitters shall be UNIK Series 5000 transmitters by GE.

30. The cable end shall be submersible polyurethane cable 35 feet in length.

31. Transmitter shall be a 4 to 20 mA 2-wire arrangement.

32. Transmitter range shall be 0 to 26 feet of water.

33. Transmitter shall be temperature compensated over a range of 14 to 122 degrees F.

34. Transmitter shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 0.04 percent of full range, calibrated at room temperature.

35. The transmitter shall have a “Depth Cone” pressure end adapter.

36. The transmitter shall have barometric reference with vent tube terminated in junction box and including a device to exclude moisture from the vent tube.

37. See drawings for mounting details.

38. Cable shall be suspended with a stainless steel mesh type strain relief. Strain relief shall be “Hubbell I-Grip” or approved equal.

2.3 STAFF GAGES

A. LEVEL STAFF GAGES

39. Staff gages shall be Stevens Water Monitoring System, Inc – Style A.

40. Staff gages shall be numbered as called for in Section 1.1 A Table 3.


41. Numbering shall be #.##. feet


2.4 FLOAT SWITCHES

A. CABLE FLOATS

43. Cable suspended float switches shall be Cynergy3 Components Ltd – SLP Suspended Level Probe Model SLP4AP15.

44. The float shall have a stainless steel body with polypropylene float activating a reed switch rated for 0.6 A 250 VAC or VDC resistive load.

45. The float switches shall be pipe mounted at the settings with switch action described in Section 1.1 A Table 4 and as shown on the drawings.

46. Float switches shall be provided with 49 feet of cable.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. GENERAL


48. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the Electrical specifications.

49. Instrument Installation. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for some instruments are indicated on the Drawings.

50. Field Calibration of Instruments. After each instrument has been installed, a technical representative of CONTRACTOR shall calibrate each instrument and shall provide a written calibration report for each instrument, indicating the results and final settings. The report shall also include the factory calibration certification. The adjustments of calibrated instruments shall be sealed or marked, insofar as possible, to discourage tampering.

51. Calibration shall be performed with a test apparatus including an engineer’s level with rod and other measuring devices to determine the elevation of the water surface and devices. Elevations shall be tied back to the project datum.

52. Individual device testing shall include verification of level transmitters and switch operation and wiring connections through to the PCS PLC terminations.

53. PCS integration testing will require coordination with the City. The Contractor shall assist the City’s integrator to verify that the PCS is receiving correct inputs, to simulate operating sequences by artificially manipulating the devices.

B. SUBMERGED LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

54. Submerged level transmitters shall be suspended with a stainless steel mesh type strain relief grip to within 0.1 inches of the required elevation.

55. Elevation shall be set by comparing the current output of the transmitter with the water surface relative to the staff gages to within plus or minus 0.3 inches of specified elevation.

C. LEVEL STAFF GAGES

56. Staff gages shall be mounted as shown on drawings.


57. Staff gages shall be positioned to within 0.1 inch of the specified elevation.

D. CABLE FLOATS

58. Cable suspended float switches shall be suspended such that the switch actuates to within plus or minus 1 inch of the specified level.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 73 00 – PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

This section covers the furnishing and installation of the pressure instruments and accessories required for the Instrumentation and Control System as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings. The pressure instruments included are listed in the following tables:

1. Pressure Switches

Name Description Pressure Range

Contact Closed

PDSH-2 Holding Reuse Filter 1 Differential Pressure Switch

0.2 – 2.9 psid P > 1.5 psid

PDSH-3 Holding Reuse Filter 2 Differential Pressure Switch

0.2 – 2.9 psid P > 1.5 psid

PSHAC-1 Air Compressor High Alarm 0 – 100 psig P > 155 psig

PS1AC-1 Lead Air Compressor Start/Stop 0 – 180 psig 120 < P < 150 psig

PS2AC-1 Lag Air Compressor Start/Stop 0 – 180 psig 100 < P < 150 psig

PSLAC-1 Air Compressor Low Alarm 0 – 30 psig P < 90 psig

2. Pressure Gages

Name Description Pressure Range

Air Compressor Receiver Tank 0 – 200 psig

Air Compressor General System 0 – 200 psig

Air Compressor Sorting Gates 0 – 200 psig

Spring Discharge at Pump Station 0 – 100 psig

Spring Discharge at PTSW-1 0 – 100 psig

Fllume Outlet Solenoid Valve SVFOE-1 0 – 100 psig

Fllume Outlet Solenoid Valve SVFOE-2 0 – 100 psig

Fllume Outlet Solenoid Valve SVFOW-1 0 – 100 psig

Fllume Outlet Solenoid Valve SVFOW-2 0 – 100 psig 3. Pressure Transmitter

Name Description Calibration Pressure, psig 4mA / 20 mA

PTSW-1 Spring Discharge Pressure Transmitter 0 / 100



B. SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL




1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. GENERAL

1. Each device shall be a pre-assembled, packaged unit. Upon delivery to the work site, each device or system shall be ready for installation with only minor piping and electrical connections required by CONTRACTOR.



4. Where possible, each instrument shall be factory calibrated to the calibration ranges indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. Transmitters or similar measurement instruments shall be calibrated using National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) approved bench calibration procedures, when such procedures exist for the instrument type. Calibration data shall be stored digitally in each device, including the instrument tag designation indicated on the Instrument Device Schedule.


A. SECTION


B. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Complete Shop Drawings for the gages, sensors, cables, and mounting assemblies.


1. Manufacturer’s literature on all components including the gages, sensors, cables, and mounting assemblies.


1. Certification of calibration each sensor shall be included.


A. GENERAL


B. SHIPPING



3. Any devices or instruments damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.


C. STORAGE





5. Any devices or instruments damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE SETPOINT PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. GENERAL

1. See switches PSHAC-1 and PSLAC-1 in Table 2, section 1.1 A for gage ranges and setpoints.

2. Pressure switches shall be United Electric 400 Series or approved equal.

3. See Table 3 in section 1.1 A for gage ranges and setpoints.

4. Switches shall have two SPDT contacts rated for 15 amps at 125 VAC.

5. Set point repeatability shall be less than or equal to plus or minus 2 percent.

6. Enclosures shall be coated aluminum NEMA 4X rated.

7. Connections shall be 0.25 inch female NPT lower mount


2.2 ADJUSTABLE DEADBAND PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. GENERAL

1. See switches PS1AC-1 and PS2AC-1 in Table 2, section 1.1 A for gage ranges and setpoints.

2. Pressure switches shall be United Electric J6 Series Model 160 or approved equal.

3. Gages shall open the contact upon rising to the upper setpoint then close the contact upon falling to the lower setpoint for starting and stopping the respective air compressor.

4. See Table 3 in section 1.1 A for gage ranges and setpoints.

5. Switches shall have two SPDT contacts rated for 15 amps at 125 VAC.

6. Set point repeatability shall be less than or equal to plus or minus 2 percent.

7. Enclosures shall be coated aluminum NEMA 4X rated.

8. Connections shall be 0.25 inch female NPT lower mount


2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. GENERAL

1. Pressure gages shall be Marsh Process Gauge or approved equal.


2. See Table 3 in section 1.1 A for gage ranges.

3. Dial size shall be 4.5 inches in diameter.

4. Tube and socket shall be copper alloy with stainless steel movement.

5. Window shall be safety glass lenses.

6. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5% of full range at the middle half of scale.

7. Connection shall be 0.25 inch Male NPT lower mount.

8. Case shall be polypropylene.

9. All gages shall be isolated with a ball valve even if not shown on the drawings.


2.4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH AND GAGE

A. GENERAL

1. Differential pressure switch and gage assembly shall be Ashcroft Type 1130 or approved equal.

2. See switches PSDSH-2 and PSDSH-3 in Table 2, section 1.1 A for gage ranges and setpoints.

3. Dial size shall be 2.5 inches in diameter.

4. Movement shall be piston type with Buna-N rubber O-Rings.

5. Window shall be glass.

6. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2% of full range at the middle half of scale.

7. Switch contacts shall two SPDT contacts rated for 5 VA switching at max voltage of 175 VAC/VDC with wire terminal connections.

8. Case shall be stainless steel.

9. Gage shall be isolated with a ball valve.


2.5 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

A. GENERAL

1. Pressure transmitter shall be UNIK Series 5000 transmitters by GE.

2. The cable end shall be 0.5 inch NPT conduit connection.

3. Transmitter shall be a 4 to 20 mA 2-wire arrangement.

4. Transmitter range shall be 0 to 100 psig.

5. Transmitter shall be temperature compensated over a range of 14 to 122 degrees F.

6. Transmitter shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 0.04 percent of full range, calibrated at room temperature.

7. The transmitter shall have a wet 0.25 inch female national pipe taper end connection.

8. The transmitter shall have gage reference.



PART 3 EXECUTION


A. GENERAL


2. Switches shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings, with installation conforming to the installation details.

3. All switches shall be installed in the vertical, upright position.

4. Thread sealer, suitable for use with the associated process, shall be used in the assembly of threaded connections. All connections shall be free from leaks.

5. All pressure switches, gage, and transmitter assemblies shall have a ball valve isolating the assembly from the process pressure and a valved port allowing the pressure to be applied externally vented to the atmosphere.

6. Lines shall be purged of trapped air at switch locations prior to installation of the switch or diaphragm seal.

7. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the Electrical section.

8. Instrument Installation. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for some instruments are indicated on the Drawings.

9. Field Calibration of Instruments. After each instrument has been installed, a technical representative of CONTRACTOR shall calibrate each instrument and shall provide a written calibration report for each instrument, indicating the results and final settings. The adjustments of calibrated instruments shall be sealed or marked, insofar as possible, to discourage tampering. Instrument calibration shall be performed as the Pre-Startup Checks in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.

10. Calibration shall be performed with a test apparatus including a 0.5 percent accurate gages with ranges corresponding to the device being tested and a means of applying test pressures (or vacuum) to the devices from the external port while the process pressure is isolated.

11. Individual device testing shall include verification of level transmitters and switch operation and wiring connections through to the PCS PLC terminations. This testing shall be performed as the Pre-Startup Checks in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.

12. PCS integration testing will require coordination with the City. The Contractor shall assist the City’s integrator to verify that the PCS is receiving correct inputs, to simulate operating sequences by artificially manipulating the devices. This testing shall be performed as part of the Operational Testing in accordance with Section 01900 – General Commissioning Requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 40 78 00 - PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Panel Mounted Instruments section covers the furnishing of all panel mounted instruments and accessories required for the Plant Control System (PCS) as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Equipment and services provided under this section shall be subject to Section 40 61 11 - Instrumentation and Control System. This section shall be used and referenced only in conjunction with that section, supplementing the Instrumentation and Control System section, instrument data, special requirements, and options are indicated on the Drawings.

C. When multiple instruments of a particular type are specified, and each requires different features, the required features are described on the Drawings.

D. The instruments shall be installed to measure, monitor, or display the specified process at the ranges and service conditions indicated on the Drawings. The instruments shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings.

E. Where possible, each instrument shall be factory calibrated to the calibration ranges indicated on the Drawings. Transmitters or similar measurement instruments shall be calibrated using National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) approved bench calibration procedures, when such procedures exist for the instrument type. For "smart" devices, calibration data shall be stored digitally in each device, including the instrument tag designation indicated on the Drawings.


SECTION 01300 SUBMITTAL AND SHOP DRAWING PROCEDURES



SECTION 01900 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 40 64 00 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS


SECTION 40 67 11 PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES


A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 – Submittal and Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. Drawings and Data submittals shall be made as detail in the Section 40 61 11 -Instrumentation and Control System section for first stage, second and third stage submittals.


A. Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System Section.


PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 GENERAL

A. The following paragraphs describe minimum device stipulations. The Drawings shall be used to determine any additional instrument options, requirements, or service conditions.

B. For systems that require a dedicated programming device for calibration, maintenance, or troubleshooting, one such programming device shall be provided for each City facility (quantity required shall be as indicated in the Instrumentation and Control System section). The programming device shall include appropriate operation manuals and shall be included in the training stipulations. For systems that allow the programming device functions to be implemented in software, running on a laptop computer, the software shall be provided instead of the programming device.

C. Devices indicated as requiring a serial interface shall be provided with all accessories to properly communicate over the serial link. An appropriate cable shall be provided to allow the transmitter serial interface to be connected to a personal computer. One licensed copy of the diagnostic/interface software shall be provided for each City facility (quantity required shall be as indicated in the Instrumentation and Control System section). Software shall be capable of running under the Windows 7 operating system. If the software furnished performs the same functions as the programming device, specified elsewhere, then the programming device shall not be furnished.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL DC POWER SUPPLIES

A. Power supplies shall be 24vdc, 480vac 3-phase input, manufactured by PULS without exception (PULS QT20.241). Contractor shall be responsible reviewing submittals and contractor provided equipment to ensure power supplies in a given control panel are sized sufficiently.

B. Regulated 24vdc power supplies for instrument loops shall be designed and arranged so that loss of one supply does not affect more than one instrument loop or system.

C. Power supplies shall be suitable for an input voltage variation of ±10 percent, and the supply output shall be fused or short-circuit protected.

D. Output voltage regulation shall be by the instrumentation equipment supplied. Multiloop or multisystem power supplies will be acceptable if backup power supply units are provided which will automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply. The backup supply systems shall be designed so either the primary or the backup supply can be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the instrument system operation.

E. Multiloop power supply connections shall be individually fused so a fault in one instrument loop will be isolated from the other loops being fed from the same supply.

F. Fuses shall be clearly labeled and shall be located for easy access. Multiloop supply systems shall be oversized for an additional 10 percent future load. Failure of a multiloop supply shall be indicated on the respective instrument panel or enclosure.


G. Power supplies shall be redundant and shall utilize PULS redundancy module YR40.242 without exception.

H. Battery backup of power supplies shall be PULS UZK24.121 without exception.

I. UPS module shall be PULS DC UPS Control unit UB20.241 without exception.

2.4 RELAYS

A. Relays indicated to be provided in panels, enclosures, or systems furnished under this section shall be of the plug-in socket base type with dustproof plastic enclosures unless noted otherwise.

B. Relays shall be UL recognized and shall have not less than double-pole, double-throw contacts. Control circuit relays shall have silver cadmium oxide contacts rated 10 amperes at 120 VAC.

C. Electronic switching-duty relays shall have gold-plated or gold alloy contacts suitable for use with low-level signals.

D. Relays used for computer input, alarm input, or indicating light service shall have contacts rated at least three (3) amperes.

E. Time delay relays shall have dials or switch settings engraved in seconds and shall have timing repeatability of ±2 percent of setting.

F. Latching and special purpose relays shall be for the specific application. Unless otherwise indicated, all relays shall have an integral pilot light that illuminates to indicate an energized condition.

G. Relays shall be Allen-Bradley 700-HC, or approved equal.

2.5 HEATERS

A. Electric heaters shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings, as specified, and for the application.

B. Heaters shall be sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure and to maintain the equipment above its minimum operating temperature.

C. Heaters shall be located to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations.

D. Heaters shall be controlled by adjustable thermostats with adjustment ranges of 30° to 90°F.

E. A fuse or breaker shall be provided within the enclosure to protect the circuit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD SERVICES

A. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided for installation, field calibration, startup, and training as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section.

B. Instruments shall not be shipped to the Work Site until two weeks prior to the scheduled installation.

C. System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the installation schedule with the Installation Contractor.

D. Each shipment shall contain a listing of protective measures required to maintain sensor operation, including a listing of any common construction or cleaning chemicals that may affect instrument operation.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 41 – HANDLING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 41 22 20 – HOISTS

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of the hoist for the Adult Fish Handling Brail and the Fish Transport Tank. The Contractor shall provide hoists and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Hoists included in this section are as follows:

Description Quantity Adult Handling Hoist (AH-1) 1 total Transport Tank Hoist (SH-3) 1 total






A. GENERAL


2. Submittal information shall include dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, description of operation, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals performance information, and nameplate data.


A. GENERAL

1. All hoists and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All hoists and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. Any hoists and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE


2. Any hoist and accessories damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.


1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. GENERAL



A. GENERAL

1. The equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be new and made by a single Manufacturer regularly engaged in such work, who has furnished like equipment and specialties for at least five (5) similar installations which have been in continuous successful operation for no less than five (5) years. Evidence of this experience, which shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and data on the equipment and its operation in those factories, shall be made available to the Engineer on request that they may determine whether the equipment and specialties offered meet the requirements of these specifications. Where major items of equipment are similar in type and description, they shall be the product of a single Manufacturer.

2. The hoist manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, factory assembly, and testing of the hoists; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the City for compliance of the hoists with the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ADULT HANDLING HOIST

The Adult Handling Hoist (AH-1) shall be Columbus McKinnon Lodestar with 3 – Step Infinitely Variable Control, or approved equal.


Capacity, ton 1 Lift Range, ft 8 Speed Range, fpm 0 - 32 Drive Variable Frequency Motor Size, hp 2 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz


The hoists shall be suitable for long term operation under the following conditions:

Duty Intermittent Ambient Environment Outdoor Ambient Temperature, Degrees F 0°-105°F Ambient Relative Humidity, Percent 10% - 100%

C. GENERAL

1. The hoist shall be a chain fall type with hook suspension. The hoist shall have a built in variable frequency drive for adjustable speed selection. Hoist enclosure shall be NEMA 4X. The hoist shall include a chain container for slack chain.

2.2 TRANSPORT TANK HOIST

The Transport Tank Hoist (SH-3) shall be Columbus McKinnon Lodestar XL with Motor Driven Trolley or approved equal.



Capacity, ton 4 Lift Range, ft 10 Hoist Speed, fpm 9 Trolley Speed, fpm 50 Drive Contactor Hoist Motor Size, hp 5 Trolley Motor Size, hp 0.25 Power 480 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz


The hoists shall be suitable for long term operation under the following conditions:

Duty Intermittent Ambient Environment Outdoor Ambient Temperature, Degrees F 0°-105°F Ambient Relative Humidity, Percent 10% - 100%

C. GENERAL

1. The hoist shall be a chain fall type with motorized trolley. The hoist and trolley shall be single speed. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X. The hoist shall include a chain container for slack chain.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. The hoists shall be installed as detailed on the drawings.

2. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the hoists with the Manufacturer. All construction and installation shall be in conformance with the drawings and specifications and the hoist Manufacturer's written recommendations.

3. Trolley rails shall be installed to flatness tolerances as required by the Manufacturer.



1. A Service Representative of the Manufacturer shall be present at the site for a minimum of one (1) work days to oversee and inspect the installation and initial startup of the hoists. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide certification that the hoists were installed as per the Manufacturer’s recommendations and that the hoists are functioning properly.


1. A Training Representative of the Manufacturer shall be present at the Site for a minimum of one (1) work day to instruct the City’s operations personnel in the proper operation and routine maintenance of the hoists. The scheduling of the training session shall be coordinated with the City in advance to ensure that the appropriate personnel are available.


C. WORK DAY


END OF SECTION


DIVISION 46 – FISH SAMPLING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 46 21 53 – CYLINDRICAL INLINE FILTERS

PART 1 GENERAL


This section covers the furnishing and installation of Cylindrical Inline Filters. The Contractor shall provide filters and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Filters included in this section are as follows:

Description Quantity

Juvenile Holding Pond Reuse Filters (HRF-1 and HRF-2) Two (2) total

Sampling Reuse Filter (SRF-1) One (1) total






Submit in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

A. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Complete Shop Drawings for the cylindrical screens including dimensional drawings, and notations for materials shall be submitted.

B. CATALOG LITERATURE

1. Manufacturer’s literature on all components including screen material, non-fabricated items, and electrical components.

C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Operation and Maintenance Documents for the cylindrical screens shall include procedures and maintenance frequencies.

D. SPARE PARTS



A. GENERAL

1. All filters and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. All filters and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.


2. Any filters and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE


2. Any filters and accessories damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

The following manufacturers are accepted for use on the project:

A. PARKER HANNIFIN CORPORATION

1. HRF-1 and HRF-2 shall be PARIND Model 4SB62-8FK1 filter housings with bags.

2. SRF-1 shall be a PARIND Fulflo FB Model 4LFB11-2SB filter housing with mesh basket.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 FILTER (HRF-1 AND HRF-2)

A. GENERAL

1. Filter body and hardware shall be 304 stainless steel construction.

2. Bags shall be 50 micron polyester felt.

3. Inlet and outlets shall be 8 inch 150# flanges.

4. Pressure ports shall be provided on the upstream and downstream sides of the filter bypass piping adjacent to the bypass valve and shall be 0.25 inch NPT female threads.

5. Pressure gages and instrumentation located in adjacent enclosure as shown the plans.

6. Air release valve port shall be provided on the top of the filter and shall be 0.50 inch NPT female threads

7. Filter shall be rated for a minimum 50 psi.

8. Provide 50 spare bags in addition to 6 bags in the filter.

2.3 INLINE STRAINER (SRF-1)

A. GENERAL

1. Filter body and hardware shall be 304 stainless steel construction.

2. Screen basket shall be stainless steel with US No. 20 mesh (0.034 inch diameter).

3. Gages shall be provided on the upstream and downstream sides of the filter. Gages shall be in accordance with Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation as shown on the plans.

4. Strainer shall have a 2 inch diameter National Pipe taper inlet and outlet piping.

5. Provide two (2) screen baskets, one (1) basket in the housing and one (1) spare.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. GENERAL

1. Filters and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 46 51 21 – TRAVELING SCREENS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. This section covers the design, furnishing, and installation of two Traveling Screens in the Smolt Holding Tanks located in the Sampling Building. The Traveling Screens shall be furnished complete and operable with drive motors, side and bottom seals, a debris scraper bars in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Travelling screens include the following:


Smolt Holding Tank Traveling Screens (HTTS-1 & HTTS-2)

Two (2) total




C. SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATION


A. SUBMIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS.

B. DESIGN CALCS

1. Design calculations sealed by a licensed engineer documenting the structural adequacy of the screen panels and frames and adequacy of drive motor to meet the loading requirements cited in these specifications.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Complete Shop Drawings for the Traveling Screens including the screen belt, frame, drive system, and seals shall be submitted.

D. CATALOG LITERATURE

1. Manufacturer’s literature on all components including bearings, screen material, drive motor, sprockets, fittings, and electrical components.

E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Operation and Maintenance Documents for the screen and drive motor shall include procedures, lubrication, and maintenance frequencies.

F. SPARE PARTS




A. GENERAL

1. The traveling screen and drive equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be made by a single Manufacturer regularly engaged in such work, who has furnished like equipment and specialties for at least five (5) similar installations which have been in continuous successful operation for no less than five (5) years. Evidence of this experience, which shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and data on the equipment and its operation in those plants, shall be made available to the Engineer on request that they may determine whether the equipment and specialties offered meet the requirements of these specifications. Where major items of equipment are similar in type and description, they shall be the product of a single Manufacturer.

2. The traveling screen manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, factory assembly, and testing of the traveling screens; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the City for compliance of the traveling screens with the Contract Documents.


A. GENERAL

1. The Travelling Screen and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. The Travelling Screen and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause for damage during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. The Travelling Screen and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE



3. Store the Travelling Screen and accessories in a protected area at least 6 inches above the ground or floor. Do not stack backwash assemblies.

4. Store the Travelling Screen and accessories in such a way that they are readily inspected.

5. The Travelling Screen and accessories damaged during storage shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. MANUFACTURERS

1. The Traveling Screen manufacturer shall be Hydrolox Engineered Polymer Screens, 1-866-586-2825, www.hydrolox.com, or approved equal.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS



2.2 MATERIALS

A. CONDITIONS AND MATERIALS

1. The traveling screens shall be fit within the angle guides welded on inside the existing aluminum Smolt Holding Tanks. Each screen shall be secured within the guides with a retaining bolt or pin. The maximum clearance through the travelling screen assembly or mounting guides shall be 0.069 inches. The top of the screen frames shall be flush with the top of the Smolt Holding Tanks to allow the existing fish flumes to pass over the top of the screen assemblies. The screens shall meet the following performance requirements:

Maximum screen openings, inches 0.069

Minimum Open Area, percent 27

Screen Material UV Resistant Acetal Plastic

Maximum Differential, feet of Water Pressure 1

Temperature Range 40 to 100ºF

Location Indoors

2.3 SCREEN BELT

A. GENERAL

1. The screen belt shall consist of a series of individual interlocking small pieces of plastic screen that are attached with plastic hinge rods such that the screen belts can be easily disassembled and reassembled on site to replace damaged screen pieces. The screen assembly shall include belt tensioners that are accessible from the sides when the screen assembly is lifted out of the slots in the smolt tank.

2.4 DEBRIS CLEANING SYSTEM

A. GENERAL

1. The Manufacturer shall design and provide a scraper bar on the downstream side of the screen to remove debris from the screen belt.

2.5 SCREEN DRIVE

A. GENERAL

1. The screen drive motors shall be gear reduction drives configured to fit on top of the screen frame so as not to interfere with the existing fish flumes as depicted on the contract drawings. Drives shall be a maximum 0.5 hp and include a totally enclosed fan cooled electric motor enclosure, motor canopy, severe duty coatings and seals, heavy duty bearings, and 115 VAC space heater. The drives shall be controlled by the project Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The power for the drive motor shall be 480 volt, 60 hertz, 3 phase power. The PLC will be programmed by the City to operate screens with timers or from an input to the PLC from level sensors detecting an increase in the head across the screen. The screen drive belt or chain assembly shall be enclosed for safety. The drive motor shall include a height adjustment feature that allows the drive belt or chain to be tensioned while providing a rigid mount for the drive motor.


2.6 SEALS

A. GENERAL

1. The side and bottom seals shall be the manufactures standard design. Rubber seals shall seal the bottom and sides of the screen belt to the frame of the screen assembly. Bulb type seals shall seal the sides of the screen assembly to the screen guides welded to the inside of the Smolt Holding Tanks.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

A. GENERAL

1. The manufacturer’s field service engineer shall be made available for the commissioning of each Assembly for a period to include 1 day of travel and up to 2 days to confirm proper Travelling Screen Assembly installation, adjustment, and operation in both automatic and manual mode. The field engineer shall be an employee of the manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years field experience in commissioning. The manufacturer’s sales agents and other sales and marketing personnel will not be accepted as the manufacturer’s field service engineer.

2. Commissioning shall require a minimum of separate trip to the job site of a minimum duration of 1 day each. A resume for the field service engineer shall be submitted for review and approval prior to performing field service.

3. Testing of all the travelling screen assemblies shall be performed in the dry to demonstrate that the belt material is within specified tolerances.

4. Traveling screen operation and backwash system testing shall include verification of operation and wiring connections through to the PCS PLC terminations.

5. PCS integration testing will require coordination with the City. The Contractor shall assist the City’s integrator to verify that the PCS is receiving correct inputs, to simulate operating sequences, and to assist with startup and commissioning testing.

3.2 TRAINING

A. GENERAL

No training is required.

END OF SECTION



PART 1 GENERAL


A. GENERAL

1. The Reuse Aeration Towers shall be constructed to be installed adjacent to the Juvenile Holding Raceways as shown in the drawings. The towers will be used during emergency operation of the Juvenile Ponds when a drawdown of the forebay shuts down the normal water supply for a period up to two weeks. The towers features an inline fan to produce a counter-current air flow to maximize gas transfer performance. Performance is measured by the degree to which dissolved gasses approach saturation as they flow across the tower. Super-saturated carbon dioxide (CO2) and/or nitrogen will off-gas, with treated outflow somewhat above saturation. Under-saturated dissolved oxygen will increase, with treated outflow slightly below saturation. The design target for this column is CO2 stripping, which requires counter-flowing fresh air to achieve the required efficiency. The Towers shall be furnished complete and operable with blowers in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Reuse Aeration Towers include the following:


Reuse Aeration Towers (AIRT-1 and AIRT-2) with blowers (HRB-1 and HRB-2)

Two (2) sytems total






A. SUBMIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS.

B. DESIGN CALCS

1. Performance calculations shall be prepared demonstrating that the system will perform to specified criteria.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit Shop Drawings of tower with pipe connections, mounting appurtenances and statement of recommendations or adequacy.

D. CATALOG LITERATURE

1. Manufacturer’s literature on all components including blower, piping, perforated plate, and fasteners.

E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Operation and Maintenance Documents for the towers and blowers shall include procedures, lubrication, and maintenance frequencies.


F. SPARE PARTS



A. GENERAL

1. The reuse aeration tower and blowers to be furnished under this contract shall be made by a single Manufacturer regularly engaged in the design and fabrication of such work, who has furnished like equipment and specialties for at least five (5) similar installations which have been in continuous successful operation for no less than five (5) years. Evidence of this experience, which shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and data on the equipment and its operation in those plants, shall be made available to the Engineer on request that they may determine whether the equipment and specialties offered meet the requirements of these specifications. Where major items of equipment are similar in type and description, they shall be the product of a single Manufacturer.

2. The reuse aeration tower manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, factory assembly, and testing of the towers and blowers; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the City for compliance of the towers and blowers with the Contract Documents.


A. GENERAL

1. The tower and accessories shall be handled, protected, and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. SHIPPING

1. The tower and accessories shall be protected with packaging to resist moisture, dust, handling, or other cause for damage during shipping. Packaging shall include a unique number that include the specification number as a reference.

2. The tower and accessories damaged during shipping shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. STORAGE

1. When delivered, the towers and blowers shall be stored indoors, protected from construction dirt. Protective shipping covers should be kept in place until ready for installation.


3. Unit shall be capable of withstanding 150 F (66 C) storage temperatures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. MANUFACTURERS

1. The Reuse Aeration Tower manufacturer shall be Water Management Technologies Inc, 1-225-755-0026, www.w-m-t.com, or approved equal.


B. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Substitutions must fully comply with specified requirements and demonstrate equivalent performance with design calculations.

2.2 PERFORMANCE

A. CONDITIONS

1. The tower and blower will comply with the following conditions per tower:

Pond Volume per tower (2 ponds per tower) 3500 cf

Fish Juvenile Chinook Salmon

Wieght per Fish 15 grams

Fish Density 0.1 lb/gal

Feed Rate 0.6%/day per 3 days/week

Protein Content of Feed 50% by weight

Maximum Unionized Ammonia Level 0.015 mg/l

Minimum Dissolved Oxygen Level 6.5 mg/l

Maximum Dissolved Carbon Dioxide Level 20 mg/l

Maximum Total Suspended Solids 10 mg/l

Maximum Duration of Operation 2 weeks

Reuse flow per tower 850 gpm

Fresh water flow per tower 50 gpm

Reuse flow Temperature 43 – 48 deg F

Fresh water flow Temperature 45 – 50 deg F

Intial Reuse flow PH 7.0 – 9.0

Fresh water PH 7.0 – 7.5

Intial Reuse flow Alkalinity 0 – 10 mg/l

Fresh water flow Alkalinity 40 mg/l

Elevation 830 ft above MSL

2.3 TOWER

A. MATERIAL

1. The reuse towers shall be of dimensions shown on drawings and the outer shell shall be constructed of alternating layers, (3) 1.5 ounce glass strand and (2) 24 once woven roving fiberglass with 20 to 25 mil clear interior gel coat lining, or approved equal material.

B. DISTRIBUTION PLATE

1. The distribution plate shall be mounted adjacent to the inlet connection and include anti-vortex nozzles to make a water seal and evenly distribute the water over the degas media. The design flow rate shall be 900 gpm (2.0 cfs). A 10”, 304SS vertical pipe shall be attached to the center of the distribution plate to vent blower air.


C. MEDIA

1. The structured media shall be OF21MA PVC 15mil structured media, or approved equal, 48” deep.

D. BLOWER

1. A blower-fan shall be mounted to the side of the degasser via an air inlet box. Blower air is directed into a full plenum located directly beneath the structured block media.

2. The inline fan shall be a Plastec 25-4 model, 3/4hp, 480 VAC 3PH, or approved equal capable of drawing approximately 1,000 cfm through the degas column.

E. MEDIA OUTFALL FLOODED PERFORATED PLATE

1. 304SS round plate with perforations such that water level builds to provide a water seal against blower air bypassing out the bottom of the unit. Equilibrium water level atop the plate shall be designed for 4”-6” of standing water at 900 gpm (2.0 cfs).

F. BASE FLANGE

1. A 5” wide base flange shall be provided around the perimeter of the base with 8 evenly spaced 0.63 inch diameter holes centered on the exposed width of the flange.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. INSPECTION, STARTUP, AND FIELD ADJUSTMENT:

1. An authorized service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to witness the following and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied for operation.

2. Installation of the equipment

3. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment

4. Startup and field testing for proper operation

5. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements

B. INSTRUCTION OF THE CITY’S PERSONNEL

1. An authorized training representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to instruct the CITY’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with necessary test equipment. Instruction shall be specific to the models of equipment provided.

2. The representative shall have at least 2 years experience in training. A resume for the representative shall be submitted, on request of the City or ENGINEER.

3. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of the first session.

4. Proposed training material and a detailed outline of each lesson shall be submitted for review. Comments shall be incorporated into the material.

5. The training materials shall remain with the trainees.

6. The CITY may videotape the training for later use with the City’s personnel.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

1. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.

B. ALIGNMENT

1. All equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance.

3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. COATINGS

1. Materials and equipment shall be coated as required in Section 09 91 00 – Coatings.

3.4 FIELD TESTS

A. TESTING

1. Each Gas Management Tower shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate that design flowrate is achieved through the towers and that all joints and tower shell exhibit no leakage.

2. Field testing will be witnessed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 3 days advance notice of field testing.

3. In the event the Gas Management Tower fails to meet the indicated requirements, it shall be modified or replaced and re-tested as above until it satisfies the requirements.

4. After each Gas Management Tower has satisfied the requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that all final adjustments have been made. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of all persons present during the tests, and the test data.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs of field tests, including related services of the manufacturer’s representative. If available, the CITY’s operating personnel will provide assistance in field testing.

END OF SECTION

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 1

EXAMPLE LIST OF WORK TASKS

This document presents an example list of work tasks that the Contractor may consider for the Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility Remodel (CFFFR). The Tasks are organized into the following sections:

1. General 2. Spring Development 3. Juvenile Holding Pools 4. Adult Handling Area 5. Sampling Building 6. Office Storage Building 7. CFNSC Control Building Modifications 8. Compressed Air System Constraints and Dependencies

In general the work in the various areas will proceed at the Contractor’s discretion. Work shall be subject to the constraints listed in Section 01010 – Summary of Work 1.4 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion. In general the list of tasks is sequential such as subgrade improvements need to proceed in a sequence of excavation, installation, backfill, and that subgrade improvements need to be installed prior to constructing improvements above. These dependencies are implied and not specifically called out. Some of the dependencies between work areas are noted in the work description Sections 1 – 8 with italicized notes in parenthesizes. The contractor shall become familiar with the work and be responsible for developing and implementing the work plan.

Work Descriptions

1. General a. Preparation of Submittals b. Review of Submittals c. Fabrication of equipment, piping, and materials d. Mobilization of Work Trailers and Accessories e. Construction Staging Area f. Implementation of TESC measures throughout the project work areas g. Installation of temporary Bypass Smolt and Fry Fish Piping (dependent on completion

of 3m) h. Installation of temporary Fish Holding Tanks and Fish Sampling Station (dependent on

completion of 2k) i. Decommissioning the temporary Fish the Holding Tanks and Fish Sampling Station and

Piping (dependent on completion of 3bbb and 5eee)

2. Spring Development a. Clearing and grubbing (dependent on completion of 1 f) b. Excavation and dewatering of Infiltration Gallery, Pump Station, and Weir c. Compaction and grading of Infiltration Gallery, Pump Station, and Weir Subgrade d. Installation of Pump Station Manhole Sump

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 2

e. Construction of Weir Structure f. Placement of Liner and Geotextile g. Partial backfill of Washed Rock h. Installation of Infiltration Gallery Piping i. Completing backfill of Washed Rock j. Saw cutting of Pavement for Piping and Conduit and Demolish Pavement k. Trenching, installing and backfill of Spring Water Pipeline, Power Conduit, and Control

Conduit and Pull Boxes up to west end of Juvenile Holding Pond Area l. Patching trench section with Asphalt Pavement m. Construction of Pump Station Foundation n. Placing Quarry Spall Cover Rock over Infiltration Gallery and backfilling around Pump

Station and Weir Structure o. Installation and grouting into place of Prefabricated Pump Station Building p. Installation of Pumps – SSP-1 and SSP-2 and associated Piping q. Installation of HVAC Ventilator Assembly – H2-EF-1, Exhaust Assembly, and Heater

H2-EUH-1 r. Installation of Lighting, Switches, and Outlets s. Installation of Electrical and Control Panels – LP-6 and CP-8, Junction Boxes, Conduit

and Wiring t. Installation of Stilling Well, Level Transmitter – LT-15, Staff Gage, and Float Switch –

LSL-12 in Sump u. Connection of electrical and control wiring to equipment and testing v. Startup and Commissioning

3. Juvenile Holding Pools (Constrained by constraints 1, 3, and 4)

a. Demolish section of Smolt Flume b. Remove and modify Smolt Flume associated with the Fish Counter c. Modify Smolt Flume upstream joint d. Extend Smolt Flume Support e. Install upstream Smolt Flume Connection Flange f. Install Fish Counter Access Platform and Shelter (dependent on completion of 5k) g. Install Fish Counter – FC-1 h. Install Fish Counter electrical and control Panels i. Install Fish Counter electrical and control conduit and wiring j. Modify downstream flume end to accept Fish Counter k. Temporarily make up downstream flume to Fish Counter to demonstrate fit up l. Remove and store downstream flume to Fish Counter m. Connect temporary fish transport piping to Fish Counter n. Connect electrical and control to Fish Counter, Test and Startup o. Removal and Storage of Access Stairs at NW corner of Site p. Removal and Storage of the Bird Wires q. Excavation for piping and Reuse Aeration Tower Sumps r. Core drilling and notching concrete Juvenile Holding Pools, Drain box, and wall for

piping

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 3

s. Connections to existing Water Supply Piping t. Remove and Relocate existing Juvenile Holding Pool Float Switches and associated

conduit and wiring to accommodate Holding Pool Supply Piping and Flume Actuators u. Installation of Water Supply Piping and Juvenile Holding Pool Supply Outlets v. Installation of Reuse Aeration Tower Sumps w. Installation of Reuse Aeration Tower Sump Overflow Outlets x. Installation of Reuse Aeration Tower Piping and Overflow Drain Piping y. Installation of subgrade Reuse Piping to Filters and Aeration Towers z. Installation of HDPE Spring Development Piping, Flowmeters - FT-10, FT-11, and FT-

12, Hand holes, connection to CFNSC Spring Supply Piping, and Sampling Building Supply Hand hole with pressure transmitter – PTSW-1

aa. Installation of Loading Hopper Spring Water Piping to Hopper and Truck Fill Lines bb. Installation Spring Supply Water Flow meter Panel – FMP-1 with conduit and wiring to

the flowmeters and the Control Panel cc. Installation of Reuse Piping and Reuse Pumps – HRP-1 and HRP-2 dd. Installation of level switches – LSL-10 and LSL-11 in the Reuse Pump Sumps with

associated conduit, wiring, and Junction boxes ee. Installation of Reuse Pump Sump Bulkheads with slide sluice gates and flow plates ff. Installation of Vacuum Cleaning Piping and Outlet Assemblies including induction

nozzles, vacuum hose, and vacuum assembly gg. Installation of buried Electrical and Control Conduit hh. Installation of compressed air supply line for Juvenile Flume Outlet Actuators ii. Backfill with compaction of piping, conduit, Reuse Aeration Tower Sumps, and for

Electrical Panel Shelter jj. Construction of concrete slabs around the Reuse Aeration Tower and Filters and under

the Electrical Panel Shelter kk. Installation of the Reuse Aeration Towers – AIRT-1 and AIRT-2 with Blowers HRB-1

and HRB-2 ll. Installation of the Reuse Aeration Filters – HRF-1 and HRF-2 and Access stairs and

Platform mm. Installation of the Reuse piping connections to the Reuse Aeration Towers and

Filters nn. Installation of the Reuse Aeration Filter Pressure Switches – PDSH-2 and PDSH-3 with

tubing, heat trace, insulation, and Hot Box – HB-10 oo. Installation of Vacuum Cleaning Pump with Pump Pad and Base and connection to

suction and discharge piping pp. Installation of the Electrical Panel Shelter qq. Installation of the Electrical Panel – CP-7 rr. Installation of Fish Separator Alarm Horn and Beacon – YAL-2 ss. Install Flume Outlet Actuators – FOE-1, FOE-2, FOW-1, and FOW-2 with Air Regulator

Valves – ARE-1, ARE-2, ARW-1, ARW-2, ARE-1, ARE-1, ARE-1, ARE-1 and Support Wheels

tt. Install Flume Outlet Solenoid Valves – SVFOE-1, SVFOE-2, SVFOW-1, SVFOW-2 in associated control panels

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 4

uu. Install Flume Outlet Air Regulators – ASCE-1, ASCE-2, ASCE-3, ASCE-4, ASCW-1, ASCW-2, ASCW-3, and ASCW-4

vv. Install Flume Outlet Air Regulator Valves – ARE-1, ARE-2, ARW-1, ARW-2, Air Piping, and Flexible Tubing

ww. Installation of Juvenile Holding Pool Access Walkways, Stairs, and Handrail xx. Removal of temporary fish flume piping connection to Fish Counter yy. Install downstream flume to Fish Counter zz. Re-install Bird Wires above Juvenile Holding Pools aaa. Connections of the Smolt and Fry Fish Return Piping from the Sampling Building to the

existing pipes and Holding Pool bbb. Startup and Commissioning

4. Adult Handling Area (Constrained by constraints 1, 3, and 4)

a. Demolition of the Adult Separator Holding Pool for Transfer Hopper b. Demolition of Adult Holding Pool Supply and Drain Piping c. Demotion and Modification of the Separator Supply Piping d. Modification to existing Adult Separator Holding Pool e. Installation of Water Supply Piping f. Installation of Overflow Weir Box g. Installation of Drain Piping h. Installation of Adult Hopper with Hoist – AH-1 and Hoist Support Frame i. Installation of Anesthesia Trough j. Installation of Adult Handling Table k. Installation of Adult Bypass Flume l. Installation of Adult Holding Pond Covers m. Installation of Electrical and Control Panels n. Installation of Fish Separator Alarm Horn and Beacon – YAL-1 o. Installation of CWT Detector (Procured by City) p. Installation of PIT Detector (Procured by City) q. Installation of Piping Heat Trace, Insulation, and associated Electrical Conduit, Wiring,

and Devices r. Installation of Lighting, Conduit, Wiring, and Switches s. Installation of the Adult Holding and Fish Separator Roof Structural Frame t. Installation of the Adult Holding and Fish Separator Membrane Roof System on the

Structural Frame u. Installation of Gutters on the Adult Holding and Fish Separator Roof v. Replace 6 inch and 10” butterfly valves supplying the Fish Separator w. Remove Grating and Perforated Panels in and adjacent to the Fish Separator Tank and

Dewatering Channel x. Prepare surface and recoat steel in the Separator Tank and Dewatering Channel y. Re-install Grating and Perforated Panels in and adjacent to the Separator Tank and

Dewatering Channel z. Startup, Testing, and Commissioning

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 5

5. Sampling Building (Constrained by constraints 1, 3, and 4) a. Demolition and Salvage of existing Sampling Tables and Recovery Tanks b. Demolition of existing Fish Conveyance Piping c. Demolition by coring holes Fish Conveyance Piping out of Sampling Building d. Demolition of selected Water Supply Piping e. Demolition of existing Ventilation Fan and Louver f. Demolition of selected Stairs and Platforms g. Demolition of the Concrete Slab for the Fish Transport Tank Pit h. Excavation for the Fish Transport Tank Pit i. Construction of Concrete Walls and Slab for the Fish Transport Tank Pit j. Installation of the Steel Framing, Beam, and Trolley Hoist – SH-3 for the Fish Transport

Tank k. Demolition of Concrete Walkway adjacent to Sewage Lift Station, Excavation, and Core

Drilling through Sampling Building Wall for new Sewer Pipe l. Installation of Sewer Pipe between Sewage Lift Station and Stub out into Sampling

Building m. Relocation of Stairs n. Removal and Salvage of Appurtenances in the Mud Room, Storage Room, and Office o. Structural Framing of the Lunch Room p. Rough Carpentry of Lunch Room Walls, Ceiling, and Flooring q. Installation of Electrical Wiring and Plumbing for Lunch Room r. Installation of HVAC – H5-HRU-1, H5-HP-1A, H5-BC-1A, H5-FC-1A, H5-FC-2A, H5-FC-

3A, H5-FC-4A, H5-FC-5A, H5-FC-6A, and H5-DH-1 for Lunch Room, Office, Storage Room, and Mud Room

s. Installation of exhaust fan ventilators – H5-EF-1, H5-EF-2, and H5-EF-3 t. Installation of Switches, Outlets, Communications, and Lighting for Lunch Room u. Installation of Door and Windows in Lunch Room v. Finish Carpentry of Lunch Room Walls, Ceiling, and Flooring w. Installation of Vinyl Flooring in Lunch Room x. Structural Framing of the Shower Room y. Rough Carpentry of Shower Room Walls, Ceiling, and Flooring z. Installation of Door in Shower Room aa. Installation of Electrical Wiring and Plumbing for Shower Room bb. Installation of Ventilator for Shower Room cc. Installation of Switches, Outlets, and Lighting for Shower Room dd. Installation of Shown in Shower Room ee. Finish Carpentry of Shower Room Walls, Ceiling, and Flooring ff. Painting Shower Room gg. Installation of Vinyl Flooring in Shower Room hh. Installation of Toilet, Sink, Faucet, Shower Fixtures, Shower Rod and Curtain, Paper

Towel Dispenser, Toilet Paper Dispenser, Mirror and Shelf Assembly, and Water Shutoff Valves

ii. Installation of Utility Sink with Faucet, Drain, and Eyewash Station jj. Installation of Water Heater – WH-2

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 6

kk. Installation of Pump Control Panel, Conduit, and Wiring for SRP-1 ll. Installation of Conduit and Wiring to electrical loads from the Main Distribution Panel –

MDP in the Electrical Room mm. Installation of Control Panels for Sampling Pump, Traveling Screens, and Radiant

Heaters nn. Installation of Transport Hoist Control Panel - SH-3 oo. Installation of the Smolt Holding Tank Overflow Boxes pp. Installation of the Fish Recovery Tanks qq. Installation of the Sampling Table rr. Delivery of Sampling Stations ss. Installation of the Fish Transfer Piping tt. Installation of the Sampling Pump - SRP-1 uu. Installation of the Sampling Recirculation Filter – SRF-1 vv. Installation of the Sampling Recirculation Head Tank ww. Installation of the Water Supply Piping xx. Installation of the Anesthesia Solution Pump to Waste and Spring Supply Water Piping yy. Installation of Travelling Screens - HTTS-1 and HTTS-2 zz. Installation of the Radiant Heaters – RH-1, RH-2, RH-3, RH-4, RH-5, RH-6, RH-7, RH-8 aaa. Modification of Exterior Landing and Stairs adjacent to the Fish Transport Tank Pit bbb. Installation of Gutters and Downspouts ccc. Painting interior of Mud Room, Storage Room, Office, Lunch Room, Shower Room,

and Bathroom ddd. Connection of electrical and control wiring to equipment and testing eee. Startup and Commissioning

6. Office / Storage Building (Constrained by constraints 3 and 4)

a. Demolish Concrete Pumpback Structure, Equipment, and Piping b. Excavate for and install 6, 12, and 18 drain piping leading into the existing drain

structure below the Office / Storage Building c. Excavation and Compaction of Building Foundation Subgrade d. Installation of Subgrade Power to Panel LP-3, Communication Conduits and Grounding e. Installation of Concrete Foundation and Floor Slab f. Installation of the Hatch in Floor Slab g. Installation of Building Framing h. Installation of stairways, platforms, and handrails i. Installation of Floors j. Installation of Roof Trusses k. Installation of Roof l. Installation of Gutters and Downspouts m. Installation of Siding n. Installation of Electrical Wiring and Panel – LP-3 o. Installation of Communications Rack p. Installation of Communication, and Fire Alarm Wiring q. Installation of HVAC – H6-HP-1, H6-BC-1, H6-FC-1, H6-FC-2, H6-FC-2, and H6-FC-2

APPENDIX A

Rev. 10/19/17 Page 7

r. Installation of Switches, Outlets, Communications, and Lighting s. Installation of Door and Windows t. Finish Carpentry of Walls, Ceiling, and Flooring u. Painting v. Installation of Vinyl Flooring w. Testing and Commissioning

7. CFNSC Control Building (Constrained by constraint 4)

a. Installation of MCC Section with Feed to MDP and concrete pad b. Installation of HVAC – H7-HP-1 and H7-FC-1 c. Installation of Power feed to Office/Storage Building – MCC 1M d. Testing and Commissioning

8. Compressed Air System (Constrained by constraints 1, 3, and 4)

a. Demolition and Salvage of existing Air Compressor Package b. Demolition of Selected Air Piping c. Installation of Duplex Air Compressor Package – C-1, C-2, and TSHAC-1 d. Installation of Duplex Air Compressor Panel – AC-1 e. Installation of Air Dryer – AD-1 f. Installation of Air Filters – AF-1 and AF-2 g. Installation of Pressure Switches – PSHAC-1, PSLAC-1, PS1AC-1, and PS2AC-1 and

Gage h. Installation of Air Piping with Automatic Drain Valves – DV-1, DV-2, and DV-3 and

relocated Pressure Regulators i. Installation of HVAC Exhaust Ventilator with Supply and Exhaust Dampers – H8-EF-1 j. Installation of Lighting, Switches, and Outlets k. Installation of Junction Boxes, Conduit, Wiring l. Connect electrical and control equipment and test m. Startup and Commissioning

rmartin

Typewritten Text

rmartin

Typewritten Text

rmartin

Typewritten Text

APPENDIX B

rmartin

Typewritten Text

- 2 – PECP

Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility Remodel October 2017

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1: ESTABLISH PROJECT BOUNDARY AND CLEARING LIMITS .................... 3

SECTION 2: CONSTRUCTION SITE STABILIZATION AND PROTECTION ...................... 4

A. Silt Fences: .................................................................................................................... 4 B. Straw Wattles: ................................................................................................................ 4 C. Gravel Roadside Check Dams: ...................................................................................... 4 D. Triangular Sediment Filter Dikes: ................................................................................... 5 E. Catch Basin Filters: ........................................................................................................ 5 F. Emergency Erosion Control Supplies: ............................................................................ 6 G. Construction Entrance: ................................................................................................... 6 H. Vehicle and Equipment Staging: .................................................................................... 6

SECTION 3: CONSTRUCTION PHASE ............................................................................... 8

A. Vehicles and Heavy Equipment: .................................................................................... 8 B. Conservation of Native Materials: .................................................................................. 8 C. Regulated or Hazardous Products: ................................................................................ 8 D. Spill Containment and Control Plan: .............................................................................. 8 E. Treated Wood: ............................................................................................................... 9 F. Construction Debris: ..................................................................................................... 10 G. Earthwork: .................................................................................................................... 10 H. Construction Water Discharge: .................................................................................... 10 I. Waste Concrete:........................................................................................................... 11 J. Additional Erosion and Sediment Controls: .................................................................. 11 K. Distressed, Dying or Fish Kill: ...................................................................................... 12 L. Cessation of Work: ....................................................................................................... 13

SECTION 4: INSPECTION OF EROSION CONTROLS..................................................... 14

A. Erosion Control Log Sheet: .......................................................................................... 14 B. Replacement of Ineffective Controls: ........................................................................... 14 C. Sediment Removal: ...................................................................................................... 14

SECTION 5: PERMANENT STABILIZATION MEASURES ............................................... 15

A. Removal of Temporary Measures: ............................................................................... 15 B. Seeding: ....................................................................................................................... 15 C. Mulch: ........................................................................................................................... 15 D. Plastic Sheeting: .......................................................................................................... 15 E. Placement of Sod: ........................................................................................................ 16 APPENDIX A-1 ...................................................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX A-2 ...................................................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX A-3 ...................................................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX A-7 ...................................................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX A-8 ...................................................................................................................... 1

Note: Not all Appendixes will be included in certain plans but their numbering sequence will remain for ease of referencing.

- 3 – PECP


SECTION 1: ESTABLISH PROJECT BOUNDARY AND CLEARING LIMITS The following actions shall be completed prior to any significant alterations to project area:

A. Tacoma Power will clearly flag all boundary and clearing limits associated with the site access and overall construction to prevent ground disturbance of critical riparian vegetation, wetlands and other sensitive sites beyond project’s boundary

B. Construction activity or movement of equipment into existing vegetated areas shall not occur until the limits are clearly marked.

C. The contractor shall ensure all construction personnel understand the boundary limits and they shall not operate any equipment outside of the established area or conduct any activities that will disturb the surrounding area.

- 4 – PECP


SECTION 2: CONSTRUCTION SITE STABILIZATION AND PROTECTION Prior to major earth disturbing activities, one or more of the following Best Management Practices (BMPs) shall be established by the contractor at all locations where water runoff may be expected to leave the site:

A. Silt Fences: (i.) Install down slope of all exposed areas where stormwater runoff may occur. (ii.) Silt fencing shall be purchased in continuous rolls and cut to avoid the use of

joints. When joints are necessary, the filter cloth shall be spliced together only at a support post, with a minimum 6-inch overlap and securely fastened at both ends to overlapping posts.

(iii.) Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 6-feet apart and driven securely into the ground.

(iv.) A trench shall be excavated approximately 8-inches wide and 12-inches deep along the line of posts and upslope from the barrier. The bottom flap of filter fabric shall be placed into trench and the trench backfilled with washed gravel.

(v.) If standard strength filter fabric is used, a wire mesh support fence shall be included between the fabric and the posts.

(vi.) Filter fabric shall not be stapled to existing trees. (vii.) The filter fabric shall be attached to the posts with heavy-duty staples that

are at least 1-inch long, tie wires or hog rings. (viii.) Silt fencing shall not be removed until the upslope area has been

permanently stabilized. (ix.) All silt fencing shall be inspected immediately after each rainfall and at least

daily during prolonged rainfall events with all required repairs immediately completed.

(x.) Silt fencing shall be installed parallel to any slope contours. (xi.) The contributing length of exposed soil to a fence line shall not be greater

than 100-feet. (xii.) Do not install below an outlet pipe or weir. (xiii.) Do not drive over or fill up against the silt fencing.

B. Straw Wattles: (i.) Wattles shall be placed in a single row, length-wise, on the contour, with

ends of adjacent wattles tightly abutting one another. (ii.) If on a sloped surface, the vertical spacing between bales shall be as

follows: • 1:1 slopes = 10 feet apart • 2:1 slopes = 20 feet apart • 3:1 slopes = 30 feet apart • 4:1 slopes = 40 feet apart

(iii.) The wattles shall be installed in a trench (3-5 inches in soft, loamy soil or 2-3 inches in hard rocky soil.) The wattle shall be seated in the trench with no daylight seen under the wattle.

(iv.) Each wattle shall be staked every 4 feet with a 1' x 1' wooden stake. The stake shall protrude a few inches above the wattle.

C. Gravel Roadside Check Dams:

- 5 – PECP


(i.) Dam material shall be 2-inch to 4-inch diameter quarry spalls. The quarry spalls must be placed by hand or mechanical placement (no dumping of spalls to form dam) to achieve complete coverage of the ditch or swale and to ensure the center of the dam is lower than the edges.

(ii.) The maximum spacing between the dams shall be such that the toe of the upstream dam is at the same elevation as the top of the downstream dam.

(iii.) Minimum berm dimension shall be 1,5-feet high with a 2:1 slope on the upstream side, a 1:1 slope on the downstream side and 5.5-feet long.

(iv.) In the case of grass-lined ditches and swales, check dams shall be removed when the grass has matured sufficiently to protect the ditch or swale. The area beneath the check dams shall be seeded and mulched immediately after dam removal.

(v.) Check dams shall be checked for sediment accumulation after each significant rainfall. Sediment shall be removed when it reaches one half of the original dam height or before.

D. Triangular Sediment Filter Dikes: (i.) All dikes shall be placed on the contour and shall be placed in a row with the

ends tightly abutting the adjacent dike. Filter material shall lap over ends 6-inches to cover dike junction and shall be secured by shoat rings.

(ii.) In general each side of the triangle shall be a minimum of 18-inches. (iii.) If the slope exceeds 10-percent, the length of the slope above the dike shall

be less than 50-feet. (iv.) The dike material shall be nonwoven, polypropylene, polyethylene or

polyamide geotextile fabric with a minimum unit weight 4.5 ounces per square yard, mullin burst strength exceeding 250 psi and ultraviolet stability exceeding 70-percent and an equivalent opening size exceeding 40.

E. Catch Basin Filters: All stormwater inlets within 500 feet of the construction site shall be protected. Since these methods are prone to plugging they will be cleaned or repaired as required to ensure proper performance. (i.) Catch Basin Inserts:

Catch basins within the project area shall be fitted with appropriate inserts to filter sediments from stormwater runoff.

The limited sediment storage capacity may require additional inspection and maintenance.

The maintenance requirement can be reduced by combining this filter with other types of inlet protection and general erosion control practices.

(ii.) Concrete Blocks and Gravel Filter: Place concrete blocks lengthwise on their sides in a single row around the

perimeter of the inlet and recessed approximately 2-inches into the existing soil so that the openings open outward. The ends of the adjacent blocks shall not abut. The height of the barrier can vary between 12 and 24-inches depending on the design needs by stacking combinations of blocks. The blocks shall not be stacked higher than 24-inches.

Hardware cloth or comparable wire mesh with ½-inch openings shall be placed around the outer vertical face of the concrete blocks to prevent stones from being washed through.

Place 3/4-inch to 3-inch clean gravel against the wire mesh to the top of the blocks.

- 6 – PECP


(iii.) Excavated Drop Inlet: Establish a 1 to 2-foot deep impoundment around the inlet structure to allow

the sediment to settle out of the stormwater prior to entering the drainage system.

Shape the impoundment basin to fit the site with the longest dimension oriented towards the longest inflow area.

The minimum volume of the excavated basin is 35 cubic yards. Grade the approach to the inlet uniformly. Establish weep holes into the inlet structure and protect them with wire

mesh and washed aggregate. Seal the weep holes when removing the structure and stabilizing the area.

F. Emergency Erosion Control Supplies: As a minimum, the contractor shall maintain the following materials on-site for emergency erosion control needs. (i.) 10-percent of the total quantity of erosion control material initially used to

establish the site. (ii.) Silt fence and/or straw wattles. (iii.) Oil-Absorbing pads. (iv.) Floating Oil-Absorbing boom whenever surface water is present. (v.) These items are in addition to the contractor’s standard Spill Prevention and

Control Plan. G. Construction Entrance:

All construction sites will have a construction entrance identified and if necessary stabilized with quarry spalls and/or other crushed rock to reduce erosion and prevent sediment from being tracked onto existing roadways. (i.) If a new construction access is constructed, it shall consist of approximately

10-inches of 4-inch to 8-inch quarry spalls topped with 2-inch to 3-inch of crushed rock for a total pad thickness of 12-inches.

(ii.) The construction access shall be the full width of the vehicle ingress and egress area and up to 50-feet long depending on the size of the overall project and the soil conditions.

(iii.) Whenever possible, the construction access shall be placed on firm, compacted subgrade.

(iv.) Additional crushed rock shall be added as necessary to maintain the proper function of the construction access.

(v.) The overall site condition shall be monitored throughout the project and crushed rock added as necessary to ensure that it does not become overly muddy or dusty depending on the weather conditions.

H. Vehicle and Equipment Staging:

(i.) All vehicle staging, cleaning, maintenance, refueling and fuel storage except that needed by service boats shall be performed in a “Vehicle Staging Area” located at least 150-feet from any stream, water body or wetland unless specially requested and approved in writing by NOAA Fisheries.

(ii.) All vehicles operating within 150-feet of a stream, water body or wetland shall be inspected daily for fluid leaks and all necessary repairs performed within the staging area.

- 7 – PECP


(iii.) The contractor shall document these Daily Vehicle Inspections on the attached “Daily Vehicle Inspection Sheet” included as Appendix A-1 and submit these inspection sheets to the City weekly to become part of the project file.

(iv.) If while operating the equipment, repairs become necessary, the machinery will be returned to the staging area for the required maintenance unless doing so will result in the release of additional pollutants or hazardous materials.

(v.) Before operations begin and as often as necessary during the project, any equipment that shall be operating below the high-water mark shall be steam cleaned until all visible external oil, grease, mud or other visible contaminates are removed. The vehicle washing shall occur in a location that will not contribute untreated wastewater to any flowing stream or drainage area.

(vi.) All stationary equipment such as generators, pumps, cranes or stationary drilling equipment operated within 150-feet of any stream, water body, or wetland shall have oil-absorption pads laid out, secured and maintained to capture any potential fluid leaks.

(vii.) At the end of the day all vehicles shall be removed from within or above the waterway and parked in the established staging area.

- 8 – PECP


SECTION 3: CONSTRUCTION PHASE The following activities shall be followed throughout the construction phase:

A. Vehicles and Heavy Equipment: Vehicles and heavy equipment selected shall have the least adverse impacts on the environment as possible. Specific criteria include but are not limited to minimum size and lowest ground pressure.

B. Conservation of Native Materials: (i.) If possible, native materials shall be left where they were found. (ii.) If materials are moved, damaged or destroyed, they shall be replaced with a

functional equivalent during site rehabilitation. (iii.) Large woody debris, native vegetation, weed-free topsoil and native channel

material displaced by the construction activity shall be stockpiled, protected from erosion, and used during the final site rehabilitation.

(iv.) Vegetation that must be removed will be clearly identified within the clearing limits.

(v.) Attempts will be made to leave the root nodes in place from all trees or bushes that are cut down during the clearing operation.

C. Regulated or Hazardous Products: (i.) A list of known regulated or hazardous products and materials that will be

used during this project is attached as Appendix A-2. (ii.) The contractor shall update this list upon award of the contract and

whenever additional regulated or hazardous materials are delivered to the project site and shall immediately submit this revised list to the Project Lead.

(iii.) This list also contains the specific procedures for inventory, storage, handling and monitoring.

(iv.) The corresponding Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for these products shall be maintained on site by the contractor and on file with Project Lead.

(v.) If at any time during work the Contractor finds buried chemical containers, such as drums, or any unusual conditions indicating disposal of chemicals, the contractor shall immediately notify the Project Lead and the Department of Ecology’s Southwest Regional Spill Response Office at (360) 407-6300.

D. Spill Containment and Control Plan: (i.) The spill containment and control plan is attached as Appendix A-3. (ii.) This plan contains the specific cleanup and disposal instructions for known

regulated or hazardous products, the quick response containment and cleanup measures that will be available on the site and their storage location; proposed methods for disposal of spilled materials; and employee training for spill containment.

(iii.) The contractor shall update this plan upon award of the contract and whenever additional regulated or hazardous materials are delivered to the project site and shall immediately submit this revised list to the Project Lead.

(iv.) Fuel hoses, oil drums, oil or fuel transfer valves and fittings shall be checked regularly for drips or leaks and shall be maintained and stored properly to prevent spills.

- 9 – PECP


(v.) In the event of a discharge of oil, fuel, or chemicals into a stream, water body or wetland or onto land with a potential for entry into these state waters, containment and cleanup efforts shall begin immediately and be completed as soon as possible, taking precedence over normal work. Cleanup shall include proper disposal of any spilled material and used cleanup materials

(vi.) The following is a list of agencies that shall be notified by the contractor in the event of a hazardous product or material spill:

Spill Circumstance Agency

Release of hazardous product or material into the soil or water.

Washington State Department of Ecology, SWRO Spill Response Team, 360-407-6300.

Petroleum products released into the water.

National Response Center, 800-424-8802.

Any spill requiring the notification of an outside agency.

Tacoma Power, Project Lead

(vii.) In the event that the contractor is unable to contain and clean-up the spill or release, they shall immediately contact: Cowlitz Clean Sweep, 888-423-6319 or another preapproved response contractor with the name and contact information submitted to Tacoma Power by the general contractor.

E. Treated Wood: Treated wood shall not be used on this project where the wood may contact flowing water or where it will be placed over water and will be exposed to mechanical abrasion or where the leachate may enter flowing water with the exception of pilings installed following NOAA Fisheries’ guidelines.

Projects that require removal of treated wood will use the following precautions: (i.) Treated wood debris. Use all necessary containment to prevent treated

wood debris from falling into the water. Appropriate steps include but are not limited to:

Tie off materials, components and equipment that could fall into the water to an appropriate lifting/holding device prior to releasing the element’s connections.

Tarps, screens or nets with an appropriately sized mesh shall be used to capture and contain any construction material that comes loose from the components as they are being removed.

All tarps, screens and nets shall be supported in a manner to ensure that they remain out of the water even when loaded with construction debris.

(ii.) If treated wood debris falls into the water, it shall be immediately removed and appropriate measures taken to improve the tarps, screens or net system.

(iii.) Disposal of treated wood debris. All treated wood debris removed from the project shall be disposed of at an approved facility licensed for solid waste.

(iv.) No treated wood pilings shall be left in the water or stacked along the stream bank.

- 10 – PECP


F. Construction Debris: Construction debris shall not be allowed to fall into any stream or water body. (i.) The amount of work that must be performed over or near water will be

limited. (ii.) If operating over the water, all small tools shall be secured to the structure

or work platform with lanyards, cables or ropes. (iii.) All materials or equipment shall be secured in a manner to prevent them

from falling into or coming into contact with the water body. (iv.) Tarps, screens or nets with an appropriately sized mesh to capture and

contain any construction materials prior to entering the water shall be established.

(v.) If lubricating fluids or oils are required, spill and/or over-spray containment shall be established prior to application.

(vi.) Construction material or debris shall not be stockpiled or stored in any manner that could result in their falling into the water.

G. Earthwork: Earthwork (including drilling, excavation, dredging, filling and compacting) shall be completed as quickly as possible. Also refer to the Construction Specification, Section 31 00 00. (i.) Excavation:

Material removed during excavation shall only be placed in locations where it cannot enter sensitive aquatic resources. Whenever topsoil is removed, it must be stored and reused on site to the greatest extent possible. If culvert inlet/outlet protecting riprap is used, it shall be appropriately sized depending on the culvert and topsoil shall be placed over the rocks and planted with native woody vegetation.Catch basins within the project area shall be fitted with appropriate inserts to filter sediments from stormwater runoff.

(ii.) All disturbed areas shall be stabilized including obliteration of temporary roads, following any break in work, unless construction will resume within 4-days.

(iii.) All boulders, rocks, woody materials and other natural construction materials used for the project shall be obtained from sources outside of riparian buffer areas.

H. Construction Water Discharge: All Construction water discharged during this project (e.g., concrete washout, pumping for work area isolation, vehicle wash water, drilling fluids) shall be treated prior to being released. (i.) Water Quality: Facilities will be designed, built and maintained to collect and treat all

construction discharge water using the best available technology applicable to site conditions. These facilities shall provide treatment to remove debris, nutrients, sediment, petroleum hydrocarbons, metals and other pollutants likely to be present.

(ii.) Discharge Velocity: If construction discharge water shall be released using an outfall or diffuser

port, velocities will not exceed 4-feet per second.

- 11 – PECP


(iii.) Spawning Areas: Spawning areas, submerged estuarine vegetation. Discharges of

construction water shall not be released within 300-feet upstream of spawning areas or areas with submerged estuarine vegetation.

Pollutants: Pollutants, including green concrete, contaminated water, silts, welding slag

or sandblasting abrasive shall not be placed in any wetland or within the 2-year floodplain, except cement or grout when abandoning a drill boring or installing instrumentation in the borings.

I. Waste Concrete: Practices to confine, remove and dispose of excess concrete, cement and other mortars or bonding agents including measures for washout facilities. (i.) Concrete truck chutes, pumps and internals shall only be washed out into

pre-established and dedicated infiltration ponds sized to provide full containment of the wash water. These dedicated ponds shall be located immediately adjacent to the location of the pour.

(ii.) Unused concrete remaining in the truck and/or pump shall be returned to the originating batch plant for recycling.

(iii.) Hand tools including, but not limited to, screeds, shovels, rakes, floats and trowels shall be washed off only into the pre-established infiltration pond.

(iv.) Any equipment that cannot be easily moved shall only be washed in areas that do not directly drain to natural or constructed stormwater conveyances.

(v.) Hardened concrete residue from the wash out operation shall be broken up and used as backfill or transported to an approved disposal site.

J. Additional Erosion and Sediment Controls: Control measures used during construction or extended work stoppages. (i.) A copy of the approved stormwater plans shall be maintained on the job site

whenever construction is in progress. (ii.) Should the erosion and sedimentation control measures initially installed

prove to be inadequate, the contractor shall immediately install additional facilities as necessary to protect adjacent properties, sensitive areas, natural watercourses and/or storm drainage systems. Deficiencies and corrections or improvements will be noted on the Erosion Control Inspection Log Sheet.

(iii.) All exposed and unworked soils shall be stabilized by effective measures to protect the soil from the impact forces of raindrops, flowing water and/or wind.

(iv.) From October 1 through April 30, no soil shall remain exposed and unworked for more than 2 consecutive days. From May 1 through September 30, no soil shall remain exposed and unworked for more than 7 consecutive days. This condition applies to all soils on site, whether at final grade or not.

The project lead reserves the right to waive this condition on a case-by-case basis for projects or portions of projects where the existing slopes are less than 5-percent and the soil conditions are such that offsite erosion will not occur. If this condition is waived, it will be so noted in the final report.

If site conditions later change and offsite erosion could occur, then the contractor shall immediately adopt all appropriate temporary erosion and sediment control measures.

- 12 – PECP


(v.) Applicable practices include, but are not limited to, temporary and/or permanent seeding, placing sod, mulch, plastic covering, soil application of polyacrylamide (PAM), or the early application of gravel base on areas to be paved or treated for dust control.

(vi.) Soil stabilization measures shall be appropriate for the time of year, site conditions, estimated duration of use, and potential water quality impacts that stabilization agents may have on downstream waters and ground water.

(vii.) Soil stockpiles must be stabilized and protected with sediment trapping measures.

(viii.) Work on linear construction sites and activities, including right-of-way and easement clearing, roadway development and trenching for utilities, shall not exceed the capability of the contractor to complete the work and re-stabilize the disturbed soil, meeting the time restrictions listed above.

(ix.) If plastic sheeting is used, it shall have a minimum thickness of 6 mils and shall meet the requirements of the Washington State Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction.

(x.) Plastic coverings shall be installed and maintained tightly in place by using sandbags with maximum 10-foot grid spacing in all directions. All seams shall be taped or weighted down along their full length and there shall be at least a 12-inch overlap.

(xi.) Cut and fill slopes shall be designed and constructed in a manner to minimize erosion.

(xii.) Runoff velocities shall be reduced by limiting the continuous length of slope with terracing and diversions, reduce slope steepness and roughening of the slope surface.

(xiii.) Off-site stormwater shall be handled separately from the stormwater generated on site.

Divert drainage from the top of slope by intercepting all approaching flows. Diverted flows shall be redirected to the natural drainage locations at or

before project boundary. (xiv.) Flows on the slope shall be collected in pipes, slope drains, or protected

channels. K. Distressed, Dying or Fish Kill:

(i.) In the event of finding distressed or dying fish, the contractor shall collect fish specimens and water samples in the affected area and within the first hour of such conditions, make every effort to have the water samples analyzed for dissolved oxygen and total sulfides.

(ii.) In the event of a fish kill, immediately notify the Project Lead, Ecology’s Southwest Regional Spill Response Office at (360) 407-6300, the SWRO Federal Permit Coordinator, Washington Department of Fish and Wildlife and NOAA Fisheries Law Enforcement Office at 800-853-1964. Also notify Michelle Day of NOAA Fisheries at 503-736-4734. If Ms. Day cannot be reached at that number, call her cell phone at 503-351-4393. If Ms. Day cannot be reached, leave a message for her, then call Keith Kirkendall at 503-230-5431. Notification shall include a description of the nature and extent of the problem, any actions taken to correct the problem and any proposed changes in operations to prevent further problems.

- 13 – PECP


L. Cessation of Work: Project operations will cease under high flow conditions that may result in inundation of the project area, except for efforts to avoid or minimize resource damage. All materials, equipment, and fuel must be removed if flooding in the area is expected to occur within 24-hours.

- 14 – PECP


SECTION 4: INSPECTION OF EROSION CONTROLS During construction, the contractor shall inspect all erosion control facilities and monitor in-stream turbidity daily during the rainy season and weekly during the dry season or after any major storm event that produces runoff to ensure the controls are working adequately. (Mandatory Activity)

A. Erosion Control Log Sheet: The contractor shall record these inspections on the Erosion Control Inspection Log Sheet attached as Appendix A-7 and submit a copy of these to the Project Lead weekly during the rainy season and monthly during the dry season and/or at the end of the project.

B. Replacement of Ineffective Controls: If monitoring or inspections show that the erosion controls are ineffective the contractor shall immediately mobilize work crews to make the necessary repairs, install replacement structures and/or install additional controls as necessary. Ineffective controls and replacements or improvements will be noted on the Erosion Control Inspection Log Sheet.

C. Sediment Removal: Sediment from the erosion control facilities shall be removed once it has reached one-third of the exposed height of the control structure.

- 15 – PECP


SECTION 5: PERMANENT STABILIZATION MEASURES

A. Removal of Temporary Measures: All temporary erosion and sediment control facilities shall be removed within 30 days after the final site stabilization is achieved or after the temporary facilities are no longer needed.

B. Seeding: Also refer to the Contract Specification, Section 31 25 00. (i.) Seed mixture shall vary depending on the actual site conditions. Refer to

Appendix A-8 for pre-approved seed mixes. (ii.) The seed mixture shall be applied at a rate of at least 140 lb / Acre. (iii.) Seedbeds planted between May 1 and October 31 will require irrigation and

other maintenance as necessary to foster and protect the root structure. (iv.) Seedbeds planted between November 1 and April 30 shall be protected with

geotextile, erosion control blankets, jute mat or clear plastic coverings until the plants are fully established.

(v.) Planting shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, excessively wet or the weather is otherwise non-conducive to satisfactory growth.

(vi.) When hydroseeding, the seed and fertilizer may be applied in one application provided that the fertilizer is placed into the tank no more than 30 minutes prior to application.

(vii.) Before seeding, install necessary surface control runoff measures such as gradient terraces, interceptor dikes and swales, level spreaders and sediment basins.

(viii.) Following initial surface roughening, the seedbed shall be firm with a fairly fine surface. Perform all operations across or at right angles to the slope.

C. Mulch: (i.) Mulch materials shall be long length wood fiber applied at the rate of 1500 to

2000 lbs/acre or straw mulch applied 2-inches to 3-inches deep. (ii.) Mulches shall be applied in all areas with an exposed slope greater than 2:1.(iii.) Mulching shall be applied immediately after seeding and in all areas, which

cannot be seeded because of inclement weather conditions. D. Plastic Sheeting:

The following BMPs are in addition to those previously listed under Section 3, “Construction Phase, Additional Erosion and Sediment Control Measures” and are intended for use while permanently stabilizing the site. (i.) Clear plastic sheeting shall be installed immediately on areas seeded

between November 1 and March 31 and remain until the vegetation is firmly established.

(ii.) Clear plastic sheeting shall be secured in the same manner as when used as a temporary erosion control measure.

(iii.) When the plastic covering is used on un-seeded slopes, it shall be kept in place until the next seeding period.

(iv.) Plastic covering sheets shall be buried (up to two feet) at the top of slopes in order to prevent surface water from flowing beneath the sheets.

- 16 – PECP


E. Placement of Sod: (i.) Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of ¾-inch at the time of

cutting excluding top growth and thatch. (ii.) Standard size sections of sod shall be strong enough to support their own

weight and retain their size and shape when suspended by the end of a 3-foot section.

(iii.) Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content (excessively dry or wet) may adversely affect its survival.

(iv.) Sod shall be harvested, delivered and installed within a period of 36-hours.

1

APPENDIX A-1

Daily Vehicle Inspection Sheet Project Name: All vehicles and equipment on site have been inspected for fluid leaks and fueled prior to leaving the staging area. All necessary repairs have been performed. Oil-absorption diapers around stationary equipment are in good condition, functional and secured. Any required maintenance related to fluid leaks is recorded under the “Notes” column. Date: Printed Name: Signature: Notes:

1

APPENDIX A-2

Regulated or Hazardous Products and Materials Project Name: The Contractor shall complete this list of regulated or hazardous products and materials that will be used during this project and submit it and the corresponding Material Safety Data Sheets, (MSDS) to the Project Lead prior to any work occurring on site. The list shall be updated whenever additional regulated or hazardous materials are delivered to the project site and shall contain the specific procedures for inventory, storage, handling and monitoring. Instructions: Complete the following table by including the procedures for each regulated or hazardous product or material that will be on site. Add additional lines and paragraphs as necessary. 1. PRODUCT OR MATERIAL:

A. Inventory Procedures:

B. Storage Procedures:

C. Handling Procedures:

D. Monitoring Procedures:

2. PRODUCT OR MATERIAL:

A. Inventory Procedures:

B. Storage Procedures:

C. Handling Procedures:

D. Monitoring Procedures:

1

APPENDIX A-3

Spill Containment and Control Plan Project Name: The following spill containment and control plan shall be completed by the contractor and submitted to the Project Lead prior to work beginning on site. This plan shall be updated by the contractor and submitted to the Project Lead whenever additional regulated or hazardous materials are delivered to the project site. In the event of a spill the contractor shall notify the following agencies: Spill Circumstance: Agency: Release of Hazardous Product or material into soil or water.

Washington State Department of Ecology, SWRO Spill Response Team, 360-407-6300

Release of Petroleum Product into the water.

National Response Center, 800-424-8802

Any spill requiring the notification of an outside agency

Tacoma Power, Project Lead

In the event that the contractor is unable to contain and clean-up the spill or release, they shall immediately contact: Cowlitz Clean Sweep, 888-423-6319 or another preapproved response contractor with the name and contact information submitted to Tacoma Power by the general contractor. Instructions: Complete the following table by including the necessary information. Add additional lines and paragraphs as necessary. 1. PRODUCT OR MATERIAL:

A. Notification and Emergency Response Procedures:

B. Specific Clean-up and Disposal Instructions:

C. Clean-up Measures to be Available On-Site Including Their Storage Location:

D. Approved Disposal Methods of Spilled Materials:

E. Employee Training for Spill Containment:

1

APPENDIX A-7

Erosion Control Inspection Log Sheet Project Name: All erosion control structures and facilities have been inspected and are operational. All required maintenance was performed and is noted below on the appropriate date. Date: Printed Name: Signature: Notes:

1

APPENDIX A-8

Approved Seed Mixes For Various Locations Temporary Erosion Control Seed Mix

Percent Weight

Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Chewings or Blue Grass 40 98 90 Perennial Rye 50 98 90 Redtop or Colonial Bentgrass 5 92 85 White Dutch Clover 5 98 90

Landscaping Seed Mix

Percent Weight

Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Perennial Rye Blend 70 98 90 Chewings and Red Fescue Blend

30

98

90

Low-Growing Turf Seed Mix

Percent Weight

Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Dwarf Tall Fescue 45 98 90 Dwarf Perennial Rye (Barclay)

30

98

90

Red Fescue 20 98 90 Colonial Bentgrass 5 98 90

Bioswale Seed Mix

Percent Weight

Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Tall or Meadow Fescue 75-80 98 90 Seaside/Creeping Bentgrass 10-15 92 85 Redtop Bentgrass 5-10 90 80

Wet Area Seed Mix

Percent Weight

Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Tall or Meadow Fescue 60-70 98 90 Seaside/Creeping Bentgrass 10-15 92 85 Meadow Foxtail 10-15 90 80 Alsike clover 1-6 98 90 Redtop Bentgrass 1-6 92 85

Meadow Seed Mix

Percent Weight

Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Redtop or Oregon Bentgrass 20 92 85 Red Fescue 70 98 90 White Dutch Clover 10 98 90

rmartin

Typewritten Text

APPENDIX C

rmartin

Typewritten Text

APPENDIX D

No. PG16-0222F Cowlitz Project Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility ...

Documents

Transcript of No. PG16-0222F Cowlitz Project Cowlitz Falls Fish Facility ...